User`s Manual PMM 9010

User`s Manual PMM 9010
NARDA
Safety
Test
Solutions
S.r.l. Socio Unico
Sales & Support:
Via Leonardo da Vinci, 21/23
20090 Segrate (MI) - ITALY
Tel.: +39 02 2699871
Fax: +39 02 26998700
Manufacturing Plant:
Via Benessea, 29/B
17035 Cisano sul Neva (SV)
Tel.: +39 0182 58641
Fax: +39 0182 586400
http://www.narda-sts.it
User’s Manual
PMM 9010
EMI CISPR RECEIVER
10 Hz ÷ 30 MHz
Including description of:
- PMM 9010F Fast EMI CISPR Receiver
10 Hz ÷ 30 MHz Full compliance
- PMM 9010/03P EMI CISPR Receiver
10 Hz ÷ 30 MHz Full compliance
30 MHz ÷ 300 MHz Compliance (PRF ≥ 10Hz)
- PMM 9010/30P EMI CISPR Receiver
10 Hz ÷ 30 MHz Full compliance
30 MHz ÷ 3 GHz Pre compliance
- PMM 9010/60P EMI CISPR Receiver
10 Hz ÷ 30 MHz Full compliance
30 MHz ÷ 6 GHz Pre compliance
- PMM 9030 EMI CISPR Receiver
Full compliance extension (up to 3 GHz)
- PMM 9060 EMI CISPR Receiver
Full compliance extension (up to 6 GHz)
- PMM 9180 EMI CISPR Receiver
Full compliance extension (up to 18 GHz)
- PMM 9010/Click Analyzer option
SERIAL NUMBER OF THE INSTRUMENT
You can find the Serial Number on the rear panel of the instrument.
Serial Number is in the form: 0000X00000.
The first four digits and the letter are the Serial Number prefix, the last five digits are
the Serial Number suffix. The prefix is the same for identical instruments, it changes
only when a configuration change is made to the instrument.
The suffix is different for each instrument.
Document 9010EN-31229-2.46 – Copyright © NARDA 2013
NOTE:
® Names and Logo are registered trademarks of Narda Safety Test Solutions GmbH and L3
Communications Holdings, Inc. – Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
If the instrument is used in any other way than as described in this Users Manual, it may become unsafe
Before using this product, the related documentation must be read with great care and fully understood to
familiarize with all the safety prescriptions.
To ensure the correct use and the maximum safety level, the User shall know all the instructions and
recommendations contained in this document.
This product is a Safety Class I instrument according to IEC classification and has been designed to meet
the requirements of EN61010-1 (Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control
and Laboratory Use).
In accordance with the IEC classification, the battery charger of this product meets requirements Safety
Class II and Installation Category II (having double insulation and able to carry out mono-phase power
supply operations).
This product has a Pollution Degree II normally only non-conductive pollution occurs. Occasionally,
however, a temporary conductivity caused by condensation must be expected.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
EXPLANATION OF ELECTRICAL AND SAFETY SYMBOLS :
You now own a high-quality instrument that will give you many years of reliable service.
Nevertheless, even this product will eventually become obsolete. When that time comes, please
remember that electronic equipment must be disposed of in accordance with local regulations.
This product conforms to the WEEE Directive of the European Union (2002/96/EC) and belongs to
Category 9 (Monitoring and Control Instruments). You can return the instrument to us free of
charge for proper environment friendly disposal. You can obtain further information from your
local Narda Sales Partner or by visiting our website at www.narda-sts.it .
Warning, danger of electric shock
Earth
Read carefully the Operating Manual and its
instructions, pay attention to the safety
symbols.
Unit Earth Connection
Earth Protection
Equipotential
EXPLANATION OF SYMBOLS USED IN THIS DOCUMENT :
DANGER
The DANGER sign draws attention to a potential risk to a person’s
safety. All the precautions must be fully understood and applied
before proceeding.
WARNING
The WARNING sign draws attention to a potential risk of damage to
the apparatus or loss of data. All the precautions must be fully
understood and applied before proceeding.
CAUTION
The CAUTION sign draws attention against unsafe practices for the
apparatus functionality.
NOTE:
II
The NOTE draw attention to important information.
Note and symbols
Contents
Explanation of electrical and safety symbols……....…………………………
General safety considerations and instructions.………....………………….
EC Conformity Certificate…….....................................………………………...
Page
II
X
XI
1. General Information
1.1 Documentation…………………………………………………………………..
1.2 Operating Manual changes…………………………………………………….
1.3 Introduction to PMM 9010………………………………………………………
1.4 Instrument Items………….……………………………………………………..
1.5 Optional accessories……………….…………………………………………...
1.6 Other accessories……………………………………………………………….
1.7 Main Specifications……………………………………………………………..
1.8 Front Panel………………………...…………………………………………….
1.9 Rear Panel……………………………………………………………………….
1.10 Functional Description………………………………………………………..
1.11 Ultra fast measurement: a unique feature of the PMM 9010……………..
1.12 Emission measurement……………..………………………………………..
Page
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-7
1-8
2 Installation
2.1 Introduction………………………………………………………………………
2.2 Initial Inspection……………………………….……………….………………..
2.3 Packing and Unpacking……………………………………….……………….
2.4 Preparation for Use……………………………………………………………..
2.5 Battery Charger…………………………………………………….……………
2.5.1 To substitute the mains connector………………………………………….
2.5.2 To Check the internal batteries……………………………………………..
2.5.3 Indication of the battery on the screen and with PW led……..………….
2.6 Environment……………………………………………………………………..
2.7 Return for Service……………………………………………………………….
2.8 Equipment Cleaning…………………………………………………………….
2.9 Equipment ventilation…………………………………………………………...
2.10 Hardware Installation………………………………………………………….
2.11 Using an Artificial Mains Network (AMN or LISN)………………………….
2.12 Using Pulse Limiter……………………………………………………………
2.13 Using Current and Voltage Probes………………………………………….
2.14 Using Antennas and other Transducers……………………………………
2.15 The User Port…………………………………………………………………..
2.16 HXYZ 9170 Triple Loop Antenna remote cable Configuration for 9010…
2.17 PMM L2-16A remote cable Configuration for PMM 9010………...............
2.18 PMM LISN three phase remote cable Configuration for 9010……………
2.19 PMM L2-16 remote cable Configuration for PMM 9010…………………..
2.20 PMM L3-25 remote cable Configuration for PMM 9010…………………..
Page
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-4
2-4
2-5
2-5
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-10
3 Setup and Panel Instructions
3.1 Introduction………………………………………………………………………
3.2 Display……………………………………………………………………………
3.3 Autocal……………………………………………………………………………
3.4 Unit………………………………………………………………………………..
3.5 RF OUT…………………………………………………………………………..
3.6 Panel……………………………………………………………………………..
3.7 RS 232 (Speed)…………………………………………………………………
Page
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-4
EC Conformity
III
4 Sweep Mode operating instructions
4.1 Introduction………………………………………………………………………
4.2 Measure………………………………………………………………………….
4.2.1 Frequency……………………………………………………………………...
4.2.2 Level………………….………………………………………………………...
4.2.2.1 Input: Attenuator and Preamplifier….…………………………………….
4.2.2.2 Misc…………………………………………………………….…………….
4.2.2.2.1 Tracking generator……………………………………………………….
4.2.2.3 Detector……………………………………………………………………...
4.2.2.4 Smart detector…………………………………………………..................
4.2.3 Conversion factor……………………………………………………………..
4.3 Limit………………………………………………………………………………
4.4 Display……………………………………………………………………………
4.5 Marker…………………………………………………………………………….
4.6 Load & Store.…………………………………………………………………….
4.7 Ultra fast FFT scan……………………………………………………………...
Page
4-1
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-3
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-8
5 Analyzer Mode operating instructions
5.1 Introduction………………………………………………………………………
5.2 Frequency………………………………………………………………………..
5.3 RBW………………………………………………………………………………
5.4 Level………………………………………………………………………………
5.4.1 Input Attenuators and Preamplifier……..…………………………………..
5.4.2 OVER RANGE Message…………………………………………………….
5.4.3 Misc…………………..…………………………………………………………
5.4.3.1 Tracking generator…………………………………………………………
5.4.4 Detector………..……………………………………………………………….
5.4.5 Conversion factor……………………………………………………………..
5.5 Marker……..….………………………………………………………………….
5.6 Esc………………………………………………………………………………..
Page
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-3
5-4
5-4
5-5
5-5
5-6
5-6
5-6
6 Manual Mode operating instructions
6.1 Introduction………………………………………………………………………
6.2 Frequency………………………………………………………………………..
6.3 Level………………………………………………………………………………
6.3.1 Input: Attenuator and preamplifier………………………………………….
6.3.2 Misc…………………………………………………………………………….
6.4 RBW………………………………………………………………………………
6.5 Hold Time………………………………………………………………………...
6.6 Demodulator……………………………………………………………………..
Page
6-1
6-2
6-2
6-3
6-3
6-5
6-5
6-5
7. Applications
7.1 Measuring the EMI Voltage……………………………………………………...
7.1.1 Measuring Principle with a LISN………………………………………….....
7.1.2 Coupling Networks……………………………………………………………
7.1.2.1 AMN…………………………………………………………………………..
7.1.2.2 Current probe……………………………………………………………….
7.1.2.3 Voltage probe……………………………………………………………….
7.1.3 Test setup……………………………………………………………………..
7.1.4 Guidance on a preliminary Measuring Procedure………………………..
7.1.5 Remarks and hints for Measuring…………………………………………..
Page
7-1
7-1
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-4
7-4
7-5
8. Updating firmware and Activation code Utility
8.1 Introduction………………………………………………………………………
8.2 System requirements ……………………………….………………………….
8.3 Preparing the Hardware…………………………….………………………….
8.4 Software installation…………………………………………………................
8.5 To transfer data……………….……………………………………..………….
8.6 9010 Set code utility ...……….……………………………………..………….
Page
8-1
8-1
8-1
8-1
8-3
8-5
IV
Safety considerations
9. PMM 9010/03P EMI CISPR Receiver
10 Hz ÷ 30 MHz Full compliance
> 30 MHz Compliance (PRF ≥ 10Hz)
PMM 9010/30P EMI CISPR Receiver
10 Hz ÷ 30 MHz Full compliance
30 MHz ÷ 3 GHz Pre compliance
PMM 9010/60P EMI CISPR Receiver
10 Hz ÷ 30 MHz Full compliance
30 MHz ÷ 6 GHz Pre compliance
General Information
9.1 Documentation…………………………………………………………………..
9.2 Operating Manual changes……………………………………………………
9.3 Introduction to PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P…...………………………………..
9.4 Instrument Items………….………………………………………………….....
9.5 Optional accessories……………….…………………………………………..
9.6 Other accessories………………………………………………………………
9.7 PMM 9010/03P Main Specifications…………………………………………..
9.8 PMM 9010/03P Front Panel……………..…………………………………….
9.9 PMM 9010/03P Rear Panel……………………………………………………
9.10 PMM 9010/30P Main Specifications…………..…………………………….
9.11 PMM 9010/30P Front Panel…………………….....………………...……….
9.12 PMM 9010/30P Rear Panel………………………..…………………………
9.13 PMM 9010/60P Main Specifications…………..…………………………….
9.14 PMM 9010/60P Front Panel…………………….....………………...……….
9.15 PMM 9010/60P Rear Panel………………………..…………………………
10 Click Mode Operating Instructions (Option)
10.1 Introduction……………………………………………………………………..
10.2 Click Mode Activation procedure…………………………………………….
10.3 Enter in Click Mode……………………………………………………………
10.4 Introduction to the discontinuous disturbance (click) measurement……..
10.4.1 Determination of click rate………………………………………………….
10.4.2 Preliminary Conformity and Exceptions…………………………………..
10.4.2.1 Old and New exceptions…………………………………………………
10.4.3 Calculate Limit Quartile…………………………………………………….
10.4.4 Measurements vs Lq limit…………………………………………………..
10.5 Start………………………………………………………………………..……
10.5.1 Stop and pause…………………………………………………………..…
10.6 Report…………………………………………………………………………..
10.6.1 Fail during determination of the click rate N……………………………...
10.6.2 Report after a successful test with less than 5 instantaneous ………...
switching at one frequency…………………………………………..……..
10.6.3 Report after a successful test at 4 frequencies………………………….
10.6.4 Report after a line search…………………………………………………..
10.7 Setup…………………………………………………………….………………
10.7.1 External attenuator………………………………………………................
10.7.2 Limit…………………………………………………………………………...
10.7.3 Determination of N…………………………………………………………..
10.7.4 Factor f………………………………………………………………………..
10.7.5 Stop on Fail………………………………………………………................
10.7.6 Terminate on…………………………………………………………………
10.7.7 Line……………………………………………………………………………
10.7.8 Max time………………………………………………………………………
10.7.9 Idle Frequency.………………………………………………………………
10.7.10 Idle Level……………………………………………………………………
10.7.11 Smart Measure…………………………………………………………….
10.8 Click option…………………………………………………………………….
10.9 Test setup………………………………………………………………………
10.10 Diagnostic…………………………………………………………………..…
9-2
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-4
9-4
9-5
9-6
9-7
9-8
9-9
9-10
9-11
9-12
9-13
Page
10-1
10-1
10-3
10-4
10-5
10-5
10-5
10-6
10-6
10-6
10-7
10-8
10-8
10-8
10-9
10-9
10-10
10-10
10-11
10-12
10-12
10-12
10-13
10-13
10-15
10-15
10-15
10-15
10-16
10-17
10-17
EC Conformity
V
11 PMM 9030/9060/9180 EMI CISPR Receiver extension
30 MHz – 3GHz / 6GHz / 18GHz (Option)
Page
11.1 Introduction to PMM 9030/9060/9180………………………………………………..
11.2 Instruments items………..……………………………………………………………..
11.3 Optional PMM accessories………..…………………………………………………..
11.4 Other accessories…………………..………………………………………………….
11.5 PMM 9030 Main specifications.………………………………………………………
11.6 PMM 9030 Front and rear panel……………………………………………………...
11.7 PMM 9060 Main specifications.…………………………………………..................
11.9 PMM 9060 Front and rear panel……………………………………………………...
11.9 PMM 9180 Main specifications.…………………………………………..................
11.10 PMM 9180 Front and rear panel………………………………………………………
11.11 Functional description………………………………………………………………….
11.12 No coaxial cable between the antenna and the receiver……………..................
11.13 Emission measurements…………………………………………………………….
11.14 Installation……………………………………………………………………………..
11.14.1 Introduction………………………………………………………………………….
11.14.2 Initial inspection……………………………………………………………………..
11.14.2.1 Packing and Unpacking……………………………………………...………….
11.14.3 Preparation for use……………………………………………………..………….
11.14.4 Battery charger………………………………………………………….………….
11.14.4.1 To replace the mains connector of the battery charger…………..…………
11.14.4.2 To charge the internal battery…….……………………………………………
11.14.4.3 To Supply 9030/9060/9180 through the mains power socket by SPA-01...
11.14.4.4 Indication of the battery status on the screen and with PW led….…………
11.14.5 Environment………………………………………………………………………..
11.14.6 Return for Service……………………………………………………….…………
11.14.7 Equipment cleaning…………………………………………………….………….
11.14.8 Equipment ventilation…………………………………………………..………….
11.14.9 Hardware installation………………………………………………………………
11.14.10 PMM 9010+ PMM 9030/9060/9180 initial screen…………………………….
11.14.11 Led on the PMM 9010 and on the PMM 9030/9060/9180..…………………
11.14.12 PMM 9010 + PMM 9030/9060/9180 main screen……………………………
11.14.13 PMM 9010 + PMM 9030/9060/9180 Setup panel…………………………….
11.14.14 PMM 9010 + PMM 9030/9060/9180 Link failure……………………………...
11.14.15 Using an antenna………………………………………………………………...
11.15 Analyzer Mode operating instructions……………………………………………...
11.15.1 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………
11.15.2 Frequency………………………………………………………………..…………
11.15.3 RBW…………………………………………………………………………………
11.15.4 Level…………………………………………………………………………………
11.15.4.1 Input: Attenuators and preamplifier……………………………………………
11.15.4.2 Misc…………………………………………………………………….………….
11.15.4.3 Detector………………………………………………………………...…………
11.15.4.4 Conversion factor……………………………………………………..………….
11.15.5 Marker…………………………………………………………………….…………
11.15.6 ESC……………………………………………………………………….…………
11.16 Sweep Mode operating instructions…………………………………….………….
11.16.1 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………
11.16.2 Measure…………………………………………………………………..…………
11.16.2.1 Frequency…………………………………………………………………………
11.16.2.2 Advanced……………………………………………………………….…………
11.16.2.3 Level……………………………………………………………………………….
11.16.2.3.1 Input: Attenuators and preamplifier……………………………….…………
11.16.2.3.2 Misc…………………………………………………………………..………….
11.16.2.3.3 Tracking generator…………………………………………………………….
11.16.2.3.4 Detector…………………………………………………………………………
11.16.2.4 Conversion factor……………………………………………………...…………
11.16.3 Limit……………………………………………………………………….…………
11.16.4 Display…………………………………………………………………….…………
11.16.5 Marker…………………………………………………………………….…………
11.16.6 Load store……………………………………………………………..…………….
11.17 Manual Mode operating instructions……………………………………………….
11.17.1 Introduction…………………………………………………………………………
11.17.2 Frequency………………………………………………………………...…………
11.17.3 Level…………………………………………………………………………………
11.17.3.1 Input: Attenuator and preamplifier…………………………………..………....
11.17.3.2 Misc……………………………………………………………………..…………
11.17.4 RBW……………………………………………………………………………..…..
11.17.5 Hold me………………………………………………………………...…………...
11.17.6 Demodulator……………………………………………………………...…………
11-1
11-2
11-2
11-2
11-3
11-5
11-6
11-8
11-9
11-11
11-12
11-12
11-13
11-14
11-14
11-14
11-14
11-14
11-14
11-14
11-14
11-14
11-15
11-16
11-16
11-16
11-16
11-17
11-18
11-18
11-18
11-19
11-20
11-21
11-24
11-25
11-25
11-25
11-26
11-26
11-27
11-27
11-28
11-28
11-28
11-29
11-29
11-30
11-30
11-31
11-31
11-32
11-32
11-32
11-33
11-33
11-33
11-34
11-34
11-35
11-36
11-36
11-37
11-37
11-38
11-39
11-39
11-40
11-40
VI
Safety considerations
Page
11.18 Updating firmware………………………………………………………………………………...
11.18.1 Introduction……………………………………………………………………………………...
11.18.2 System requirements ……………………………….…………………………………………
11.18.3 Preparing the Hardware…………………………….……………………………………….…
11.18.4 Software installation…………………………………………………....................................
11.18.5 To transfer data……………….……………………………………..………………………….
11-41
11-41
11-41
11-41
11-41
11-43
12 PMM 9010-RMA Rack Mount Adapter for Rack 19”
12.1 Introduction……….……………………………………………………...……………..………....
12.2 Instruments Items…………………………...……………………………..………….……….....
12.3 Optional accessories…………………………………………………..…..………….……….....
12.4 PMM 9010-RMA Main Specifications………………………………………………..………....
12.5 PMM 9010-RMA Front view………………………………...……………..………….………....
12.6 PMM 9010-RMA Inside view…………………………..…...……………..………….………....
12.7 Rack requirements……………..……….…………………...……………..………….………....
12.8 Required equipment…………………..………………..…...……………..………….………....
12.9 Moving chassis……………….……………..………………………………………….………....
12.10 Installation guidelines …………………………………………………………………………..
12.11 Installing the PMM 9010-RMA……………………………………………………………….....
12.12 Use of the PMM 9010-RMA with PMM 9010………………………………………………….
12-1
12-1
12-1
12-2
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-4
12-4
12-5
12-6
12-7
13 APD Mode Operating Instructions (Amplitude Probability Distribution)
13.1 Introduction……….……………………………………………………………………..…………
13.2 Pre-conditions and Settings………………..………………………………………….…………
13.2.1 Entering the function …………..…………………………………………………….…………
13.2.2 Methods ………………………………………..……………………………………..…………
13.3 Setup……………………………… …………………………………………………….…………
13.3.1 Limit 1 E …………………….……………………………………………………………………
13.3.2 Limit 1 P ……………………….……………………………………………………...…………
13.3.3 Limit 2 E .…………………………………………………………………………………………
13.3.4 Limit 2 P …………….………………………………………………………………...…………
13.3.5 YY Offset ……………………………………………………………………………...…………
13.3.6 Start Frequency …………………………………………………………………………………
13.3.7 Stop Frequency……………………………………………………………………….…………
13.3.8 Num. of freqs ……………………………………………………………..................…………
13.3.9 Time ……………………………..…………………………………………………….…………
13.3.10 Method .………………………………………………………………….................…………
13.3.11 Search Hold Time ……………………………………………………...................…………
13.3.12 Conversion Factor ………………………………………………………………….…………
13.3.13 Preselector ………………………………………………………………………….…………
13.3.14 Min. Attenuation…………………………………………………………………….…………
13.3.15 PreAmplifier …………………………………………………………….................…………
13.4 Operation ……………..…………………………………………………….................…………
13.4.1 Manual (APD)………………………………………………………………………...…………
13.4.1.1 Frequency ..………………………………………………………………………..………….
13.4.1.2 Input ………………………………………………………………………………...…………
13.4.1.3 Clear ………..…………………………………………………………………………………
13.4.1.4 Setup ……………………………………………………………………………….…………
13.4.2 Report (APD) .………………………………………………………………………..…………
13.4.2.1 MHz ……….…………………………………………………………….................…………
13.4.2.2 Pk dBµV …………………………………………………………………………….…………
13.4.2.3 ∆L Peak …………………………………………………………………………….…………
13.4.2.4 ∆L1 ………………………………………………………………………………….…………
13.4.2.5 E …………………………………………………………………………………….…………
13.4.2.6 ∆L2 ………………………………………………………………………………….…………
13.4.2.7 ……………………………………………………………………………………….…………
13.4.2.8 Time ………………………………………………………………………………...…………
13.4.2.9 P/F ………………………………………………………………………………….………….
13.4.3 Start (APD) …………………………………………………………………………..………….
13.4.3.1 Sweep running …………………………………………………………………….………….
13.4.3.2 Signal by signal measurements …………………………………………………………….
13.4.3.3 Finish and Next Step ……………………………………………………………..………….
13.4.3.4 Report ………………………………………………………………………………………….
13.4.4 Default ………………………………………………………………………………..………….
13.5 Internal Generator …………………………………………………………………….…………..
13.6 Panel Save and Recall ……………………………………………………................…………..
13-1
13-2
13-3
13-3
13-4
13-4
13-4
13-4
13-5
13-5
13-5
13-5
13-5
13-6
13-6
13-6
13-6
13-6
13-7
13-7
13-8
13-8
13-9
13-10
13-11
13-11
13-12
13-12
13-12
13-12
13-12
13-12
13-12
13-12
13-12
13-12
13-13
13-13
13-13
13-14
13-14
13-14
13-15
13-15
EC Conformity
VII
14 Remote control
14.1 Introduction ……….……………………………………………………………………
14.2 Communication …………….………………..………………………………………..
14.2.1 RS 232 (Speed) …….…………..………………………………………..................
14.3 Protocol …………………………… ………………………………………..................
14.4 Format ….……………..……………………………………………………..................
14.5 PMM 9010 COMMANDs .…………………………………………………..................
14.5.1 QUERY Commands .……………………………………………………..................
14.5.2 SETTING Commands ..……………………………………………………………..
14.5.3 Analyzer Reply ……………………………………………………………………….
14.5.3.1 Reply example …………………………………………………………………….
14.5.4 Sweep Structure ……………………………………………………………………..
14.5.5 Procedure to read a measure stored by the PMM 9010 .……………………….
14.6 Special notes for 9010 Fast…………………………………………………………...
Page
14-1
14-1
14-1
14-1
14-1
14-2
14-2
14-9
14-24
14-24
14-26
14-29
14-29
15 9010F Fast
15.1 Introduction to 9010F….……………………………………………………………….
15.1.1 Principle of operation.........………………..…………………………………………
15.1.2 Instrument Items…….…………..………………………………………...................
15.1.3 Optional accessories……..………….…………………………………...................
15.1.4 Other accessories………………….……………………………………..................
15.1.5 Main specification……………………………………………………………………
15.1.6 Functional description……………………………………………………………….
15.1.7 Ultra fast measurement: an unique feature of the PMM 9010F………………...
15.2 Sweep Mode……………………………………………………………………………
15.2.1 Ultra Fast FFT scan………………………………………………………………….
15.2.2 Measure……………………………………………………………………………….
15.2.2.1 Frequency…………………………………………………………………………..
15.2.2.2 Level…………………………………………………………………………………
15.2.2.3 Input: Attenuators and preamplifier……………………………………………...
15.2.2.4 Misc………………………………………………………………………………….
15.2.2.5 RF Output Generator………………………………………………………………
15.2.2.6 Detector……………………………………………………………………………..
15.2.2.7 Conversion factor………………………………………………………………….
15.2.3 Limit……………………………………………………………………………………
15.2.4 Display…………………………………………………………………………………
15.2.5 Market………………………………………………………………………………….
15.2.6 Load Store…………………………………………………………………………….
15.3 Analyzer Mode………………………………………………………………………….
15.3.1 Frequency……………………………………………………………………………..
15.3.2 RBW……………………………………………………………………………………
15.3.3 Level…………………………………………………………………………………...
15.3.3.1 Input: Attenuators and preamplifier……………………………………………...
15.3.3.2 OVER RANGE Message………………………………………………………….
15.3.3.3 MISC………………………………………………………………………………...
15.3.3.4 Tracking generator………………………………………………………………...
15.3.3.5 Detector……………………………………………………………………………..
15.3.3.6 Conversion factor………………………………………………………………….
15.3.4 Marker…………………………………………………………………………………
15-1
15-2
15-3
15-3
15-3
15-4
15-8
15-8
15-9
15-9
15-10
15-10
15-11
15-11
15-12
15-12
15-13
15-13
15-14
15-14
15-15
15-16
15-17
15-18
15-19
15-19
15-19
15-20
15-20
15-21
15-21
15-22
15-22
Annex - A RMS-AVG and C-AVG Detectors
A-A.1 Introduction……………………………………………………………………………
A-A.2 RMS-AVG Definition………………………………………………………………….
A.A.3 RMS-AVG Activation Procedure (option)…………………………………………..
A-A.4 C-AVG Definition……………………………………………………………………..
A-A.5 Sweep Mode…………………………………………………………………………..
A-A.5.1 Detector selection………………………………………………………………….
A-A.5.2 Smart Detector……………………………………………………………………..
A-A.6 Operating Manual Changes…………………………………………………………
A-A-1
A-A-1
A-A-1
A-A-3
A-A-4
A-A-4
A-A-5
A-A-6
VIII
Safety considerations
Annex - B Additional RBW filters
A-B.1 Introduction……………………………………………………………………………
A-B.2 MIL-STD-461E Activation procedure (option)…..…………………………………
A-B.3 Analyzer Mode………………………………………………………………………...
A-B.3.1 RBW Selection……………………………………………………………………..
A-B.3.2 MIL Filters…………………………………………………………………………...
A-B.3.3 MIL Filters over 30MHz…………………………………………………………….
A-B.4 Manual Mode………………………………………………………………………….
A-B.4.1 RBW Selection…………………………………………………………..................
A-B.4.2 MIL Filters……………………………………………………………………………
A-B.4.3 Hold Time……………………………………………………………………………
A-B.5 Operating Manual Changes…………………………………………………………
Page
A-B-1
A-B-1
A-B-2
A-B-2
A-B-2
A-B-3
A-B-3
A-B-3
A-B-3
A-B-4
A-B-4
Annex - C Click4E Four Channels Click Meter Option
A-C.1 Introduction……………………………………………………………………………
A-C.2 Installation…………………………………………………………………………….
A-C.2.1 Initial Inspection……………………………………………………………………
A-C.2.2 Packing and Unpacking…………………………………………………………..
A-C.2.3 Preparation for Use………………………………………………………………..
A-C.2.4 Click4E Option mains supply……………………………………………………..
A-C.2.5 PMM 9010 Battery charging………………………………………………………
A-C.2.6 Indication of the battery status on the screen and with PW led………………
A-C.2.7 Environment………………………………………………………………………...
A-C.2.8 Return for Service………………………………………………………………….
A-C.2.9 Equipment Cleaning……………………………………………………………….
A-C.2.10 Equipment ventilation…………………………………………………………….
A-C.2.11 Hardware Installation…………………………………………………………….
A-C.3 Click Mode…………………………………………………………………………….
A-C.3.1 Using an Artificial Mains Network (AMN or LISN) ……………………………..
A-C.3.2 Using the Pulse Limiter……………………………………………………………
A-C.3.3 Click Mode menu………………………………………………………..................
A-C.4 Self Calibration……………………………………………………………………….
A-C.5 Operation………………………………………………………………………………
A-C.5.1 Smart Measure……………………………………………………………………..
A-C.6 Operating Manual Changes…………………………………………………………
A-C-1
A-C-2
A-C-2
A-C-2
A-C-2
A-C-2
A-C-3
A-C-4
A-C-4
A-C-5
A-C-5
A-C-5
A-C-5
A-C-6
A-C-6
A-C-6
A-C-7
A-C-7
A-C-8
A-C-8
A-C-8
Annex - D Measure the insertion loss of a Line Impedance Stabilization
Network (LISN) with a PMM 9010 Receiver
A-D.1 Introduction……………………………………………………………………………
A-D.2 Operation………………………………………………………………………………
A-D.3 Test setup……………………………………………………………………………..
A-D.4 Settings………………………………………………………………………………..
A-D.5 Measure the Insertion Loss (Voltage Division Factor)…………………………...
A-D.6 Connecting the LISN under test……………………………………………….........
A-D.7 Starting the Sweep…………………………………………………………………...
A-D.8 Marker………………………………………………………………………………….
A-D.9 LISNs with PMM Emission Suite…………………………………………...............
A-D-10 Note…………………………………………………………………………………..
A-D-11 PMM LISNs and Passive probes…...…………………………………………….
A-D.12 Conversion table dBμV <> μV <> dBm…………………………………………..
A-D-13 LISN Service kit.....................……………………………………………………..
A-D-1
A-D-1
A-D-1
A-D-1
A-D-2
A-D-2
A-D-3
A-D-4
A-D-4
A-D-5
A-D-6
A-D-7
A-D-8
EC Conformity
IX
Figures
Figure
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
3-1
4-1
5-1
6-1
7-1
7-2
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6
9-7
9-8
9-9
10-1
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6
11-7
11-8
11-9
11-10
11-11
11-12
11-13
11-14
11-15
11-16
11-17
11-18
12-1
12-2
12-3
15-1
15-2
15-3
A-D-1
A-D-2
A-D-3
A-D-4
A-D-5
X
Page
Front Panel 9010……………………………………………………….
Rear Panel 9010…………………………………………………….....
BP-01 Replaceable battery…………………………………………...
PMM 9010 Functional Diagram………………………………………
PMM 9010 initial screen showing the results of the initial self-test
and the five main function keys menu………………………………
HXYZ 9170 remote cable configuration for 9010………………..
PMM L2-16A remote cable configuration for 9010……………….
PMM LISN three phase remote cable configuration for 9010…..
PMM L2-16 remote cable configuration for PMM 9010…………..
PMM L3-25 remote cable configuration for PMM 9010…………..
Display setting..………………………………………………………..
Sweep…………………………………………………………………..
Spectrum…….…………………………………………………………
Manual…………………………………………………………………
AMN Principle: a) ∆-type or T-type LISN ; b) V-type LISN……….
Example of test Setup for RFI Voltage Measurements…………..
9010/03P Front Panel ………..……….……………………………..
9010/03P Rear Panel ………………………………………………..
BP-01 Replaceable battery for 9010/03P …………………………
9010/30P Front Panel ………..……….……………………………..
9010/30P Rear Panel ………………………………………………..
BP-01 Replaceable battery for 9010/30P …………………………
9010/60P Front Panel ………..……….……………………………..
9010/60P Rear Panel ………………………………………………..
BP-01 Replaceable battery for 9010/60P …………………………
Click……………………………………………………………………
PMM 9030 Front and rear panels…………………………………..
PMM 9060 Front and rear panels…………………………………..
PMM 9180 Front and rear panels…………………………………..
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Functional BLOCK Diagram……....……..
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Fiber Optic Link to PMM 9010……………
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Antenna Holder spare parts………………
Mounting the Tripod Joint……………………………………………
Fixing the base of Antenna Holder………………………………….
Closing the Antenna Holder…………………………………………
Inserting the adapter for PMM Log-Periodic…………….…………
Complete assembling………………………………………..............
Complete assembling for other antennas………………………….
Mounting the Antenna Holder on PMM 9030/9060/9180..............
Screwing the N-N Adapter for Antenna Matching………...............
Fixing onto the Tripod………………………………………..............
Attaching PMM Log Periodic………………………………...............
Spectrum…………………………………………………….…………
Sweep…………………………………………………………………..
Manual………………………………………………………………….
Front view 9010-RMA…………………………………………………
Inside view 9010-RMA………………………………………………..
PMM 9010-RMA with 9010 Instrument……………………………..
PMM 9010F Functional BLOCK Diagram………………………….
Sweep Model…………………………………………………………..
Spectrum……………………………………………………………….
Receiver verification………………………………………………….
Sweep………………………………………………………………….
Network analyzer calibration Setup (L1) …………………………..
Measurement Setup (L1) ……………………………………………
L1-150M: Single line LISN, 150A LISN….…………………………
Safety considerations
1-5
1-6
1-6
1-7
2-4
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-10
3-1
4-1
5-1
6-1
7-2
7-3
9-6
9-7
9-7
9-9
9-10
9-10
9-12
9-13
9-13
10-1
11-5
11-8
11-11
11-12
11-17
11-21
11-19
11-19
11-19
11-19
11-20
11-20
11-20
11-20
11-20
11-20
11-21
11-26
11-33
12-2
12-3
12-7
15-8
15-9
15-17
A-D-2
A-D-3
A-D-5
A-D-5
A-D-6
Figure
A-D-6
A-D-7
A-D-8
A-D-9
A-D-10
A-D-11
A-D-12
A-D-13
A-D-14
A-D-15
A-D-16
A-D-17
A-D-18
A-D-19
Page
L2-16B: Two lines, Single phase, 16A LISN……………………………………………………….
L3-32: Four lines, 3-phase, 32A LISN……………………………....………………………..…….
L3-64: Four lines, 3-phase, 64A LISN…………………………………………………………..….
L3-64/690: Four lines, 3-phase, 64A – 690Vac LISN…..……………………………………..….
L3-100: Four lines, 3-phase, 100A LISN…………………………...…………………………..…..
L1-500: Single line LISN, 500A LISN………………………...…………………………..…………
L3-500: Four lines, 3-phase, 500A LISN………………………...…………………………..……..
Conversion table………………………………………………………………………………….….
PMM L2-16 model adapter…………………………………………..……………………………...
PMM L3-32 model adapter…………………………………..............……………………………...
PMM L3-64 model adapter…………………………………………...………………………….….
3-phase socket to BNC adapter……………………………………..………………………….…..
Rigid case………………………………………………………...........………………………….…..
Rigid case internal view…………………………………………………………………………..….
A-D-6
A-D-6
A-D-6
A-D-6
A-D-6
A-D-6
A-D-6
A-D-7
A-D-8
A-D-8
A-D-8
A-D-8
A-D-8
A-D-8
Tables
Table
1-1
9-1
9-2
9-3
10-1
11-1
11-2
11-3
12-1
15-1
Page
Main Specifications 9010….………………………………………………………………………...
9010/03P Main Specifications for C bands……..…………………………………………………
9010/30P Main Specifications for CDE bands…………………………………...........................
9010/60P Main Specifications for CDE bands…………………………………...........................
Led status……………………...………………………………………............................................
Main Specifications 9030……………………………………………………………………………
Main Specifications 9060……………………………………………………………………………
Main Specifications 9180……………………………………………………………………………
Main Specifications 9010-RMA……………………………………………………………………..
Main Specifications 9010F…………………………………………………………………………...
EC Conformity
1-3
9-5
9-8
9-11
10-14
11-3
11-6
11-9
12-2
15-4
XI
SAFETY RECOMMENDATIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS
This unit has been designed and tested in Italy, according to IEC 348 standard and has left the
manufacturer’s premises in a state fully complying with the safety standards ; in order to maintain the
unit in a safe state and to ensure safe operation, the following instructions must be reviewed and fully
understood before operation.
• When the unit is to be permanently cabled, first connect an uninterruptible protective earth ground
conductor before making any other connections.
• If the unit is to be connected to other equipment or accessories, prior to energizing either unit verify
that a common ground exists between them.
• For permanently cabled unit without built-in fuses, automatic circuit breakers or similar protective
facilities, the power supply line shall be provided with fuses or protections rated to the unit.
• Verify that the unit is set to match the available mains voltage and correct fuse rating is installed
before applying power.
• The Safety Class I units provided with disconnectible AC supply cable and plug may only be operated
from a power socket with protective earth ground connection.
• Any interruption or loosening of the protective earth ground conductor, either inside or outside the unit
or in an extension cable will cause a potential shock hazard that could result in personal injury.
• The protective earth ground conductor shall not be interrupted intentionally.
• To avoid electrical shock do not remove protections or covers of the unit , refer to qualified NARDA
Servicing Center for maintenance of the unit.
• To maintain adequate protection against fire hazard, replace fuses only with others of the same type
and rating;
• Observe safety regulations and rules and also the additional safety instructions specified in this
manual for prevention of accidents.
XII
Safety considerations
EC Conformity Certificate
(in accordance with the Directives: EMC 2004/108/EEC and Low Voltage 2006/95/EEC)
This is to certify that the product: PMM 9010 EMI CISPR Receiver
Produced by: NARDA Safety Test Solution
Via Benessea 29/B
17035 Cisano sul Neva (SV) – ITALY
complies with the following European Standards :
Safety: CEI EN 61010-1 (2001)
EMC: EN 61326-1 (2007)
This product complies with the requirements of Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EEC and with the EMC
Directive 2004/108/EEC.
NARDA Safety Test Solution
EC Conformity Certificate
(in accordance with the Directives: EMC 2004/108/EEC and Low Voltage 2006/95/EEC)
This is to certify that the product: PMM 9010F(Fast) EMI CISPR Receiver
Produced by: NARDA Safety Test Solution
Via Benessea 29/B
17035 Cisano sul Neva (SV) – ITALY
complies with the following European Standards :
Safety: CEI EN 61010-1 (2001)
EMC: EN 61326-1 (2007)
This product complies with the requirements of Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EEC and with the EMC
Directive 2004/108/EEC.
NARDA Safety Test Solution
EC Conformity Certificate
(in accordance with the Directives: EMC 2004/108/EEC and Low Voltage 2006/95/EEC)
This is to certify that the product: PMM 9010/03P EMI CISPR Receiver
Produced by: NARDA Safety Test Solution
Via Benessea 29/B
17035 Cisano sul Neva (SV) – ITALY
complies with the following European Standards :
Safety: CEI EN 61010-1 (2001)
EMC: EN 61326-1 (2007)
This product complies with the requirements of Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EEC and with the EMC
Directive 2004/108/EEC.
NARDA Safety Test Solution
EC Conformity
XIII
EC Conformity Certificate
(in accordance with the Directives: EMC 2004/108/EEC and Low Voltage 2006/95/EEC)
This is to certify that the product: PMM 9010/30P EMI CISPR Receiver
Produced by: NARDA Safety Test Solution
Via Benessea 29/B
17035 Cisano sul Neva (SV) – ITALY
complies with the following European Standards :
Safety: CEI EN 61010-1 (2001)
EMC: EN 61326-1 (2007)
This product complies with the requirements of Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EEC and with the EMC
Directive 2004/108/EEC.
NARDA Safety Test Solution
EC Conformity Certificate
(in accordance with the Directives: EMC 2004/108/EEC and Low Voltage 2006/95/EEC)
This is to certify that the product: PMM 9010/60P EMI CISPR Receiver
Produced by: NARDA Safety Test Solution
Via Benessea 29/B
17035 Cisano sul Neva (SV) – ITALY
complies with the following European Standards :
Safety: CEI EN 61010-1 (2001)
EMC: EN 61326-1 (2007)
This product complies with the requirements of Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EEC and with the EMC
Directive 2004/108/EEC.
NARDA Safety Test Solution
EC Conformity Certificate
(in accordance with the Directives: EMC 2004/108/EEC and Low Voltage 2006/95/EEC)
This is to certify that the product: PMM 9030 EMI CISPR Receiver Extension
Produced by: NARDA Safety Test Solution
Via Benessea 29/B
17035 Cisano sul Neva (SV) – ITALY
complies with the following European Standards :
Safety: CEI EN 61010-1 (2001)
EMC: EN 61326-1 (2007)
This product complies with the requirements of Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EEC and with the EMC
Directive 2004/108/EEC.
NARDA Safety Test Solution
XIV
Safety considerations
EC Conformity Certificate
(in accordance with the Directives: EMC 2004/108/EEC and Low Voltage 2006/95/EEC)
This is to certify that the product: PMM 9060 EMI CISPR Receiver Extension
Produced by: NARDA Safety Test Solution
Via Benessea 29/B
17035 Cisano sul Neva (SV) – ITALY
complies with the following European Standards :
Safety: CEI EN 61010-1 (2001)
EMC: EN 61326-1 (2007)
This product complies with the requirements of Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EEC and with the EMC
Directive 2004/108/EEC.
NARDA Safety Test Solution
EC Conformity Certificate
(in accordance with the Directives: EMC 2004/108/EEC and Low Voltage 2006/95/EEC)
This is to certify that the product: PMM 9180 EMI CISPR Receiver Extension
Produced by: NARDA Safety Test Solution
Via Benessea 29/B
17035 Cisano sul Neva (SV) – ITALY
complies with the following European Standards :
Safety: CEI EN 61010-1 (2001)
EMC: EN 61326-1 (2007)
This product complies with the requirements of Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EEC and with the EMC
Directive 2004/108/EEC.
NARDA Safety Test Solution
EC Conformity Certificate
(in accordance with the Directives: EMC 2004/108/EEC and Low Voltage 2006/95/EEC)
This is to certify that the product: PMM 9010/Click
Produced by: NARDA Safety Test Solution
Via Benessea 29/B
17035 Cisano sul Neva (SV) – ITALY
complies with the following European Standards :
Safety: CEI EN 61010-1 (2001)
EMC: EN 61326-1 (2007)
This product complies with the requirements of Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EEC and with the EMC
Directive 2004/108/EEC.
NARDA Safety Test Solution
EC Conformity
XV
EC Conformity Certificate
(in accordance with the Directives: EMC 89/336/EEC and Low Voltage 73/23/EEC)
This is to certify that the product: PMM 9010/Click4E Four Channels Click Meter Option
Produced by: NARDA Safety Test Solution
Via Benessea 29/B
17035 Cisano sul Neva (SV) – ITALY
complies with the following European Standards :
Safety: CEI EN 61010-1 (2001)
EMC: EN 61326-1 (2007)
This product complies with the requirements of Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EEC and with the EMC
Directive 2004/108/EEC.
NARDA Safety Test Solution
XVI
Safety considerations
1 – General Information

1.1 Documentation
Enclosed with this manual are:
 a service questionnaire to send back to NARDA in case an equipment
service is needed
 an accessories checklist to verify all accessories enclosed in the
packaging.
1.2 Operating
Manual Changes
Instruments manufactured after the printing of this manual may have a
serial number prefix not listed on the title page; this indicates that
instruments with different Serial Number prefix may be different from those
documented in this manual.
1.3 Introduction
to PMM 9010
PMM 9010 is a powerful EMI receiver, fully CISPR 16-1-1, to measure
conducted and radiated interferences from 10 Hz up to 30 MHz, or even up
to 3/6/18 GHz when matched with PMM 9030/9060/9180 extension unit
(optional). All measurements performed by the PMM 9010 are according to
the most accepted standards like: IEC, CISPR, EN (EuroNorm), FCC,
VDE,..
Thanks to its built-in tracking generator, PMM 9010 is also suitable for
designing, characterizing and testing RF filters, transducers and other
components.
The PMM 9010 has been designed adopting an innovative philosophy
made possible only in the recent years by the availability of superior
technology components. This equipment is fully digital but the input
preselector and attenuator – and, of course, the output stage of the internal
reference tracking generator - and therefore combines into a pure EMI
Receiver and Signal Analyzer the precision and accuracy of a numeric
approach, with flexibility and user friendly approach typical of a modern
instrument.
Document 9010EN-31229-2.46 - © NARDA 2013
General Information
1-1
1.4 Instrument Items
PMM 9010 includes the following items:
 EMI Receiver from 10 Hz up to 30 MHz
 BP-01 Li-ion battery pack;
 External power supply/battery charger;
 Flexible black cover/accessories holding;
 BNC-BNC coaxial cable 2m length;
 RS232 cable, 2m;
 USB cable, 2m;
 Operating manual;
 PMM 9010 Utility Software on CD;
 Certificate of Compliance;
 Return for Repair Form.
1.5 Optional
accessories
PMM 9010 can be used with several optional accessories, the most
common being the following:
 PMM 9030 EMI receiver 30 MHz - 3 GHz;
 PMM 9060 EMI receiver 30 MHz - 6 GHz;
 PMM 9180 EMI receiver 6 GHz - 18 GHz;
 9010-BTA Serial Bluetooth Adapter;
 Single Channel Click option;
 PMM 9010-RMA Rack Mount Adapter for Rack 19”
 L2-16B: Two lines, Single phase, 16A LISN, (50//5 +50H);
 L3-32: Four lines, 3-phase, 32A LISN, (50//5 +50H);
 L3-64: Four lines, 3-phase, 64A LISN, (50//5 +50H);
 L3-64/690: Four lines, 3-phase, 64A - 690Vac LISN, (50//5 +50H);
 L3-100: Four lines, 3-phase, 100A LISN, (50//5 +50H);
 L1-150M: Single line LISN, 150A (50//1 +5H);
 L1-150M1: Single line LISN, 150A (50//1 +5H);
 L1-500: Single line LISN, 500A LISN, (50//5 +50H);
 L3-500: Four lines, 3-phase, 500A LISN, (50//5 +50H);
 L2-D: Delta LISN for telecom, 2A, 150
 SBRF4 RF Switching Box (Switching Box for LISNs and Loop
Antennas)
 LISN Service Kit (AC-BNC adapter for LISNs verification and
calibration)
 SHC-1/1000: 35 dB CISPR Voltage probe, 1500;
 SHC-2/1000: 30 dB CISPR Voltage probe, 1500;
 RA-01: Rod Antenna (10 kHz – 30 MHz);
1.6 Other accessories
Of course, the PMM 9010 can be used with other accessories available on
the market, like:
 LISNs, any type;
 Antennas and Loops;
 Near Field Probes;
 Various TEM/GTEM Cells;
 HXYZ 9170 Triple Loop Antenna
 GPIB to RS232 Adapter.
1-2
General Information
1.7 Main Specifications
Table 1-1 lists the PMM 9010 performance specifications.
The following conditions apply to all specifications:
 The ambient temperature shall be 0°C to 40°C
TABLE 1-1 Main Specifications
Resolution
Frequency accuracy
10 Hz to 30 MHz (CISPR-16-1-1 Full-Compliance
from 9 kHz to 30 MHz)
0,1 Hz
< 1 ppm
RF input
Zin 50 , BNC fem.
VSWR
 10 dB RF att.
0 dB RF att.
< 1.2
< 2.0
Attenuator
0 dB to 35 dB (5dB steps)
Pulse limiter
Built in (selectable)
Preamplifier gain
20 dB (after preselector, selectable)
Max input level
(without equipment damage)
Sinewave AC voltage
Pulse spectral density
137 dBµV (1 W)
97 dBµV/MHz
Frequency range
Preselector
One lowpass filter
< 9 kHz
Six bandpass filters
9 kHz
150kHz
500kHz
3 MHz
10 MHz
20 MHz
to 150 kHz
to 500 kHz
to 3 MHz
to 10 MHz
to 20 MHz
to 30 MHz
IF bandwidth
Standard 3 dB
CISPR 16-1-1 bandwidth (6 dB)
MIL-STD-461 (option)
3, 10, 30, 100, 300 kHz
0.2 and 9 kHz
10, 100 Hz, 1, 10 kHz
General Information
1-3
Noise level (preamplifier ON)
9 to 150 kHz (200 Hz BW)
< -8 dBµV (QP); < -15 dBµV (AV)
150 kHz to 30 MHz (9 kHz BW)
< -4 dBµV (QP); < -10 dBµV (AV)
Measuring Detectors
Peak, Quasi-peak, Average, RMS, RMS-Average, CISPRAverage, APD and Smart Detector function
Level measuring time
Peak, Quasi-peak, Average, RMS
(simultaneous detectors)
1 ms to 30 sec. (CISPR 16-1-1 default)
Display units
dBm, dBµV (as stand-alone);
dBm, dBµV, dBµV/m, dBmA, dBmA/m, dBpW (through 9010
SW Utility on PC)
Spurious response
< 0 dBuV, < 10 dBuV over 150 kHz
Spectrum
From 100 Hz to 3 MHz
Span/division
Measurement accuracy
S/N > 20 dB
10 Hz to 9 kHz  1.0 dB typical
9 kHz to 30 MHz  1.0 dB
Demodulation
Built-in AM demodulator (earphones jack output)
RF output
(Tracking Generator)
Zout 50 , BNC fem.
Frequency range
10 Hz to 50 MHz
Level
60 dBµV to 90 dBµV (0.1 dB steps)
Level accuracy (10 Hz to 30 MHz)
 0.5 dB
I/O Interface
USB 2.0 (rear); USB 2.0 (front ; only for future
implementation); RS-232; High Speed Optical Link (2
channels; 2nd channel for future implementation); User Port
(for LISNs connection, etc.); Bluetooth through optional
adapter; IEEE-488 (GPIB) optional
Operating temperature
0° to 40°C
Power supply
10 - 15 Volt DC, 2,5A; Li-Ion interchangeable battery (8 h
operations, typical)
Dimensions
235 x 105 x 335 mm
Weight
4.1 kg
1-4
General Information
1.8 Front Panel
Fig. 1-1 Front Panel
Legend from left to right:
- USB
USB 2.0 connection port (future implementation only)
- PW
Power led
Indicates the power status
-
Earphone connector
To listen to the demodulated signals
- DISPLAY
Main display
To graphically show the instrument status
- User keys
5 command keys
To select the various available functions
- Controls
Rotary Knob, Left and Right (decrease / increase) Arrow Keys; Esc; Enter/Switch Key
The Rotary Knob and the Arrows Keys can be used to increase and decrease the
setting values; the Esc key allows to return to the previous status/display;
the Enter/switch key is used to confirm a set value and to switch On and Off
the equipment
- Input and Output connectors
Tracking Generator Output and Receiver Input
- RF Output led “ON”
Indicates when the internal generator is switched ON
- RF Input led “0dB”
Is ON when the input attenuator has been set to 0 dB; blinking when
PMM 9030/9060/9180 is connected through fiber optic cable and properly
communicating with 9010
General Information
1-5
1.9 Rear Panel
PS1
PS2
Fig. 1-2 Rear Panel
Legend from left to right:
- RS232
9 pin, DB9 connector
- GPIB
IEEE488 I/O Port (optional)
- USER PORT
User I/O Port
- USB
Fully functional USB 2.0 Port
- LINK1/LINK2
Optical link connectors for PMM equipments (Link 2 for future implementation)
- Power Supply
Power Supply Inputs for use to power the apparatus and simultaneously charge
its battery (PS1) and to simply charge the battery when it’s out of the receiver
(PS2).
- Fan
Cooling Fan controlled by firmware
- Replaceable Li-Ion Battery (Fig. 1-3) with main Battery Charger connector
- Earth ground connector
- Product Label and Serial Number
Fig. 1-3 BP-01 Replaceable Battery
1-6
General Information
1.10 Functional
Description
The PMM 9010 features a completely new receiver architecture based on
the most recent DSP and RSP technology, as shown on the diagram
below.
The PMM 9010 diagram is shown in Fig. 1-4
Fig. 1-4 PMM 9010 Functional BLOCK Diagram
1.11 Ultra fast
measurement: a
unique feature of
the PMM 9010
In the CISPR band A (9 ÷ 150 kHz), the standards requires the use of a
200 Hz filter that is, by nature, a filter that implies a long measurement
time: a complete scan may require even more than 10 minutes, depending
the detector in use.
Thanks to its architecture and to the large internal memory capability, the
PMM 9010 can take a “snapshot” of the whole band in just one second
and, using a true built-in FFT capability, perfectly displays the complete
band in all its details. Later on will be then possible to make the QuasiPeak
evaluation of all the frequencies of interest after the measurements will
been taken.
This feature is not only useful to greatly increase the productivity of the test
lab, but also to make better and more comprehensive analysis in case the
disturbance to be evaluated is somehow intermittent and with an irregular
repetition rate; its analysis with a traditional receiver could be hardly made
in a proper way (even if an FFT capability is available: this feature needs a
very comprehensive design), as irregular pulses could be lost during a
usual sweep.
To be noted that during the FFT analysis the PMM 9010 makes use of
internal standard Gaussian filters in compliance with the norms, while in
other cases it uses filters mathematically modelled to the perfection using a
FIR technique.
General Information
1-7
1.12 Emission
measurements
All electric and electronic devices are potential generators of ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI).
The term EMI thus refers to the electromagnetic energy emitted by a
device which propagates itself along cables or through the air and couples
with other devices that are present in the surroundings.
These electromagnetic fields (conducted or radiated interferences) may
generate interfering currents and voltages into nearby equipment and
therefore can cause possible malfunctions.
In order to prevent and control such interferences there are nowadays a
number of national and international standards, like IEC and CISPR, which
specifies limits and methods of tests. Moreover, within the European Union
the application of several European Norms on Electromagnetic
Compatibility is enforced by law and therefore the commercialization and
use of all the electric and electronic equipment is subject to the
measurement of the EMC characteristics, which must be within well
defined limits.
The design approach adopted for the PMM 9010 is that the instrument
shall be innovative, full compliant with all the relevant standards and at the
same time simple and reliable to use, to be the base building block for any
possible emission system to measure and evaluate any electric or
electronic device from the very first design stages to the final certification.
The need to precisely measure the conducted and radiated EMI noises
forces the equipment manufactures to use reliable equipment to verify the
limits imposed by the relevant standards and/or enforced by local rules.
In this view the PMM 9010 receiver is the ideal solution from prototype
debugging to final certification, as it fully meets all the performance criteria
dictated by these standards, although it remains small, lightweight and very
easy to use.
The PMM 9010 Utility control software permits an immediate use of the
instrument without any training or special difficulties: the operator can
concentrate just on analyzing the measurement results.
Moreover, the PMM 9010 software has also been designed for a fast and
easy installation on any PC with the Windows operating system and with
at least one free USB or Serial Port.
The device under test (DUT) must be installed according to the procedures
indicated in the constructor’s manual and normal operating conditions
respected.
Be sure not to overload PMM 9010: the input signal should not
exceed the maximum level indicated in the main specifications in
chapter 1.
Also do not apply any signal to RF generator output connector.
1-8
General Information
2 - Installation
2.1 Introduction
This section provides the information needed to install your PMM 9010.
It includes the information pertinent to initial inspection and power
requirements, connections, operating environment, instrument mounting,
cleaning, storage and shipment.
2.2 Initial Inspection
When receiving the equipment, first inspect the shipping cardbox for any
damages.
If the shipping box is damaged, it should be kept until the contents of the
shipment have been checked for completeness and the instrument has
been checked mechanically and electrically.
2.3 Packing and
Unpacking
Verify the availability of all the shipped items with reference to the shipping
check list enclosed with the Operating Manual.
Notify any damage to the forwarder personnel as well as to your NARDA
Representative.
To avoid further damage, do not turn on the instrument when there
are signs of shipping damage to any portion of it.
2.4 Preparation for Use
This is a Safety Class I apparatus, but it is also equipped with a
protective/functional earth terminal on the rear panel. A good
safety/functional ground connection should be provided before to
operate the receiver.
2.5 Battery charger
The battery charger supplied with the receiver can work at either 50 Hz or
60 Hz with a supply voltage rated between 100 and 240 Volt.
It is supplied with different connectors to fit all the possible outlets in
accordance with the various National standards.
-
Battery charger: DC, 10 - 15 V, ~ 2500 mA
=> DC Connector
+
2.5.1 To replace the
mains connector of
the battery charger
To replace the mains connector, simply remove the one installed on the
battery charger sliding it off, and insert the one that fits the outlets in use.
2.5.2 To charge the
internal battery
In order to guarantee the best autonomy of the internal battery, we
recommend to fully recharge it before using the receiver.
To charge the battery, simply connect the battery charger to the mains
power socket and insert the DC output connector of the battery charger to
the input CHARGER on the rear panel of the receiver.
Document 9010EN-31229-2.46 - © NARDA 2013
Installation
2-1
The charge status of the battery is displayed on the top right-hand corner of
2.5.3 Indication of the
the screen in most of the receiver modes. The symbol of a small battery will
battery status on
the screen and with be filled up proportionally to the status of the battery charge.
PW led
When the battery is not under charge, the actual voltage value is displayed
under the symbol and the length of the black bar filling the symbol indicates
the available autonomy still remaining.
When the battery charger is connected to the PMM 9010 the indication
“PWR” appears just below to the battery icon and the front panel PW led
becomes yellow if the receiver is switched on and red if the receiver is off.
The battery charging is suspended or ends automatically when one of the
following events occurs:
- the full capacity of the battery has been achieved,
- the internal temperature of the battery is higher then a preset safety
threshold,
- the charging time limit has been exceeded.
Both during recharging and when charge is completed PMM 9010 is ready
for use.
The PW led on the front panel blinks green when the battery voltage
drops below 7,0V to warn the Operator that the instrument is running
out of battery.
To prevent any damage to the battery, the PMM 9010 automatically
switches off when the battery voltage falls below 6,5V.
In order to keep the batteries fully functional, it is crucial to have a
complete recharge before storing them for periods longer than 4
months. Therefore, it is suggested to recharge the batteries at least
every 4 months even when the receiver has not been used.
2.6 Environment
The operating environment of the receiver is specified to be within the
following limits:
• Temperature
• Humidity
• Altitude
+0° to +40° C
< 90% relative
4000 meters
The instrument should be stored and shipped in a clean, dry environment
which is specified to be within the following limitations:
• Temperature
• Humidity
• Altitude
2-2
Installation
-40° to + 50° C
< 95% relative
15.000 meters
2.7 Return for Service
If the instrument should be returned to NARDA for service, please complete
the service questionnaire enclosed with the Operating Manual and attach it to
the instrument.
To minimize the repair time, be as specific as possible when describing the
failure. If the failure only occurs under certain conditions, explain how to
duplicate the failure.
If possible, reusing of the original packaging to ship the equipment is
preferable.
In case other package should be used, ensure to wrap the instrument in
heavy paper or plastic.
Use a strong shipping box and use enough shock absorbing material all
around the equipment to provide a firm cushion and prevent movement in the
shipping box; in particular protect the front panel.
Seal the shipping box securely.
Mark the shipping box FRAGILE to encourage careful handling.
2.8 Equipment Cleaning Use a clean, dry, non abrasive cloth for external cleaning of the equipment.
To clean the equipment do not use any solvent, thinner, turpentine,
acid, acetone or similar matter to avoid damage to external plastic or
display surfaces.
2.9 Equipment
ventilation
To allow correct equipment ventilation ensure that the vent grids on the
rear panel and on the bottom of the receiver are free by any obstructing
object.
2.10 Hardware
Installation
PMM 9010 is delivered from factory ready to use. Remove the receiver from
its cardboard shipping box and keep the “ON” button pressed until the PW
Led lights up (about 1 second), then release the button. To avoid unwanted
starts, if the “ON” button is kept pressed for a too short time or for more then
2 seconds the instrument is switched automatically off.
After having been switched ON, the PMM 9010 boots with its internal BIOS
and runs the firmware which manages the receiver.
At the beginning the instrument performs a diagnostic test to check if
everything is working properly.
The boot sequence is very fast and the receiver is ready to use in a couple of
seconds after having pressed the ON button.
Before to see the main menu on the LCD display, you will see all the front
panel LED’s flashing ON and OFF.
During the switch-on procedure the LCD displays the results of the autotest
and the release – and date - of the loaded firmware: if the display shows
“OK” it means that the PMM 9010 is working properly. When the sequence is
completed the main screen shows the test results and the main functional
keys on the right of the LCD display: the receiver is now ready to operate.
Connect the output of any LISN, or antenna, or absorbing clamp or any other
transducers to the RF input.
When using a PMM LISN, it is possible to control from the receiver the lines
of the LISN and automatically switch between them connecting a special
cable between the User Port of the receiver and the LISN remote control
input.
Push and keep pressed the “ON/OFF” button for more then 2 seconds to
switch off the receiver.
Installation
2-3
Fig. 2-1 PMM 9010 initial screen showing the results of the initial self-test
and the five main function keys menu.
2.11 Using an Artificial
Mains Network
(AMN or LISN)
When the PMM 9010 receiver is connected to a LISN to perform conducted
interference measurements of the EUT, the RF output of the LISN shall be
connected to the RF input of the receiver. In order to switch automatically
between the lines of the LISN, it shall be connected to the User Port of the
receiver thanks to the dedicated cable supplied with the LISN .
Using PMM 9010 Software Utility it is possible to carry out an automatic
measurements on all mains lines and get the worst case.
In order to avoid the unwanted tripping of the protection devices, an
insulation transformer shall always be used between the mains supply
and a LISN.
2.12 Using the Pulse
Limiter
The built in pulse limiter is a useful device to protect the input of the receiver
from transient over voltages. Sometime the conducted disturbances entering
the receiver through the LISN are too high - even if they cannot be seen on
the PMM 9010 because they are out of measurement bandwidth - and the
associate energy is high enough to damage the input circuit.
The pulse limiter shall be used only as a protection of the input from
unexpected pulses.
When using an external Artificial Mains Network, to reduce the
probability of damages caused by transient voltage pulses always
disconnect the PMM 9010 RF input before switching Equipment Under
Test supply ON or OFF.
2-4
Installation
2.13 Using Current and
Voltage Probes
When a LISN cannot be used – e.g. when measurements have to be made
on terminals other than the mains ones, such as load or command
terminals, sensitive to inserted capacities for example, or when LISNs of
adequate current capabilities aren’t available, or when the line voltage is too
high – a current or voltage probe can be used.
The characteristics of these probes, and some advises on their uses, are
given in §5 of CISPR 16-1-2.
The CISPR voltage probe contains a resistor with a minimum resistance of
1500 ohm, in series with a capacitor of negligible reactance vs. the
resistance (in the 150 kHz to 30 MHz range), and it is insulated at least up to
1500V.
All these probes have an insertion loss and a frequency response that can
be stored in the memory of the PMM 9010, so that the actual readings of the
receiver can be automatically corrected by these characteristics values.
2.14 Using Antennas and In the frequency range from 10 Hz to 30 MHz any other transducer can be
used to pick-up and measure RF conducted and radiated emissions, like
other Transducers
active and passive loop antennas, rod antennas, near field probes etc.
The characteristics of these transducers are usually specified in the relevant
standards (e.g. Military or Automotive Standards).
Their use with PMM 9010 is very easy, as it’s enough to enter their response
with the frequency into the memory of the receiver to have the readings
automatically corrected. When the cable is not calibrated together with the
transducer, even the cable loss can be entered.
2.15 The User Port
The PMM 9010 features on the rear panel a programmable User Port that
can be used to drive external devices or, more generally, to output signals
and data.
The User Port can easily be programmed and managed; the connector has
the following hardware connection:
PIN #
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 and 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
IN3
IN1
+ 12 VDC (max 50 mA)
OUT 0
OUT 2
OUT 4
USR-MISO
IN 2
IN 0
GND
OUT 1
OUT 3
USR-MOSI
USR-CLK
Data output (OUT 0 to OUT 4) and input (IN 0 to IN 3) are opto-coupled TTL
level with max. 1 mA draining.
Every other detail about User Port functionality is described in a separate
and more specific manual, available upon request.
Installation
2-5
2.16 Schwarzbeck Model
HXYZ 9170 Triple
Loop Antenna
Remote Cable
configuration for
PMM 9010
The following figure shows the HXYZ 9170 Triple Loop Antenna remote
cable pin configuration. This cable can be requested to Narda or arranged
locally.
Fig. 2-2 HXYZ 9170 remote cable configuration for PMM 9010
2-6
Installation
2.17 PMM L2-16A
Remote Cable
configuration
for PMM 9010
The following figure shows the LISN remote cable pin configuration. This
cable is normally provided in L2-16A package, alternatively it can be
requested to Narda or arranged locally.
Fig. 2-3 PMM L2-16A remote cable configuration for PMM 9010
Installation
2-7
2.18 PMM LISNs
Three Phase
Remote Cable
configuration
for PMM 9010
(L3-25 excluded)
The following figure shows the LISN remote cable pin configuration. The
cable can be requested to Narda or arranged locally.
Fig. 2-4 PMM LISN three phase remote cable configuration for PMM 9010
2-8
Installation
2.19 PMM L2-16
Remote Cable
configuration
for PMM 9010
The following figure shows the LISN remote cable pin configuration. The
cable can be requested to Narda or arranged locally.
Fig. 2-5 PMM L2-16 remote cable configuration for PMM 9010
Installation
2-9
2.20 PMM L3-25
Remote Cable
configuration
for PMM 9010
The following figure shows the LISN remote cable pin configuration. The
cable can be requested to Narda or arranged locally.
Fig. 2-6 PMM L3-25 remote cable configuration for PMM 9010
2-10
Installation
3 – Setup and Panel Instructions
3.1 Introduction
Press this function key in the main menu to enter in the Setup window,
which allows the Operator to set the global parameters of the receiver,
visualization options, etc.
The Setup function is divided into five, plus one, sub windows:
•
•
•
•
•
Display
Autocal
Unit
Rf Out
Panel
Always use Esc button to return to the previous view/condition.
To scroll to the following page press the Left or Right Arrow key.
3.2 Display
The Display setup has four function keys:
• Inverse: to reverse the text and background colors;
• Style: to switch between font style 0 and font style 1;
• Key border: to choose the style of the key borderlines between three
different possibilities;
• Contrast / Back Light (toggle switch): to adjust the backlight and
contrast settings by the rotary knob.
Fig. 3-1 Display setting
Document 9010EN-31229-2.46 - © NARDA 2013
Setup and Panel Instructions
3-1
3.3 Autocal
Pressing the Autocal button PMM 9010 starts performing its automatic
self-calibration, using the internal precise tracking generator as a reference.
The connection between the internal tracking generator and the input of the
receiver is done automatically inside the instrument.
To interrupt the self-calibration press the key Abort.
When the self-calibration is successfully finished a message is displayed:
In order to avoid any possible external influence, it is suggested to
disconnect all cables from the PMM 9010 RF ports during the selfcalibration process.
It is strongly recommended that the User launches the self-calibration
every now and then, and every time the instrument is used in
temperature-limit conditions.
3-2
Setup and Panel Instructions
3.4 Unit
Entering in the Unit menu it is possible to change the indicated unit used to
display the measured levels.
The available units are dBµV and dBm.
In a 50 Ohm system the relationship between dBm and dBµV is:
dBµV = dBm + 107
i.e., 0 dBm (1 mW) = 107 dBµV
3.5 RF OUT
The tracking generator is an internal, high stability and accuracy, 50 Ohm
RF generator ranging from 10 Hz to 50 MHz.
Activating the Tracking On function the generator is always tuned at the
same PMM 9010 measurement frequency and scans the range together
with the receiver. This is the standard way a tracking generator works in all
spectrum analyzers.
If the Tracking On function is disabled, the generator becomes a CW signal
source tuned at the frequency set under the RF OUT Freq window.
As usual, to set a given frequency it is therefore enough to edit the value
with the soft keys and the left and right arrows, confirming the selections
entering the units value (kHz, MHz or GHz).
Pressing 0 as the first figure the decimal dot appears automatically.
In both operating modes (tracking or fixed frequency) the output level can
be set between 60,0 and 90,0 dBµV with 0,1dB steps using the RF OUT
Level button.
If a higher or lower level is needed, the User shall adopt either an external
amplifier or an external attenuator.
The tracking generator is extremely useful for several applications: first of
all it is essential to calibrate the receiver itself thanks to the automatic
internal routines specifically developed to this extent, then it can also be
used to transform the PMM 9010 in a scalar network analyzer, helping a lot
in designing and testing RF filters, active stages and a lot of other circuits.
3.6 Panel
The Panel function allows the User to store up to 2 different setups that can
be recalled any time.
Pressing Save #1 or Save #2 the actual setup is stored in the internal
memory; with the two Recall buttons the corresponding setup is loaded to
the receiver.
Please remember each time one of the Save buttons is pressed, the stored
set-up is overwritten by the new one: the saved setups are therefore kept
memorized in the receiver until a new set-up is stored in the same memory.
The Default button can be used to load a default standard setup saved into
the memory at the factory.
Setup and Panel Instructions
3-3
3.7 RS 232 (Speed)
Pressing the Left or the Right Arrow key, inside the Setup menu, the
second page appears. In the second page is the RS 232 Port speed setting
function.
Here it is possible to set the bit rate of the RS 232 serial port which
connector is located on the rear panel.
The actual setting is always shown between the parenthesis and it is
possible to choose between 9600, 38400 and 115200 bps.
The default speed, that is the one to be used for standard communication,
is 115200.
In case an optional device (ex. GPIB interface) is to be connected to the RS
232 port, refer to its operating manual to know the correct speed to be
selected.
3-4
Setup and Panel Instructions
4 - Sweep Mode Operating Instructions
4.1 Introduction
The Sweep mode is used to operate the PMM 9010 as a powerful scanning
EMI receiver. To enter in this mode it’s enough to depress the Sweep soft
key on the main screen, and immediately the scan setup window pops up
and allows the operator to set the parameters for the scan. All the automatic
settings (RBW, frequency step, etc.) refer to the CISPR standard.
Fig. 4-1 Sweep
As for the Analyzer operating mode, all the relevant information are reported
on the screen.
From the upper left corner, the User can see if the Preselector is ON or OFF;
if the Preamplifier is ON or OFF; which detector is in use and the relevant
hold time; if the function “Smart Detector” is activated and which one; if the
input attenuation is Automatic or Manual and the set attenuation and if the
Minimum attenuation is 10 dB or 0dB.
Just above the graph there is on the left the Reference level. During the
scan, in the center above the graph the actual frequency measured and/or
any other relevant operation (e.g. FFT, etc.).
Below the graph the start and the stop frequency, and loaded limits, if any.
When the sweep has been executed, on the bottom of the screen the most
important sweep parameters are repeated.
If the graph has been loaded from the memory, just below the start frequency
there is the symbol # followed by the memory position loaded (position
number 2 in figure 4-1).
Please note that the information in the upper part above the graph refers to
the next sweep to be done, while the information in the lower part, below the
graph, concerns to the actual displayed data.
Thanks to its digital architecture and to the clever design, the PMM
9010 receiver can make very fast measurements in the lower CISPR
band using the 200 Hz filter, yet maintaining full compliance to the
standards even in this very difficult condition.
Document 9010EN-31229-2.46 - © NARDA 2013
Sweep Mode Operating Instructions
4-1
The Sweep mode function is divided into five sub windows:
•
•
•
•
•
Measure
Limit
Display
Marker
Load Store
Always use Esc button to return to the previous view/condition.
4.2 Measure
The Measure button is used to set the scan parameters and to run the
sweep.
After having chosen the frequency band and set all the other parameters it is
possible to run the measurement scan simply touching the Exec Sweep
button.
To make subsequent sweeps with the same setting parameters, simply
press ReDo Sweep. This key is particularly useful after having loaded a
previously stored track (see 4.6), as with the Re Do Sweep the original
settings are kept for the new measurement: it is extremely easy to make
comparisons, for example, before and after a modification of the EUT.
Once the scan starts, it can be stopped at any time during the execution by
the Stop function key that appears during the scan.
4.2.1 Frequency
The Frequency menu features five function buttons:
Pressing A Band the receiver will be set to scan the 9 - 150 kHz frequency
band. The definition of band A is a given in CISPR.
Pressing B Band the receiver will be set to scan the 0,15 - 30 MHz frequency
band. The definition of band B is a given in CISPR.
Pressing A + B Band the receiver will be set to scan the entire band from 9
kHz to 30 MHz.
Using these automatic band settings, the Frequency Step and Resolution
Bandwidth are set automatically according to CISPR standard requirement.
The Start and Stop frequency buttons can be used to set any frequency
interval for the measurement; to enter the frequency values press the
corresponding function keys.
Pressing either one of these 2 keys the figures 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4 are
selectable at first; with the right arrow key it is possible to select the figures
from 5 to 9, and pressing again the right arrow key the units kHz, MHz and
GHz becomes accessible, as well as the decimal dot and the Back Space.
The left arrow key can be used as well to move back and forth from one
screen to the other. Pressing 0 as the first figure the decimal dot appears
automatically.
To set a given frequency it is therefore enough to edit the value with the soft
keys and the left an right arrows, confirming the selections entering the units
value (kHz, MHz or GHz).
The figures entered appear in a small window just below the graph and the
default unit is MHz.
4-2
Sweep Mode Operating Instructions
4.2.2 Level
The Level function has 5 sub-menus, each one with several options..
Pressing the Display button it is possible to set two parameters: the
visualized Dynamic range (chosen between 80, 100 and 120dB) and the
Reference Level, that can be increased or reduced by steps of 5dB within
the range +80 dBµV to 135 dBµV (-25 to +30 dBm).
The Input button opens a submenu which is dedicated to the setting of the
input attenuator and to switch on-off the built-in preamplifier.
The PMM 9010 receiver takes automatically into account the settings of all
the Input parameters and always displays the correct value of the level. The
User is not required to make any correction to the readings.
4.2.2.1 Input:
Attenuators and
preamplifier
Being entered in the Input submenu, to increase or decrease the attenuation
at the input, press Att + or Att -, and for each touch the attenuation is
increased or decreased of 5 dB (preset value). Depressing either one of
these keys force the receiver in manual attenuation.
When the input attenuation is 0dB (condition that can be achieved only if the
Minimum Attenuation is set to 0 dB as well), the yellow led to the left of the
input BNC connector is ON and indicates a warning status.
The Min Att button acts as a toggle switch: it selects or deselects the
minimum attenuation of 10 dB. When the minimum attenuation is selected,
the attenuator – doesn’t matter if in automatic or in manual condition cannot be lowered under 10 dB.
Unless specifically required by the test conditions, do not remove the
minimum attenuation of 10 dB.
With the Preamp key it is possible to insert or exclude the built-in low noise
preamplification of 20 dB.
The internal 20 dB preamplifier can be used when very weak signals have to
be investigated. As already mentioned, with the preamplifier ON the receiver
takes automatically care of the 20 dB gain when measuring the signals.
The Att Auto button is used to switch from the two conditions of manual or
automatic attenuation setting.
Please note that the switching of the attenuators is relatively noisy and you
can perceive it distinctly with a “click” for each switch operation.
In case an OVERLOAD indication occurs it is necessary to add an external
attenuator to carry on the measurement without overpassing the declared
limit for continuous power or spectral density.
Using 0 dB attenuation PMM 9010 has no input protection.
This is a potentially dangerous condition for the input stage of the
receiver.
Use 0 dB attenuation only if you are very sure that your input signal is
less than 0.5 Vpp (or 106 dBµV).
Before to apply an unknown signal to PMM 9010 receiver, use an
oscilloscope or a wide band RF voltmeter to measure it. In any case set
Min. ATT at 10 dB and select the maximum available attenuation with
preamplifier OFF.
If needed, add an external coaxial attenuator on the input signal line.
Sweep Mode Operating Instructions
4-3
4.2.2.2 Misc
Under the Miscellanea functions menu it is possible to activate or exclude
the Preselector filters, the Pulse Limiter, and also to enter in the Tracking
generator menu pressing the RF OUT button.
The Preselector is composed by a group of filters automatically selected by
the PMM 9010 while it is sweeping or anyway measuring. The aim of the
preselector is to reduce the amount of out-of-band energy entering in the
receiver, thus helping a lot in reducing intermodulation problems and similar
undesired behaviors.
It can be set either ON or OFF with the associated button, and normally it
should be always enabled.
On the top left corner of the screen the symbol “Off” or “On” will be displayed.
The Pulse Limiter is a very useful device to protect the input of the receiver
from transient overvoltages. Doing conducted emission tests, quite often
there are conducted disturbances (usually associated to switching operations
in the EUT or along the line under test) which are too high and that
propagates through the LISN up to the receiver. Sometime these
disturbances cannot be seen on the receiver because they are out of
measurement bandwidth, nevertheless the associate energy is high enough
to damage the input attenuator and/or the Analog-to-Digital Converter of the
PMM 9010 (the first mixer in a traditional receiver).
This pulse limiter has an integrated 10dB attenuator and a 30 MHz low-pass
filter.
When the Pulse Limiter is selected, on the upper part of the screen the
letters P.L. appear next the value of the Minimum Attenuation and the
reading on the receiver is automatically corrected for the attenuation factor of
the Pulse Limiter.
4.2.2.2.1 Tracking
generator
Pressing the RF OUT button the receiver enters the Tracking generator
menu.
.
The tracking generator is an internal, high stability and accuracy, 50 Ohm
RF generator ranging from 10 Hz to 50 MHz.
Activating the Tracking On function the generator is always tuned at the
same PMM 9010 measurement frequency and scans the range together with
the receiver. This is the standard way a tracking generator works in all
spectrum analyzers.
If the Tracking On function is disabled, the generator becomes a CW signal
source tuned at the frequency set under the RF OUT Freq window.
As usual, to set a given frequency it is therefore enough to edit the value with
the soft keys and the left an right arrows, confirming the selections entering
the units value (kHz, MHz or GHz).
Pressing 0 as the first figure the decimal dot appears automatically.
In both operating modes (tracking or fixed frequency) the output level can be
set between 60,0 and 90,0 dBµV with 0,1dB steps using the RF OUT Level
button.
If a higher or lower level is needed, the User shall adopt either an external
amplifier or an external attenuator.
The tracking generator is extremely useful for several applications: first of all
it is essential to calibrate the receiver itself thanks to the automatic internal
routines specifically developed to this extent, then it can also be used to
transform the PMM 9010 in a scalar network analyzer, helping a lot in
designing and testing RF filters, active stages and a lot of other circuits.
It is suggested to turn off the Generator to achieve the maximum
sensitivity.
4-4
Sweep Mode Operating Instructions
4.2.2.3 Detector
This menu allows the operator to select the most appropriate detector for
the test.
In Sweep mode the Peak, Average, RMS (Root Mean Square) and QuasiPeak detectors are available and can be selected via the appropriate button.
Hold time (ms)
The Hold Time (expressed in milliseconds) represents the time the receiver
uses to “take a snapshot” of the incoming signal and to measure it with the
chosen detector. When selecting a detector, the default hold time value is
automatically loaded, but in some cases this time is not appropriate, e.g.
when the interference signals have a low repetition rate. In this case the
PMM 9010 sees a high input signal and therefore tries to set the proper
attenuation automatically increasing the value or the input attenuators.
However, when the input attenuation is set the signal is gone, so the receiver
lowers the attenuation, but then a new peak arrives, and so on and so forth.
On the other hand, if the Hold Time is too high the PMM 9010 cannot
properly follow the signals.
In this situation the Hold Time value should be manually set to find a correct
compromise.
To set the Hold Time to the lowest possible value (this value dynamically
depends from the measurement conditions), enter the figure 0; if a value
lower than the allowed is entered, the lowest possible value is automatically
selected.
The max. Hold Time that can be set is 30 sec (30.000 ms).
4.2.2.4 Smart Detector
The Smart Detector is an innovative special function implemented in the
PMM 9010 receiver with the purpose of reducing the test time and increasing
the productivity of the lab.
This function works only when at least one limit is loaded, therefore
remember to enable a limit to run the Smart detector function.
Selecting one out of the three Smart detectors the receiver will execute the
scan using at first the Peak detector and, if a peak value is found over the
selected limit minus a Margin set with the specific button, the reading is remeasured and displayed with the chosen (AVG, RMS or QPeak) detector.
Obviously this way of operation results in a much faster scan sweep and
moreover it immediately draws the attention of the test Engineer to the most
critical points. The limit associated to the Margin is displayed as a bold black
line and is automatically selected by the receiver depending which Smart
detector is chosen; for example, if a Smart QP is selected, the associated
QP limit line will be displayed as a bold black line.
The Smart RMS detector is disabled until a reference limit is defined by
CISPR.
It is immediately clear that this function is very useful to dramatically reduce
test time and increase the productivity of the test lab.
To deselect the Smart Detector function simply select a single detector.
The weighting time must be properly set in the Hold Time window to
allow the Smart detectors functions to operate as intended.
Sweep Mode Operating Instructions
4-5
4.2.3 Conversion factor
When using a transducer to make a measurement – a Voltage or Current
Probe, an Antenna, etc. – there is always the need to add to the measured
values the conversion factor of the transducer in use.
The Conversion factor may also take proper account of losses as cable loss,
attenuators added externally to the receiver, etc.
The PMM 9010 can handle these factors in an automatic way and directly
correct the readings.
The PMM 9010 can store in its internal non-volatile memory up to 4 different
correction factors, and use them one at a time when recalled.
However, the Conversion Factors shall be created and loaded via the PMM
9010 Software Utility.
4.3 Limit
Press the relevant button to load the conversion factor, and NONE to unload
it.
Each emission standard has one or more limits the User shall comply with.
The PMM 9010 receiver has the possibility to load and activate one limit with
the simple click of a button.
The preloaded standard limits refer to the most popular EMC emission
standards: CISPR22, CISPR14 and CISPR11.
Other limits – or any custom designed limit – can be created, managed,
selected and loaded through the PMM 9010 Software Utility running on a PC
(and the test, of course, shall be handled via the PC software).
These additional custom limits cannot be stored in the memory of the PMM
9010, but only in the one of the PC where the 9010SW Utility is running.
The limits are shown on the scan display and they appear like a thin black
line when the Smart Detector function is not enabled, while one of them
appears in bold black when the Smart Detector function is active.
By pressing the NONE button all limits are deactivated.
4.4 Display
4-6
Pressing the Display button it is possible to set two parameters: the
visualized Dynamic range (chosen between 80, 100 and 120dB) and the
Reference Level, that can be increased or reduced by steps of 5dB within
the range +80 dBµV to 135 dBµV (-25 to +30 dBm); see also 4.2.
Sweep Mode Operating Instructions
4.5 Marker
Selecting this function a Marker is immediately enabled, and it appears on
the screen as a small black pointing down arrow corresponding to the highest
reading; simultaneously a small window shows up in the bottom left corner of
the screen, indicating the actual frequency and level read by the marker.
The Marker function is not a simple search for the highest readings on the
screen – it would be a useless exercise that would display a number of points
all grouped together – but it’s a true peak search that measures the degree
of variation of the signal: a peak is so classified only if it “pops-up” from the
adjacent signals with at least 5 dB difference in amplitude.
Following this criterion, if the measured signal is a flat line no peaks will be
found.
Selecting Highest X – where X represents the maximum number of markers
found by the receiver during its sweep – few more markers are added, each
one “diamond” shaped, defined as per the previous explanation.
The maximum number of markers available is 10.
By using arrow keys it is possible to quickly move on markers from higher
amplitude (left arrow) to lower amplitude (right arrow), i.e. if the highest is
nd
selected, pressing the right arrow key the 2 highest is selected, then
rd
pressing again the same key the 3 highest and so on and so forth.
It is also possible to use the rotary knob to move from a marker to the next
one.
The marker under analysis (main marker) is a black arrow pointing down, the
others are diamond shaped.
Pressing the Peak button the marker returns to the highest reading.
In order to make easier and faster the evaluation of the more noisy signals,
the User can now select either the Analyzer or the Tune function, entering
respectively into a spectrum analysis of main marker position or in the
manual mode evaluation of it. To operate this two conditions please refer to
the appropriate section of this Operating Manual.
In manual mode, i.e. having selected Tune on the main marker, it is possible
to navigate from one peak to the other just pressing the arrow keys, without
to come back to the Sweep display and remaining in manual mode.
This is another unique feature of PMM 9010 to improve the productivity of the
test lab and make easier the work of the test engineer.
The Marker Off exits from the marker function.
Sweep Mode Operating Instructions
4-7
4.6 Load Store
Pressing this key allows the User to have access to the memory of the
receiver and enables the storing up to a number of different
configurations/sweeps that depends on the parameters set on the receiver
(i.e. the number of measured points). For example, using standard CISPR
parameters it is possible to store up to 15 sweeps on the A+B band.
Each new scan will be stored in the first available memory position thanks to
the button Store #x, where x is the first available position. When all positions
are occupied by a scan, this function is disabled until one of the previous
scan is erased.
To load a stored trace, press the Load #x button until the proper scan is
displayed; to unload a trace select the Unload Trace button.
Please note that the Load function is scanning the memory in a circular way,
therefore all the occupied memory positions are shown in sequence. When
the key shows “Load #4”, it means the trace #3 is displayed and that the #4
will be loaded after the key is pressed, and so on and so forth.
To erase a trace, press the Erase#x button.
Due to the structure of the memory, it is possible to erase only the latest
stored memory, with a sequence “LIFO” (Last In First Out), therefore after
having erased the #x, the #(x-1) will be the trace to be erased. With
reference to the example at the left, the last stored trace is the #4, and it is
the first that will be erased. After that, the key will show “Erase #3”, and so on
and so forth.
A more advanced trace management could be done using the PMM 9010
Software Utility.
Turn Off the tracking generator, if it is not used, while you are in Scan
Mode.
This prevents interferences and the measurements are more clean and
accurate.
4.7 Ultra Fast FFT scan
The Ultra Fast FFT (Fast Fourier Transform), as described at §1.11, provides
a “snapshot” of the whole band in just one second, what is useful for a more
comprehensive analysis in case the disturbance to be evaluated is somehow
intermittent and with an irregular repetition rate.
To activate this feature few settings have to be manually performed at first,
as per the following:
- Peak detector
- ≤ 50ms Hold Time
- Band A sweep.
Once all these conditions are satisfied, the Sweep is performed in really “one
second”, what is very useful to soon realize overall behaviour of EUTs in a
debugging phase, saving time and making it possible even in those cases
where the EUT cannot stay ON for a long time without getting damaged
(small electric motors, etc.)
Later on will be then possible to make the full-compliant Quasi-Peak
evaluation of all the frequencies of interest after the measurements will been
taken.
During such FFT analysis the PMM 9010 makes use of internal standard
Gaussian filters still in compliance with the norms.
4-8
Sweep Mode Operating Instructions
5 - Analyzer Mode Operating Instructions
5.1 Introduction
To enter in the ANALYZER Mode it’s enough to depress the Analyzer soft
key on the main screen.
In this mode the receiver works as a powerful Spectrum Analyzer and the
display shows the "spectrum analysis" (span max 30 MHz) in the frequency
domain of a signal tuned at a given frequency.
The analysis is done at the selected span frequency.
Using the marker facility the User can accomplish a very accurate
measurement of the signals either in frequency as well as in level.
Entering Analyzer Mode from the main menu, the display will look like the
following:
Fig. 5-1 Spectrum
The SPAN per division is automatically managed by the equipment and
divided by 10. The minimum SPAN is 100Hz per division.
On the screen of the Analyzer Mode all the relevant information are reported.
From the upper left corner, the User can see if the Preselector is ON or OFF;
if the Preamplifier is ON or OFF; which detector is in use and the relevant
hold time; if the input attenuation is Automatic or Manual and the set
attenuation and if the Minimum attenuation is 10 dB or 0dB.
Just above the graph, from left to right, there is the Reference level, the
Resolution bandwidth and the span value.
Below the graph the start, center and stop frequency.
The bottom left corner is dedicated to the marker indication, with actual
frequency and level of the marker.
Document 9010EN-31229-2.46 - © NARDA 2013
Analyzer Mode Operating Instructions
5-1
The Spectrum mode function is divided into five sub windows:
•
•
•
•
•
Frequency
Resolution Bandwidth
Level
Marker
Wide Mode
The fifth button is used to change the spectrum view to wide screen mode,
as shown in the picture 5-1, and with the Esc button the original view can be
restored.
Always use Esc button to return to the previous view/condition.
5.2 Frequency
Allows the User to set the tuning frequency and also the Span.
The Center frequency of the Spectrum window can be directly edited into the
window or set by the arrow buttons or by the rotary knob, which frequency
steps are set under the Manual mode.
Depressing the Center button the figures 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4 are selectable;
with the right arrow key it is possible to select the figures from 5 to 9, and
pressing again the right arrow key the units kHz, MHz and GHz becomes
accessible, as well as the decimal dot and the Back Space. The left arrow
key can be used as well to move back and forth from one screen to the
other. Pressing 0 as the first figure the decimal dot appears automatically.
To set a given frequency it is therefore enough to edit the value with the soft
keys and the left an right arrows, confirming the selections entering the units
value (kHz, MHz or GHz).
The figures entered appear in a small window just below the graph and the
default unit is MHz, so 100 kHz = 0,1 MHz; 10 kHz = 0,01 MHz;
1 kHz = 0,001 MHz and 100 Hz = 0,0001 MHz.
Using the Start and Stop buttons it is possible to select any start and stop
value in the frequency range 10 Hz to 30 MHz band.
Another method for setting the frequency is to enter the Center frequency
and the appropriate Span.
In this mode of operation the frequency step (spectrum resolution) is set
automatically, therefore it cannot be changed manually.
In order to better analyze the signals close to the ends of the band and
see them properly with any of the applicable filters, the receiver is able
to go lower than 10 Hz and higher than 30 MHz.
The actual minimum frequency that can be displayed on the screen is 0
Hz, the maximum is 32 MHz.
5-2
Analyzer Mode Operating Instructions
5.3 RBW
The Resolution Bandwidth command is used to select the bandwidth of the
measuring filter. Seven bandwidth filters are available:
• 200 Hz CISPR 16 shaped at -6dB
•
9 kHz CISPR 16 shaped at -6dB
•
3 kHz at -3dB
•
10 kHz at -3dB
•
30 kHz at -3dB
• 100 kHz at -3dB
• 300 kHz at -3dB
The three larger filters are selectable from the first RBW screen, and
pressing the More RBW button it is possible to select all the other filters.
These filters are mathematically modeled using FIR (Finite Impulse
Response) technique and they are exactly as required by the standards.
More filters will be available as an option for specific applications, e.g. to
cover Military Standards requirements, etc.
5.4 Level
The Level function has 5 sub-menus, each one with several options.
Pressing the Display button it is possible to set two parameters: the
visualized Dynamic range (chosen between 80, 100 and 120dB) and the
Reference Level, that can be increased or reduced by steps of 5dB within the
range +60 dBµV to 130 dBµV (-45 to 25 dBm); in operating modes Analyzer
and Manual the min.-max. values of the reference level are in function of the
input attenuator and preamplifier settings.
The Input button opens a submenu which is dedicated to the setting of the
input attenuator and to switch on-off the built-in preamplifier.
The PMM 9010 receiver takes automatically into account the settings of all
the Input parameters and always displays the correct value of the level. The
User is not required to make any correction to the readings.
5.4.1 Input: Attenuators Being entered in the Input submenu, to increase or decrease the attenuation
at the input, press Att + or Att -, and for each touch the attenuation is
and preamplifier
increased or decreased of 5 dB (preset value). Depressing either one of
these keys force the receiver in manual attenuation.
When the input attenuation is 0dB (condition that can be achieved only if the
Minimum Attenuation is set to 0 dB as well), the yellow led to the left of the
input BNC connector is ON and indicates a warning status.
The Min Att button acts as a toggle switch: it selects or deselects the
minimum attenuation of 10 dB. When the minimum attenuation is selected,
the attenuator – doesn’t matter if in automatic or in manual condition cannot be lowered under 10 dB.
Unless specifically required by the test conditions, do not remove the
minimum attenuation of 10 dB.
With the Preamp key it is possible to insert or exclude the built-in low noise
preamplification of 20 dB.
The internal 20 dB preamplifier can be used when very weak signals have to
be investigated. As already mentioned, with the preamplifier ON the receiver
takes automatically care of the 20 dB gain when measuring the signals.
The Att Auto button is used to switch from the two conditions of manual or
automatic attenuation setting.
Please note that the switching of the attenuators is relatively noisy and you
can perceive it distinctly with a “click” for each switch operation.
Analyzer Mode Operating Instructions
5-3
Using 0 dB attenuation PMM 9010 has no input protection.
This is a potentially dangerous condition for the input stage of the
receiver.
Use 0 dB attenuation only if you are very sure that your input signal is
less than 0.5 Vpp (or 106 dBµV).
Before to apply an unknown signal to PMM 9010 receiver, use an
oscilloscope or a wide band RF voltmeter to measure it. In any case set
Min. ATT at 10 dB and select the maximum available attenuation with
preamplifier OFF.
If needed, add an external coaxial attenuator on the input signal line.
5.4.2 OVER RANGE
Message
An Over Range indication will automatically appear on the screen to inform
the User that the levels of the measured signals in the spectrum window is
too high: to avoid measuring errors and even damages to the receiver a
higher attenuation shall be set.
5.4.3 Misc
Under the Miscellanea functions menu it is possible to activate or exclude
the Preselector filters, the Pulse Limiter, and also to set the Tracking
Generator.
The Preselector is composed by a group of filters automatically selected by
the PMM 9010 while it is sweeping or anyway measuring. The aim of the
preselector is to reduce the amount of out-of-band energy entering in the
receiver, thus helping a lot in reducing intermodulation problems and similar
undesired behaviors.
In Analyzer mode the preselector is available only if the entire span falls in
one filter band (see the main specification in chapter 1 to verify the frequency
bands). In this situation on the display it will be shown: Preselector ON. If the
span is larger then one filter only, on the display the symbol *** will appear
instead.
It can be set either ON or OFF with the associated button, and normally it
should be always enabled.
On the top left corner of the screen the symbol “Off” or “On” will be displayed.
The Pulse Limiter is a very useful device to protect the input of the receiver
from transient overvoltages. Doing conducted emission tests, quite often
there are conducted disturbances (usually associated to switching operations
in the EUT or along the line under test) which are too high and that
propagates through the LISN up to the receiver. Sometime these
disturbances cannot be seen on the receiver because they are out of
measurement bandwidth, nevertheless the associate energy is high enough
to damage the input attenuator and/or the Analog-to-Digital Converter of the
PMM 9010 (the first mixer in a traditional receiver).
This pulse limiter has an integrated 10dB attenuator and a 30 MHz low-pass
filter.
When the Pulse Limiter is selected, on the upper part of the screen the
letters P.L. appear next the value of the Minimum Attenuation and the
reading on the receiver is automatically corrected for the attenuation factor of
the Pulse Limiter.
Pressing the RF OUT button the receiver enters the Tracking generator
menu.
5-4
Analyzer Mode Operating Instructions
5.4.3.1 Tracking
generator
The tracking generator is an internal, high stability and accuracy, 50 Ohm
RF generator ranging from 10 Hz to 50 MHz.
Activating the Tracking On function the generator is always tuned at the
same PMM 9010 measurement frequency and scans the range together
with the receiver. This is the standard way a tracking generator works in all
spectrum analyzers.
If the Tracking On function is disabled, the generator becomes a CW signal
source tuned at the frequency set under the RF OUT Freq window.
As usual, to set a given frequency it is therefore enough to edit the value
with the soft keys and the left an right arrows, confirming the selections
entering the units value (kHz, MHz or GHz).
Pressing 0 as the first figure the decimal dot appears automatically.
In both operating modes (tracking or fixed frequency) the output level can
be set between 60,0 and 90,0 dBµV with 0,1dB steps using the RF OUT
Level button.
If a higher or lower level is needed, the User shall adopt either an external
amplifier or an external attenuator.
The tracking generator is extremely useful for several applications: first of
all it is essential to calibrate the receiver itself thanks to the automatic
internal routines specifically developed to this extent, then it can also be
used to transform the PMM 9010 in a scalar network analyzer, helping a lot
in designing and testing RF filters, active stages and a lot of other circuits.
It is suggested to turn off the Generator to achieve the maximum
sensitivity.
5.4.4 Detector
This menu allows the Operator to select the most appropriate detector for
the test.
In Analyzer mode the Peak, Average and RMS (Root Mean Square)
detectors are available and can be selected via the appropriate button.
Hold time
The Hold Time (expressed in milliseconds) represents the time the receiver
uses to “take a snapshot” of the incoming signal and to measure it with the
chosen detector. When selecting a detector, the default hold time value is
automatically loaded, but in some cases this time is not appropriate, e.g.
when the interference signals have a low repetition rate. In this case the
PMM 9010 sees a high input signal and therefore tries to set the proper
attenuation automatically increasing the value or the input attenuators.
However, when the input attenuation is set the signal is gone, so the
receiver lowers the attenuation, but then a new peak arrives, and so on and
so forth..
On the other hand, if the Hold Time is too high the PMM 9010 cannot
properly follow the signals.
In this situation the Hold Time value should be manually set to find a
correct compromise.
To set the Hold Time to the lowest possible value (this value dynamically
depends from the measurement conditions), enter the figure 0; if a value
lower than the allowed is entered, the lowest possible value is automatically
selected.
The max. Hold Time that can be set is 30 sec (30.000 ms).
Analyzer Mode Operating Instructions
5-5
5.4.5 Conversion factor
When using a transducer to make a measurement – a Voltage or Current
Probe, an Antenna, etc. – there is always the need to add to the measured
values the conversion factor of the transducer in use.
The Conversion factor may also take proper account of losses as cable
loss, attenuators added externally to the receiver, etc.
The PMM 9010 can handle these factors in an automatic way and directly
correct the readings.
The PMM 9010 can store in its internal non-volatile memory up to 4
different correction factors, and use them one at a time when recalled.
However, the Conversion Factors shall be created and loaded via the
PMM 9010 Software Utility.
Press the relevant button to load the conversion factor, and NONE to
unload it.
5.5 Marker
With this command the Marker function can be enabled.
Switching ON the marker it appears on the screen as a small black pointing
down arrow, and simultaneously a small window shows up in the bottom left
corner of the screen, indicating the actual frequency and level read by the
marker.
Pressing the Peak button the marker will automatically move to the highest
signal found in the span range in that given moment, and with the help of
the Center button the frequency selected by the marker becomes the
center frequency on the screen, making very easy any signal analysis.
5.6 ESC
5-6
This button allows to return to the previous view or condition.
Analyzer Mode Operating Instructions
6 - Manual Mode Operating Instructions
6.1 Introduction
The MANUAL mode is a very useful feature to manually control the
receiver and to deeply investigate electrical signals modifying the
parameters of receiver exactly as per the needs of the Test Engineer.
It is possible, for example, to observe the signals exceeding the limits
frequency by frequency; evaluating their levels measured simultaneously
with 4 different detectors (Peak, QuasiPeak, Average and RMS); listening
to them after a demodulation, etc.
To enter in .Manual Mode press the key in the main menu, and
immediately the first Manual window opens as follow.
Fig. 6-1 Manual
In manual mode the levels corresponding to the detectors in use are
displayed both in analogue and in digital format, and exactly as for the other
operating modes, all the relevant information are reported on the screen.
From the upper left corner, the User can see if the Preselector is ON or
OFF; if the Preamplifier is ON or OFF; the resolution bandwidth, the longest
hold time associated to the detectors in use; if the input attenuation is
Automatic or Manual and the set attenuation and if the Minimum
attenuation is 10 dB or 0dB; if there a demodulation and the level of the
volume, represented by a small black bar.
Then there are three or fours vertical bars representing the detectors and
indicating in analogue and digital (the figures below each bar) the level
measured; on top of the bars the relevant detector, the unit in use and the
tuned frequency. The analogue scale of the analogue bars is set
automatically by the receiver.
Document 9010EN-31229-2.46 - © NARDA 2013
Manual Mode Operating Instructions
6-1
The Manual mode function has five sub windows:
•
•
•
•
•
Frequency
Level
Resolution Bandwidth
Hold Time
Demodulation
Always use Esc button to return to the previous view/condition.
6.2 Frequency
Under this menu it is possible to set the tuning frequency and also the knob
and the arrow keys steps.
The center Frequency of the reading can be directly edited into the Tune
window or set by the left and right arrow buttons or by rotating the knob.
The figures entered appear in a small window just below the graph and the
default unit is MHz.
Having selected Tune, the figures 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4 are selectable at first;
with the right arrow key it is possible to select the figures from 5 to 9, and
pressing again the right arrow key the units kHz, MHz and GHz becomes
accessible, as well as the decimal dot and the Back Space. The left arrow
key can be used as well to move back and forth from one screen to the
other. Pressing 0 as the first figure the decimal dot appears automatically.
To set a given frequency it is therefore enough to edit the value with the
soft keys and the left an right arrows, confirming the selections entering the
units value (kHz, MHz or GHz).
If Knob is selected, the small window below the bars indicate the step
which is going to be selected. After having fixed the step size, rotate the
know and tune the desired frequency.
If Arrow is selected, the small window below the bars indicate the step
which is going to be selected. After having fixed the step size, press the left
and the right arrow keys to decrease or increase the frequency by the
selected step.
6.3 Level
The Level function has 4 sub-menus.
Pressing the Display button it is possible to set two parameters: the
visualized Dynamic range (chosen between 80, 100 and 120dB) and the
Reference Level, that can be increased or reduced by steps of 5dB within
the range +60 dBµV to 130 dBµV (-45 to 25 dBm); in operating modes
Analyzer and Manual the min.-max. values of the reference level are in
function of the input attenuator and preamplifier settings.
The Input button opens a submenu which is dedicated to the setting of the
input attenuator and to switch on-off the built-in preamplifier.
The PMM 9010 receiver takes automatically into account the settings of all
the Input parameters and always displays the correct value of the level. The
User is not required to make any correction to the readings.
6-2
Manual Mode Operating Instructions
6.3.1 Input: Attenuator
and preamplifier
Being entered in the Input submenu, to increase or decrease the attenuation
at the input, press Att + or Att -, and for each touch the attenuation is
increased or decreased of 5 dB (preset value). Depressing either one of
these keys force the receiver in manual attenuation.
When the input attenuation is 0dB (condition that can be achieved only if the
Minimum Attenuation is set to 0 dB as well), the yellow led to the left of the
input BNC connector is ON and indicates a warning status.
The Min Att button acts as a toggle switch: it selects or deselects the
minimum attenuation of 10 dB. When the minimum attenuation is selected,
the attenuator – doesn’t matter if in automatic or in manual condition cannot be lowered under 10 dB.
Unless specifically required by the test conditions, do not remove the
minimum attenuation of 10 dB.
With the Preamp key it is possible to insert or exclude the built-in low noise
preamplification of 20 dB.
The internal 20 dB preamplifier can be used when very weak signals have to
be investigated. As already mentioned, with the preamplifier ON the receiver
takes automatically care of the 20 dB gain when measuring the signals.
The Att Auto button is used to switch from the two conditions of manual or
automatic attenuation setting.
Please note that the switching of the attenuators is relatively noisy and you
can perceive it distinctly with a “click” for each switch operation.
Using 0 dB attenuation PMM 9010 has no input protection.
This is a potentially dangerous condition for the input stage of the
receiver.
Use 0 dB attenuation only if you are very sure that your input signal is
less than 1 V (or 120 dBµV).
Before to apply an unknown signal to PMM 9010 receiver, use an
oscilloscope or a wide band RF voltmeter to measure it. In any case set
Min. ATT at 10 dB and select the maximum available attenuation with
preamplifier OFF.
If needed, add an external coaxial attenuator on the input signal line.
In case an OVERLOAD indication occurs it is necessary to add an
external attenuator to carry on the measurement without overpassing
the declared limit for continuous power or spectral density.
6.3.2 Misc
Under the Miscellaneous functions menu it is possible to activate or exclude
the Preselector filters, the Pulse Limiter, and also to set the Tracking
generator.
The Preselector is composed by a group of filters automatically selected by
the PMM 9010 while it is sweeping or anyway measuring. The aim of the
preselector is to reduce the amount of out-of-band energy entering in the
receiver, thus helping a lot in reducing intermodulation problems and similar
undesired behaviors.
It can be set either ON or OFF with the associated button, and normally it
should be always enabled.
On the top left corner of the screen the symbol “Off” or “On” will be displayed.
Manual Mode Operating Instructions
6-3
The Pulse Limiter is a very useful device to protect the input of the
receiver from transient overvoltages. Doing conducted emission tests, quite
often there are conducted disturbances (usually associated to switching
operations in the EUT or along the line under test) which are too high and
that propagates through the LISN up to the receiver. Sometime these
disturbances cannot be seen on the receiver because they are out of
measurement bandwidth, nevertheless the associate energy is high enough
to damage the input attenuator and/or the Analog-to-Digital Converter of the
PMM 9010 (the first mixer in a traditional receiver).
This pulse limiter has an integrated 10dB attenuator and a 30 MHz lowpass filter.
When the Pulse Limiter is selected, on the upper part of the screen the
letters P.L. appear next the value of the Minimum Attenuation and the
reading on the receiver is automatically corrected for the attenuation factor
of the Pulse Limiter.
Pressing the RF OUT button the receiver enters the Tracking generator
menu.
The tracking generator is an internal, high stability and accuracy, 50 Ohm
RF generator ranging from 10 Hz to 50 MHz.
Activating the Tracking On function the generator is always tuned at the
same PMM 9010 measurement frequency and scans the range together
with the receiver. This is the standard way a tracking generator works in all
spectrum analyzers.
If the Tracking On function is disabled, the generator becomes a CW signal
source tuned at the frequency set under the RF OUT Freq window.
As usual, to set a given frequency it is therefore enough to edit the value
with the soft keys and the left an right arrows, confirming the selections
entering the units value (kHz, MHz or GHz).
Pressing 0 as the first figure the decimal dot appears automatically.
In both operating modes (tracking or fixed frequency) the output level can
be set between 60,0 and 90,0 dBµV with 0,1dB steps using the RF OUT
Level button.
If a higher or lower level is needed, the User shall adopt either an external
amplifier or an external attenuator.
The tracking generator is extremely useful for several applications: first of
all it is essential to calibrate the receiver itself thanks to the automatic
internal routines specifically developed to this extent, then it can also be
used to transform the PMM 9010 in a scalar network analyzer, helping a lot
in designing and testing RF filters, active stages and a lot of other circuits.
It is suggested to turn off the Generator to achieve the maximum
sensitivity.
6-4
Manual Mode Operating Instructions
6.4 RBW
The Resolution Bandwidth command is used to select the bandwidth of
the measuring filter. Seven bandwidth filters are available:
• 200 Hz CISPR 16 shaped at -6dB
•
9 kHz CISPR 16 shaped at -6dB
•
3 kHz at -3dB
•
10 kHz at -3dB
•
30 kHz at -3dB
• 100 kHz at -3dB
• 300 kHz at -3dB
The three larger filters are selectable from the first RBW screen, and
pressing the More RBW button it is possible to select all the other filters.
These filters are mathematically modeled using FIR (Finite Impulse
Response) technique and they are exactly as required by the standards.
More filters will be available as an option for specific applications, e.g. to
cover Military Standards requirements, etc.
With the Auto Cispr function, the filter will be automatically selected,
according to CISPR standard, depending on the tuned frequency.
When a non-CISPR filter is selected, the Quasi Peak detector is disabled.
6.5 Hold Time
The Hold Time (expressed in milliseconds) represents the time the receiver
uses to “take a snapshot” of the incoming signal and to measure it with the
chosen detector. When selecting a detector, the default hold time value is
automatically loaded, but in some cases this time is not appropriate, e.g.
when the interference signals have a low repetition rate. In this case the
PMM 9010 sees a high input signal and therefore tries to set the proper
attenuation automatically increasing the value or the input attenuators.
However, when the input attenuation is set the signal is gone, so the
receiver lowers the attenuation, but then a new peak arrives, and so on and
so forth..
On the other hand, if the Hold Time is too high the PMM 9010 cannot
properly follow the signals.
In this situation the Hold Time value should be manually set to find a
correct compromise.
To set the Hold Time to the lowest possible value (this value dynamically
depends from the measurement conditions), enter the figure 0; if a value
lower than the allowed is entered, the lowest possible value is automatically
selected.
The max. Hold Time that can be set is 30 sec (30.000 ms).
6.6 Demodulator
Switching ON the built-in AM demodulator, the volume can be adjusted with
the rotating knob, and the level is shown by the black bar on the screen.
The demodulated signals can be heard with headphones or earphones
connected to the front panel of the PMM 9010, or amplified and/or recorded
by any suitable device.
An FM demodulator – or other demodulators - is not available for the time
being in the frequency band covered by the PMM 9010.
Insert the headphones jack connector only before switching on the
Demodulator or when the receiver power is off.
Manual Mode Operating Instructions
6-5
This page has been left blank intentionally
6-6
Manual Mode Operating Instructions
7 – Applications
7.1 Measuring the
EMI Voltage
ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI) voltage measurements on power supply
lines or on signal lines are carried out by means of "Coupling Networks"
(e.g. LISNs) or other transducers (e.g. antennas, voltage probes). The
frequency range is dictated by the applicable standard, however it is
generally limited from 9 kHz to 30 MHz in commercial applications, while for
measurements on other equipment/accessories - e.g. military, automotive,
information technology and communication equipment (ITE), ISDN devices,
etc. - the frequency range extends down to 20 Hz and up to 200 MHz,
depending the relevant standards.
Nevertheless, the most common tests in the frequency range covered by
PMM 9010 are certainly the conducted measurements done with the help
of a LISN.
7.1.1 Measuring Principle In the case of a system with two floating conductors, the EMI voltages of
the two conductors relative to each other and with reference to the ground
with a LISN
form a vector system where three kind of RFI voltages are present
(sometime EMI is also referred as RFI: Radio Frequency Interference).
They are:
• Symmetrical (or differential mode) voltages. These RFI components are
measured between the two conductors. They behave like the wanted
signal on the forward and return lines.
• Asymmetrical (or common mode) voltages. These EMI components are
measured between the electrical midpoint of the two conductor voltages
and reference ground. Usually these are the components most likely to
cause interference effects.
• Unsymmetrical voltages. These RFI components are measured from
each line conductor and the reference ground. They consist of
symmetrical and asymmetrical components. The measurement of these
RFI voltages is the easiest to do and the most commonly performed.
Indeed, for practical reasons, Standards mostly specify the measurements
of unsymmetrical voltages instead of the theoretically more meaningful
common mode EMI, but the standard doesn’t necessarily reflect the real life
exactly as it is: it shall be a common practice reference aiming to create a
database of fully comparable results.
See figure 7-1 for a graphic explanations of these differences between the
EMI voltages.
Some Regulations require both measurement of symmetrical and
asymmetrical RFI voltages, also defining separate and different limits for
them.
7.1.2 Coupling Networks
Coupling Networks are electrical interfaces which allow to “transfer” the
quantity to be measured (e.g. EMI voltages or currents) from the lines
under test to the receiver.
Some types of Coupling Networks are: AMN (Artificial Mains Network), also
known as "LISN" (Line Impedance Stabilization Network), Current Probe
and Voltage Probe. Again, Fig. 7-1 also shows the AMN principle.
Document 9010EN-31229-2.46 - © NARDA 2013
Applications
7-1
V-LISN
mains
mains
DUT
lowpass
filter
250µH
2µ F
L1
V-LISN (only one
line is shown)
test
receiver
50Ω
8µF
5Ω
highpass
filter
test
receiver
50µ H 0.25µ F
DUT
Vsym
RF load to
interference
Vsym
Z sym
L1
L2
Zasym
L1
L2
Vasym
Vunsym
Vunsym
a)
Vunsym
Vunsym
b)
Fig. 7-1 AMN Principle: a) ∆-type or T-type LISN ; b) V-type LISN
7.1.2.1 AMN
AMNs are usually classified depending their configuration: V-type
Networks, ∆-type Networks, T-type Networks.
• The V-type Network is used for measuring the unsymmetrical RFI
voltage on AC and DC supply line. Standard impedances specified by
CISPR and other international standards are 50Ω // 50 µH+5Ω and 50Ω
// 5 µH+1Ω.
• The ∆-type Network is used for measuring the symmetrical RFI voltage
on balanced telecommunication lines. It is generally designed to permit
switchover between symmetrical and asymmetrical RFI measurements.
Its use is limited; Standards usually specify the T-type Network instead.
The most common impedance for ∆-type Network is 150Ω.
• The T-type Network is used for measuring the asymmetrical RFI voltage
on balanced (electrically symmetrical) audio frequency, control and data
lines. Standard impedance is 150Ω as well.
An Artificial Mains Network shall be designed in order to:
1. terminate each line (power, signal, etc.) of the EUT (Equipment Under
Test) with a standardized impedance;
2. permit the feeding of the EUT with the proper supply voltage and current
or with the signal and data required for operations;
3. isolate the side of the test circuit where EMI voltages are measured
against interference coming from mains network or from the auxiliary
equipment supplying the EUT with the required data;
4. provide a suitable test point – to be connected to the test receiver - to
pick up the RFI voltages from the conductor under test;
5. ensure that the impedance of the source (power, signal) is not varied in
a significant way, otherwise EUT response to the interference may
change.
7-2
Applications
7.1.2.2 Current Probe
Current Probes may be Clamp-on Probes or Fixed-ring Probes.
Current Probes are used to measure differential or common mode RFI
currents. In some cases it may be important to make a distinction between
the two kinds of current flowing in a system.
RFI current measurements with Current Probes may be required, for
example, when measuring EMI from shielded lines or from complex wiring
systems, when finding interference sources among other sources in a
system, when performing compliance to some Standards, etc.
7.1.2.3 Voltage Probe
Voltage Probes include Active Probes and Passive Probes.
Active Probe has a very high input impedance Zin > 100 KΩ // < 10 pF.
Passive Probe has a standard impedance Zin = 1,5 KΩ // < 10 pF.
Voltage Probe is used for measuring the unsymmetrical RFI voltage when it
is not possible to carry out measurement by interconnecting an Artificial Vtype Network. Such situation may occur, for example, when measuring on
lines on which only small loads are permissible (control and signal lines),
when measuring on a EUT (Equipment Under Test) which would not
operate correctly using V-type LISN or a DUT (Device Under Test)
requiring very high power supply current for which no V-type LISN is
available.
For diagnostic or design purposes on high impedance circuits, Voltage
Probe may be used to determine, for example, noisy components or
conductors that cause interference on CMOS PC boards.
Some Regulations give statements when Voltage Probe are to be used and
specify relevant setup and RFI voltage limits.
Fig. 7-2 Example of Test Setup for RFI Voltage Measurement
Applications
7-3
7.1.3 Test Setup
Fig. 7-2. shows an example of test setup for RFI voltage measurement.
The DUT is placed 0,4 m from an horizontal or vertical earthed conducting
surface of at least 2 m x 2 m in size.
A table top DUT is placed 0,8 m from the LISN and at least 0,8 m from any
other earthed conducting surface. If the measurements are made in a
shielded room, the DUT shall be placed 0,4 m from one of the walls of the
room.
The LISN shall be bonded to the reference conducting surface.
A Floor standing DUT is placed 0,1 m above an horizontal earthed
conducting surface of at least 2 m x 2 m in size. This size shall be
exceeding by at least 0,5 m the projection of the DUT on the conducting
surface. The power cable should be 1m long; longer cable should be
centrally bundled for at least 40 cm.
DUTs without a PE (Protective Earth) conductor and manually operated
DUTs shall be measured in conjunction with an auxiliary screen or an
“Artificial Hand”, as duly specified in the relevant standards.
All the details and information on the test setup are written on the latest
version of the applicable Standard.
7.1.4 Guidance on a
preliminary
Measuring
Procedure
7-4
A step-by-step example of a conducted test manually performed is the
following:
1. Switch ON the PMM 9010 and enter in Sweep Mode pressing the
relevant button;
2. Select Display and then 120dB; Reference Level should be between
110 and 135 dBµV; press Esc;
3. Touch the Measure key, then Freq and A+B Band;
4. Then Level, Input and set the Minimum Attenuation to 10 dB and the
Attenuation is automatic; press Esc;
5. Select Misc, Presel and Pulse Limiter to enable the preselction and
the protection of the input from voltage spikes; press Esc;
6. Enter in the Detector menu and select Peak; press Esc two times;
7. Connect a LISN or any other suitable transducer to the RF input,
selecting the proper phase/line whenever applicable;
8. With the EUT switched OFF touch Exec Sweep and wait until the first
scan has been finished;
9. Carry out an overview of the whole spectrum and check the by
executing a pre-measurement with peak detector that the ambient RF
disturbances are at least 20 dB below the desired emission levels;
10. If the ambient noises are low enough continue to the next step,
otherwise take all the necessary steps to reduce the ambient
disturbances (e.g. go to a shielded room, etc.);
11. Switch ON the EUT and then Measure, Exec Sweep again and wait
until the scan has been finished;
12. Enter in the Display menu and adjust the Dynamic Range and the
Reference Level to the most convenient visualization;
13. If the results are satisfactory select Marker, Peak and then either
Analyzer or Tune to enter respectively in Spectrum Mode or in Manual
Mode and deeply investigate the highest signals;
14. If the results of the scan need to be refined, select a Limit, if
appropriate, and then Measure, Level and Smart Detector (if a limit
has been loaded);
15. In the Smart Detector menu check the best combination among those
listed; enter a Margin, if needed; press Esc;
16. Exec Sweep again and repeat from step #12.
Applications
7.1.5 Remarks and Hints
for Measuring
To avoid errors caused by ambient interference, measurements should be
carried out inside a properly shielded room. Different sites, like basements
or other rooms with low ambient interferences, are often sufficient for a
preliminary evaluation.
Conducted measurements do not strictly require any anechoic
environment, while radiated tests may need it if so specified by the relevant
standard.
Using the PMM 9010 SW Utility running on an external PC it is possible to
make automatic measurements and to automatically select LISNs lines
(with a PMM LISN), etc.
Applications
7-5
This page has been left blank intentionally
7-6
Applications
8 – Updating firmware and
Activation code Utility
8.1 Introduction
The PMM 9010 features a simple and user-friendly method for updating its
internal firmware through a Personal Computer (PC).
The “WrDongle” embedded in the FW Upgrade Tool is used for the
Options activation procedure.
This section provides all the information required for easy updating.
8.2 System requirements The minimum requirements to allow the software to operate properly are
the following:
• 486 Processor or Pentium
• 16 Mb of RAM
• at least 10 Mb of free space on hard disk
• 1 free Serial Port (RS-232), or, alternatively, a USB/RS-232 Adapter
with related driver
• Windows Operating System 95/98/2000/XP/Vista/Win7
The User must have administrator privileges to install the software in
Windows 7; right click on the program .exe file and click on “Run as
administrator” to temporarily run the program or application as an
administrator until close it (Windows 7 also allows to mark an
application so that it always runs with administrator rights).
8.3 Preparing the
Hardware
Turn off the PMM 9010 and connect the RS-232 cable supplied with the
apparatus directly or through a USB/RS-232 Adapter separately purchased
(once related driver has been properly installed), to the 9 pin socket
situated on the back panel of PMM 9010 on one side and to a free RS232
port (or USB in case of Adapter’s use) on the PC side.
The first free RS-232 port will be automatically detected by the Firmware
Update Program during installation. In case of troubles please check port
assignments on the PC through the Control Panel utility.
8.4 Software
Installation
The Update Firmware and 9010 WrDongle executable programs are
provided together with the 9010 Software Utility, burned on a CD-ROM and
included in PMM 9010 Receiver package; anyway it’s always possible to
check for newer releases and download them from official NARDA Italy
Web Site Support page.
Once the 9010SeriesUp Setup has been installed in the PC, another item
is created in the Programs list at Start Menu, which is “PMM Emission
Suite”, from where the “9010SeriesUp” and “WrDongle” programs can be
easily run.
Document 9010EN-31229-2.46 - © NARDA 2013
Updating Firmware
8-1
Click on “9010SeriesUp” (9010SeriesUp.exe) once for running the update
program, so getting the following window:
Two firmware components can be updated by this application: Firmware,
which is the receiver internal program, and FPGA, to update the internal
programmable logic.
The 9010FW.bin file required for Firmware updating and the PPI_ramp.bin
file for FPGA are automatically stored in the same directory of the
9010SeriesUp.exe, otherwise just copy them there before performing the
upgrade.
Be sure batteries of PMM 9010 and connected Laptop (PC) are fully
charged before performing the FW Upgrade, otherwise the upgrade
progress could not terminate properly.
Alternatively, be sure to have both PMM 9010 and Laptop (PC) powered
through their respective AC/DC power adapters.
Anyway, even in case of failure, the internal BIOS will never be
corrupted and you’ll just need to repeat the procedure once more (this
is a unique feature!).
Should FW Upgrade procedure stop before reaching the 100%
completion that will have not to be considered a trouble but simply an
intermediate step: in this case please switch OFF and ON the receiver
and repeat the FW Upgrade procedure once more until the end.
Always cycle power OFF and ON again after every FW Upgrade.
Choose the COM port pressing the Up or the Down arrows.
Move the cursor to the COM port number and select the left mouse button to
highlight the box.
Press RS232 button or Enter key to set the com port.
8-2
Updating Firmware
The program will display the following window:
8.5 To transfer data
To start the process simply switch PMM 9010 on, select Update Firmware
or Update FPGA button, and wait until the automatic transfer is completed.
During the firmware storing procedure, a blue bar will progress from left to
right in the window of the PC, showing percentage of downloading time by
time until 100%.
Updating Firmware
8-3
In the meanwhile on the 9010 display the BIOS page appears, showing
again the updating status.
When FW download finishes, following message appears to show that
everything was properly completed:
In case of failure, an error message is showed instead.
After Firmware Update is successfully completed, switch OFF and then ON
again the PMM 9010, looking at screen, and then perform Auto-calibration.
Now at the top of the display a different FW Release Number and Date is
showed after “9010-BIOS-…”, as per the following:
In case the release should not comply with what expected, just check about
the FW file used during installation or get in contact with the nearest
NARDA Local Distributor.
It is now possible to disconnect the cable connected to the PC, with the
PMM 9010 receiver either switched On or Off.
To obtain up-to-date Firmware or PC Utility for PMM 9010, the user
can contact his NARDA distributor or download it directly from
Support area of EMC Product Range on the following Web Site:
www.narda-sts.it.
After having upgraded the internal firmware of the unit it is suggested
to perform the Auto-calibration procedure as described in chapter 3.3.
8-4
Updating Firmware
8.6 9010 WrDongle
utility
The WrDongle utility allows to enable the function ordered such Options
using the 40 Digit Activation Code received from NARDA Italy.
Turn on the PMM 9010 and connect it to a free USB or RS232 port of the
PC.
Browse for All Programs from the Start Menu and reach the “WrDongle”
executable link:
Main window displayed after the program WrDongle has been run:
Select USB or RS232 communication port.
In case of RS232 communication, choose the COM port pressing the Up or
the Down arrows.
Move the cursor to the COM port number and select the left mouse button to
highlight the box.
Press RS232 button to set the com port.
Updating Firmware
8-5
The program will display the following window:
Copy and paste the 40 Digit Activation Code to the “Dongle Code” input
field and press the button below related to the specific Option:
In case of failure, an error message is showed instead.
Always cycle OFF and ON the receiver to properly initialize the function.
For further information on activation procedure refer to the “Click Mode
Operating Instructions”, “RMS-AVG and C-AVG Detectors”, and
“Additional RBW Filters” chapter.
With the “Write 03P to 30P Dongle” button the 9010/03P can be
upgraded to 9010/30P version for use up to 3 GHz; It is a payment
special function implemented in the receiver. Please contact your local
Narda distributor for details.
8-6
Updating Firmware
9 – PMM 9010/03P EMI CISPR Receiver
10 Hz ÷ 30 MHz Full Compliance
> 30 MHz Compliance (PRF ≥ 10Hz)
PMM 9010/30P EMI CISPR Receiver
10 Hz ÷ 30 MHz Full Compliance
30 MHz ÷ 3 GHz Pre Compliance
PMM 9010/60P EMI CISPR Receiver
10 Hz ÷ 30 MHz Full Compliance
30 MHz ÷ 6 GHz Pre Compliance
General Information
Document 9010EN-31229-2.46 - © NARDA 2013
General Information
9-1
9.1 Documentation
Enclosed with this manual are:
• a service questionnaire to send back to NARDA in case an equipment
service is needed
• an accessories checklist to verify all accessories enclosed in the
packaging.
9.2 Operating
Manual Changes
Instruments manufactured after the printing of this manual may have a
serial number prefix not listed on the title page; this indicates that
instruments with different Serial Number prefix may be different from those
documented in this manual.
9-2
General Information
9.3 Introduction to
PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P
PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P is an EMI receiver to measure conducted and
radiated interferences from 10 Hz to 300 MHz (9010/03P), from 10 Hz to 3
GHz (9010/30P) and from 10 Hz to 6 GHz (9010/60P).
The 9010/03P is Full Compliance up to 30 MHz (A and B band) and
Compliance 30 MHz up to 300 MHz (C band, PRF ≥ 10Hz).
The 9010/03P can be upgraded to 9010/30P version for use up to 3
GHz; It is a payment special function implemented in the receiver.
Please contact your local Narda distributor for details.
The 9010/30P is Full Compliance up to 30 MHz (A and B band) and PreCompliance 30 MHz up to 3 GHz (CDE bands).
General Information
9-3
The 9010/60P is Full Compliance up to 30 MHz (A and B band) and PreCompliance 30 MHz up to 6 GHz (CDE bands).
For what is concerning the use in full compliance A and B bands refer
to the PMM 9010.
Refer to the PMM 9030/9060/9180 chapter for the main functions are
included in Radiated emission measurements.
All measurements performed by the PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P are according
to the most accepted standards like: IEC, CISPR, EN (EuroNorm), FCC,
VDE, ….
Thanks to its built-in tracking generator up to 30MHz the PMM
9010/03P/30P/60P is also suitable for designing, characterizing and testing
RF filters, transducers and other components.
The PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P has been designed adopting an innovative
philosophy made possible only in the recent years by the availability of
superior technology components. This equipment is fully digital but the
input preselector and attenuator – and, of course, the output stage of the
internal reference tracking generator - and therefore combines into a pure
EMI Receiver and Signal Analyzer the precision and accuracy of a numeric
approach, with flexibility and user friendly approach typical of a modern
instrument.
9.4 Instrument Items
PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P includes the following items:
• PMM EMI Receiver;
• External power supply/battery charger;
• Flexible black cover/accessories holding;
• BNC-BNC coaxial cable 2m length;
• N male to BNC fem. Adapter
• RS232 cable, 2m;
• USB cable, 2m;
• Operating manual;
• PMM 9010 Utility Software on CD;
• Certificate of Compliance;
• Return for Repair Form.
9.5 Optional
accessories
• BP-01 Li-ion battery pack;
• Same optional accessories of 9010 unit (See par. 1.5)
9.6 Other accessories
• Same other accessories of 9010 unit (See par. 1.6)
9-4
General Information
9.7 PMM 9010/03P
Main Specifications
Table 9-1 lists the PMM 9010/03P performance specifications.
The following conditions apply to all specifications:
• The ambient temperature shall be 0°C to 40°C
For what is concerning the specifications of the A and B bands
section refer to the specification of the 9010 in the chapter 1.
TABLE 9-1 Main Specifications for C bands
Frequency range
Resolution
Frequency accuracy
30 MHz to 300 MHz
100 Hz
< 2 ppm
RF input
Z in 50 Ω, N fem.
VSWR
10 dB RF att.
0 dB RF att.
< 1.2
< 1.2
Attenuator
0 dB to 50 dB (2dB steps)
Max input level
(without equipment damage)
Sinewave AC voltage
Pulse spectral density
137 dBµV (1 W)
97 dBµV/MHz
PRF (CISPR 16-1-1)
≥ 10Hz
IF bandwidth
Standard 6 dB
CISPR 16-1-1 bandwidth (6 dB)
MIL-STD-461 (option)
3, 10, 30, 100, 300 kHz, 1 MHz
120 kHz
100 kHz, 1 MHz
Noise level
30 to 300 MHz < 8 dBµV (QP)
(120 kHz RBW) < 4 dBµV (AV)
Spurious response
< 15 dBµV
Measurement accuracy
S/N > 20 dB
± 1,0 dB
Operating temperature
0° to 40°C
Power supply
10 - 15 Volt DC, 2,5A; Optional Li-Ion interchangeable
battery (8 h operations, typical)
Dimensions
235 x 105 x 335 mm
Weight
4.1 kg
General Information
9-5
9.8 PMM 9010/03P
Front Panel
Fig. 9-1 Front Panel
Legend from left to right:
- USB
USB 2.0 connection port (future implementation only)
- PW
Power led
Indicates the power status
-
Earphone connector
To listen to the demodulated signals
- DISPLAY
Main display
To graphically show the instrument status
- User keys
5 command keys
To select the various available functions
- Controls
Rotary Knob, Left and Right (decrease / increase) Arrow Keys; Esc; Enter/Switch Key
The Rotary Knob and the Arrows Keys can be used to increase and decrease the
setting values; the Esc key allows to return to the previous status/display;
the Enter/switch key is used to confirm a set value and to switch On and Off
the equipment
- Input connectors
Input from 10 Hz ÷ 30 MHz (BNC connector)
Input > 30 MHz (N connector)
- “RF Input 50Ω 10 Hz ÷ 30 MHz” Led
Indicates when the Receiver Input is active
- “RF Input 50Ω > 30 MHz” led
Indicates when the Receiver Input is active
9-6
General Information
9.9 PMM 9010/03P
Rear Panel
PS1
PS2
Fig. 9-2 Rear Panel
Legend from left to right:
- RS232
9 pin, DB9 connector
- USER PORT
User I/O Port
- USB
Fully functional USB 2.0 Port
- LINK1/LINK2
Optical link connectors for PMM equipments (Link 2 for future implementation)
- Power Supply
Power Supply Inputs for use to power the apparatus and simultaneously charge
its battery (PS1) and to simply charge the battery when it’s out of the receiver
(PS2).
- Output connector
Tracking Generator Output
- Fan
Cooling Fan controlled by firmware
- Replaceable Li-Ion Battery (Fig. 9-3) with main Battery Charger connector
- Earth ground connector
- Product Label and Serial Number
Fig. 9-3 BP-01 Replaceable Battery
To upgrade the firmware, install and use the PMM 9010/03P refer to
PMM 9010 section.
General Information
9-7
Table 9-2 lists the PMM 9010/30P performance specifications.
The following conditions apply to all specifications:
• The ambient temperature shall be 0°C to 40°C
9.10 PMM 9010/30P
Main Specifications
For what is concerning the specifications of the full compliance A and
B bands section refer to the specification of the 9010 in the chapter 1.
TABLE 9-2 Main Specifications for CDE bands
Frequency range
Resolution
Frequency accuracy
30 MHz to 3 GHz
100 Hz
< 2 ppm
RF input
Z in 50 Ω, N fem.
VSWR
10 dB RF att.
0 dB RF att.
< 1.2, <2.0 over 1 GHz
< 1.2, <2.0 over 1 GHz
Attenuator
0 dB to 50 dB (2dB steps)
Max input level
(without equipment damage)
Sinewave AC voltage
Pulse spectral density
137 dBµV (1 W)
97 dBµV/MHz
PRF (CISPR 16-1-1)
≥ 10Hz
IF bandwidth
Standard 6 dB
CISPR 16-1-1 bandwidth (6 dB)
MIL-STD-461 (option)
3, 10, 30, 100, 300 kHz, 1 MHz
120 kHz
100 kHz, 1 MHz
Noise level
30 MHz to 3 GHz < 8 dBµV (QP)
(120 kHz RBW) < 4 dBµV (AV)
Spurious response
< 15 dBµV
Measurement accuracy
(S/N > 20 dB)
30 MHz to 1 GHz ± 1,0 dB
1 GHz to 3 GHz ± 1,5 dB
Operating temperature
0° to 40°C
Power supply
10 - 15 Volt DC, 2,5A; Optional Li-Ion interchangeable
battery (8 h operations, typical)
Dimensions
235 x 105 x 335 mm
Weight
4.1 kg
9-8
General Information
9.11 PMM 9010/30P
Front Panel
Fig. 9-4 Front Panel
Legend from left to right:
- USB
USB 2.0 connection port (future implementation only)
- PW
Power led
Indicates the power status
-
Earphone connector
To listen to the demodulated signals
- DISPLAY
Main display
To graphically show the instrument status
- User keys
5 command keys
To select the various available functions
- Controls
Rotary Knob, Left and Right (decrease / increase) Arrow Keys; Esc; Enter/Switch Key
The Rotary Knob and the Arrows Keys can be used to increase and decrease the
setting values; the Esc key allows to return to the previous status/display;
the Enter/switch key is used to confirm a set value and to switch On and Off
the equipment
- Input connectors
Input from 10 Hz ÷ 30 MHz (BNC connector)
Input from 30 MHz ÷ 3 GHz (N connector)
- “RF Input 50Ω 10 Hz ÷ 30 MHz” Led
Indicates when the Receiver Input is active
- “RF Input 50Ω 30 MHz ÷ 3 GHz” led
Indicates when the Receiver Input is active
General Information
9-9
9.12 PMM 9010/30P
Rear Panel
PS1
PS2
Fig. 9-5 Rear Panel
Legend from left to right:
- RS232
9 pin, DB9 connector
- USER PORT
User I/O Port
- USB
Fully functional USB 2.0 Port
- LINK1/LINK2
Optical link connectors for PMM equipments (Link 2 for future implementation)
- Power Supply
Power Supply Inputs for use to power the apparatus and simultaneously charge
its battery (PS1) and to simply charge the battery when it’s out of the receiver
(PS2).
- Output connector
Tracking Generator Output
- Fan
Cooling Fan controlled by firmware
- Replaceable Li-Ion Battery (Fig. 9-6) with main Battery Charger connector
- Earth ground connector
- Product Label and Serial Number
Fig. 9-6 BP-01 Replaceable Battery
To upgrade the firmware, install and use the PMM 9010/30P refer to
PMM 9010 section.
9-10
General Information
Table 9-3 lists the PMM 9010/60P performance specifications.
The following conditions apply to all specifications:
• The ambient temperature shall be 0°C to 40°C
9.13 PMM 9010/60P
Main Specifications
For what is concerning the specifications of the full compliance A and
B bands section refer to the specification of the 9010 in the chapter 1.
TABLE 9-3 Main Specifications for CDE bands
Frequency range
Resolution
Frequency accuracy
30 MHz to 6 GHz
100 Hz
< 2 ppm
RF input
Z in 50 Ω, N fem.
VSWR
10 dB RF att.
0 dB RF att.
< 1.2, <2.0 over 1 GHz
< 2.0, <3.0 over 3 GHz
Attenuator
0 dB to 55 dB (5dB steps)
Max input level
(without equipment damage)
Sinewave AC voltage
Pulse spectral density
137 dBµV (1 W)
97 dBµV/MHz
PRF (CISPR 16-1-1)
≥ 10Hz
IF bandwidth
Standard 6 dB
CISPR 16-1-1 bandwidth (6 dB)
MIL-STD-461 (option)
3, 10, 30, 100, 300 kHz, 1 MHz
120 kHz
100 kHz, 1 MHz
Noise level
30 to 300 MHz
(120 kHz BW)
< 10 dBuV (QP)
< 7 dBuV (AV)
300 to 3000 MHz < 13 dBuV (QP)
(120 kHz BW)
< 7 dBuV (AV)
3000 to 6000 MHz < 15 dBuV (QP)
(120 kHz BW)
< 10 dBuV (AV)
Spurious response
Measurement accuracy
(S/N > 20 dB)
< 10 dBµV,
< 15 dBµV over 2 GHz
30 MHz to 1 GHz ± 1,0 dB
1 GHz to 3 GHz ± 1,5 dB
3 GHz to 6 GHz ± 2,0 dB
Operating temperature
0° to 40°C
Power supply
10 - 15 Volt DC, 2,5A; Optional Li-Ion interchangeable
battery (8 h operations, typical)
Dimensions
235 x 105 x 335 mm
Weight
4.1 kg
General Information
9-11
9.14 PMM 9010/60P
Front Panel
Fig. 9-7 Front Panel
Legend from left to right:
- USB
USB 2.0 connection port (future implementation only)
- PW
Power led
Indicates the power status
-
Earphone connector
To listen to the demodulated signals
- DISPLAY
Main display
To graphically show the instrument status
- User keys
5 command keys
To select the various available functions
- Controls
Rotary Knob, Left and Right (decrease / increase) Arrow Keys; Esc; Enter/Switch Key
The Rotary Knob and the Arrows Keys can be used to increase and decrease the
setting values; the Esc key allows to return to the previous status/display;
the Enter/switch key is used to confirm a set value and to switch On and Off
the equipment
- Input connectors
Input from 10 Hz ÷ 30 MHz (BNC connector)
Input from 30 MHz ÷ 6 GHz (N connector)
- “RF Input 50Ω 10 Hz ÷ 30 MHz” Led
Indicates when the Receiver Input is active
- “RF Input 50Ω 30 MHz ÷ 6 GHz” led
Indicates when the Receiver Input is active
9-12
General Information
9.15 PMM 9010/60P
Rear Panel
PS1
PS2
Fig. 9-8 Rear Panel
Legend from left to right:
- RS232
9 pin, DB9 connector
- USER PORT
User I/O Port
- USB
Fully functional USB 2.0 Port
- LINK1/LINK2
Optical link connectors for PMM equipments (Link 2 for future implementation)
- Power Supply
Power Supply Inputs for use to power the apparatus and simultaneously charge
its battery (PS1) and to simply charge the battery when it’s out of the receiver
(PS2).
- Output connector
Tracking Generator Output
- Fan
Cooling Fan controlled by firmware
- Replaceable Li-Ion Battery (Fig. 9-6) with main Battery Charger connector
- Earth ground connector
- Product Label and Serial Number
Fig. 9-9 BP-01 Replaceable Battery
To upgrade the firmware, install and use the PMM 9010/60P refer to
PMM 9010 section.
General Information
9-13
This page has been left blank intentionally
9-14
General Information
10 - Click Mode Operating Instructions
(Option)
10.1 Introduction
The CLICK mode allows the User to make in a fast, easy and fully
automatic way a difficult test like the Discontinuous Disturbances
measurement, as defined by current CISPR standards.
10.2 Click Mode
Activation
Procedure
To enable the Click mode use the 9010 Set code Utility
For further information on software installation refer to the “Updating
firmware and Activation code Utility” chapter.
Click on “9010 Set code Utility” (WrDongle.EXE) once for running the Set
code program, so getting the following window:
Copy the 40 Digit Serial Code in the Dongle Code Window and select the
Write Click Dongle button.
This message appears when the Dongle code is not valid
Document 9010EN-31229-2.46 - © NARDA 2013
Click Mode Operating Instructions
10-1
It will be shown the following message; press OK to confirm.
The software will inform that the Dongle Code has been successfully
stored. Press Ok to close the program.
10-2
Click Mode Operating Instructions
10.3 Enter in Click Mode
To enter in Click Mode press the key in the main menu, and immediately
the first window opens as follow:
With PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P press the Cond..ed A-B key in the main
menu to enter in the Click Mode
Fig. 10-1 Click
This is the IDLE function which allows a preliminary, free running,
evaluation at the selected frequency and level.
The Click mode function has four commands:
•
•
•
•
Start
Clear: cancel and reset all data to start an idle test;
Report
SETUP
Always use Esc button to return to the previous view/condition.
To increase test productivity the PMM 9010 or PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P
has some very unique features: it allows skipping as many as 2 steps, as it
may predict how many clicks would overcome the Lq limit and may also
advice the User if the next step would fail.
Moreover, it makes a true Qpeak measure and not a mere threshold
comparison, as only a fully digital receiver can detect whether a Qpeak
level came from an unsaturated signal or not: an analogue analyzer only
have the final weighted Qpeak.
Click Mode Operating Instructions
10-3
10.4 Introduction
to the discontinuous
disturbance (click)
measurement
Mechanical or electronic switching procedures - e.g. those due to
thermostats or program controls – may unintentionally generate broadband
discontinuous disturbances with a repetition rate lower than 1 Hz.
Indeed, CISPR 16-2-1 and CISPR 14-1 define a discontinuous disturbance,
also called “click, as a disturbance the amplitude of which exceeds the
quasi-peak limit of continuous disturbance, the duration of which is not
longer than 200 ms and which is separated from a subsequent disturbance
by at least 200 ms. The durations are determined from the signal which
exceeds the IF reference level of the measuring receiver.
A click may also contain a number of impulses; in which case the relevant
time is that from the beginning of the first to the end of the last impulse.
The test procedures and the test setup for click measurement are indicated
in CISPR 16-2-1 and in CISPR 14-1 standards.
It basically consists in the measurement of the number of clicks exceeding
a certain level determined as function of the click number and duration.
The PMM 9010 has a better then 500µs time resolution, as requested by
the standard.
Moreover, several “exceptions” shall be dealt with by the click analyzer in
order to make the test as per the standard.
To better understand the click measurement process – automatically made
by PMM 9010 - it could be useful also to know few more definitions:
• switching operation: one opening or closing of a switch or contact;
• minimum observation time T: the minimum time necessary when
counting clicks (or switching operations) to provide firm evidence
for the statistical interpretation of the number of click (or switching
operations) per time unit;
• click rate N: number of clicks or switching operations within one
minute (this figure is being used to determine the click limit);
• Click limit Lq: the relevant limit L for continuous disturbance for the
measurement with the quasi-peak detector, increased by a certain
value (offset) determined from the click rate N. The click limit
applies to the disturbance assessed according to the upper quartile
method;
• Upper quartile method: a quarter of the number of the clicks
registered during the observation time T is allowed to exceed the
click limit Lq. In the case of switching operations a quarter of the
number of switching operations registered during the observation
time T is allowed to produce clicks exceeding the click limit Lq.
• short click 1: a disturbance not longer than 10 ms;
• short click 2 (E3): a disturbance between 10 ms and 20 ms;
• click: a disturbance longer than 10 ms and not longer than 200 ms;
• other than click: a discontinuous disturbance longer than 200 ms.
With reference to the mentioned standards, a schematic process flow of
the measurement is the following:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Determination of the click rate N
Pass/fail decision if instantaneous switching and if N>=30
Check conformity to definitions
Apply Exceptions (whenever applicable)
Calculate Limit Quartile
Measurement using Upper Quartile Method
Pass/fail using Upper Quartile criterion
Repeat for next frequency
As PMM 9010 manages all these steps in a completely automatic way, a
detailed step by step description is here given before to describe each
command and function.
10-4
Click Mode Operating Instructions
10.4.1 Determination of
the click rate
The first step of the measuring process is to determine the click rate N in
the minimum observation time. This is done measuring the time needed to
count up to 40 clicks or 40 switching operations; the maximum time allowed
is anyway 2 hours (120 minutes), unless the cycle is determined by a
program which needs additional time to be terminated.
Therefore, if the equipment has a cycle and in this cycle less than 40 clicks
appear, then the cycle shall be repeated until 40 clicks are counted or until
the observation time is 2 hours.
If the equipment has a cycle and in this cycle more than 40 clicks appear,
the observation time is anyway determined by the cycle.
When the minimum observation time has been defined, it is possible to
calculate the click rate N using the simple relationship:
N=
n1
T
where n 1 is the number of clicks measured and T is the minimum
observation time.
However, in certain conditions – see CISPR 14-1 for further reference – the
click rate N must be calculated using a different approach:
N=
n2 ⋅ f
T
where n 2 is the number of switching operations and f is a factor dictated in
the standard.
The click rate shall be determined at two frequencies: 150 kHz and 500
kHz.
10.4.2 Preliminary
Conformity and
Exceptions
Once the number of clicks – or switching operations – has been
determined, then some preliminary controls can be made to verify if the rate
is greater than 30 (fail conditions); if the measured clicks are conforming to
the definition of the standard; if there are exceptions applicable.
Thanks to its digital architecture, PMM 9010 can easily record and store all
the relevant parameters, keeping trace of all the events occurring during
the test and allowing the User to postprocess all these data; PMM 9010 will
also notify immediately the test results to the User.
10.4.2.1 Old and New
exceptions
The “Click” test also requires to verify if exceptions E1 to E4 are applicable.
While E1 and E2 are “old” exceptions easy to deal with, the new E3 and, in
particular, E4 are calling for a new hardware structure: an old click analyzer
is no longer compliant.
E3 is an additional counter, does not require additional memory and implies
only minor changes in the test flow, thus can be implemented in a relatively
easy way.
E4 is very demanding in terms of hardware requirements: a memory for
storing each disturbance duration and interval is required in order to postelaborate them, and it is mandatory to provide all the data in the test report.
Moreover, as the application of E4 is conditional to the final click rate N which in turn may prevent using E4 – the test flow significantly changes.
Only new analysers specifically designed – like the PMM 9010 - can
successfully meet the requirements of the standard and be compliant with
the new Click test criteria.
Click Mode Operating Instructions
10-5
10.4.3 Calculate Limit
Quartile
When the click rate N is determined it is possible to calculate the click limit
Lq by increasing the relevant limit (quasi-peak) L for continuous
disturbances with:
●
●
44 dB for N<0,2, or
20 log (30/N) dB for 0,2<N<30
Therefore
Lq = L + 20 ⋅ Log
30
N
10.4.4 Measurement vs.
Lq limit
Now the test can be done at the 4 fixed frequencies dictated by the
standard: 150 kHz, 500 kHz, 1.4 MHz, 30 MHz, and the results compared
with the limit Lq.
If less than 25% of the clicks measured exceeds the limit Lq, then the test
is positive, otherwise it fails.
The PMM 9010 can now produce an extensive report with all the relevant
data.
10.5 Start
As soon as the Setup has been done (see § 9.5), it is possible to start the
test.
First of all the PMM 9010 will determine the click rate N, and – if all the
conditions apply – after that the analyzer will immediately continue
measuring the number of clicks exceeding the upper quartile limit L q .
Simply select Start: the PMM 9010 will automatically take care of all the
necessary steps, reporting at the end of the test all the relevant results.
During the test, the evolution of the measurements can be continuously
controlled in the Data and Details windows, where all the info are duly
provided.
At any time it is possible to Stop the measure or to Pause it.
The PMM 9010 does the determination of the click rate at the two
frequencies of 150 kHz and 500 kHz, and then it executes the test.
10-6
Click Mode Operating Instructions
In certain conditions the analyzer may judge the input attenuation is not
adequate (for example when the limit is recalculated following up the Lq
value): in that case a screen like the following appears and requires
additional attenuation.
It’s enough to touch OK to adjust the input attenuation to the optimum value
and continue the test.
The total amount of available internal attenuation is 45 dB in Click mode,
because also the pulse limiter 10 dB pad is used.
Please remember that the maximum input signal allowed is 7 V (137
dBµV), and that a click test may result in a potentially dangerous
condition for the input stage of the receiver.
Before to apply an unknown signal to PMM 9010 receiver, use an
oscilloscope or a wide band RF voltmeter to measure it.
If needed, add a coaxial attenuator to the input signal line (a 20dB
external attenuator is always provided with PMM 9010-Click Option).
10.5.1 Stop and Pause
If Stop has been selected during a measurement, the test can then be
aborted or it is possible to go immediately to the next step.
If Paused, the test can be resumed at any convenient time.
Click Mode Operating Instructions
10-7
10.6 Report
After a Click test the PMM 9010 reports all the relevant data.
Due to the complexity of the test and to the various conditions that may
happen during the measurement, several reports may be issued.
Here following some examples well representing the completeness and the
accuracy of the analyzer.
10.6.1 Fail during
determination of
the click rate N
In case a fail is recorded during the determination of the click rate N at the
frequency of 150 kHz, a report like the following is displayed (which is just
an example with a not-realistic N number):
If the fail occurs during the determination of the click rate at 500 kHz, the
report may be like this:
10.6.2 Report after a
successful test with
less than 5
instantaneous
switching at one
frequency
10-8
If the determination of the click rate N shows that at a given frequency (500
kHz in this examples) there are less than 5 instantaneous switching
operations, there is no need of any further test at that frequency or
frequencies (the investigation frequencies are 150 kHz for the interval from
150 to 500 kHz, and 500 kHz for the interval from 500 kHz to 30 MHz).
In the example L q is calculated for 150 kHz and no tests are done at the
other frequencies as the number in instantaneous switching at 500 kHz
during the observation time is less than 5.
Click Mode Operating Instructions
10.6.3 Report after a
successful
test at 4
frequencies
Here following the example of a report for a test done on all the defined
frequencies.
All the relevant information is provided.
10.6.4 Report after a line
search
When connected to a PMM LISN, the PMM 9010 can also automatically
search for the worst line.
After having found the most noisy line, the analyzer start with the normal
test flow (determination of N , etc.) measuring on the worst line.
An example of report when the worst line search has been requested is as
follows:
Click Mode Operating Instructions
10-9
Due to the complexity of the discontinuous disturbance test, this panel is
rather complex, as many parameters shall be defined.
However, the PMM 9010 has been designed to be extremely user-friendly
and to take care in a fully automatic way of all the necessary steps of the
test.
10.7 Setup
Due to the fact that the Standard fixes the frequencies at which the
test shall be done, these frequencies have been uniquely assigned by
factory and the User cannot modify them; nevertheless it is possible
to select an arbitrary Frequency Value for "Idle Mode" instead, useful
for debugging purposes.
From the main window select SETUP and the main Setup panel will be
displayed.
The User can navigate through the different parameters rotating the control
knob.
10.7.1 External
attenuator
In case an external attenuator is used to protect the input of the analyzer,
the value of this attenuator can be entered, in order to have the PMM 9010
taking into account the value in all calculations of measured levels.
The way to enter the value of the attenuator is the same adopted in all the
other modes (see for examples §4.1).
The inserted value will be displayed together with the others automatically
adjusted by the receiver; all such attenuations values will be resumed
between brackets at the top right of the screen, where the External
Attenuator value will appear as the last shown number.
The 1st value between brackets is the one automatically assigned by 9010
receiver according to the selected Limit, in order to guarantee the proper
input sensitivity defined by the Standard.
The 2nd value between brackets is a fixed number instead, depending only
on the attenuation provided by the 4 channels simultaneous click detection,
i.e. two numbers only will appear in the sum between brackets when the
PMM 4-Channels Click Extension Box will not be used.
A 20dB external attenuator is provided in the PMM 9010-Click Option kit,
which has to be taken into account in this field when inserted at RF input.
10-10
Click Mode Operating Instructions
10.7.2 Limit
Three most used limits are built-in into the analyzer: CISPR 14, CISPR22
and CISPR11.
Either one can be selected simply by pressing the relevant key.
The limit will be loaded and all the calculations will be done with reference
to the selected limit:
The Reference Standard for Click tests is always EN 55014-1 (or
equivalent CISPR 14-1), which defines 4 different Limit Curves for Q-Peak
according to Table 1, with following cross-correlation as for names
assigned on 9010 :
014-1 --> Limit in Column 2
014-2 --> Limit in Column 6
014-3 --> Limit in Column 8
014-4 --> Limit in Column 10
Note: Limit in Column 4 of Tab.1 is not used for Click test, as referred
to Load and Auxiliary terminals.
Click Mode Operating Instructions
10-11
10.7.3 Determination of N As required by the standard, N may be determined either by counting the
clicks, or by counting the switching operations.
Select Clicks if N has to be calculated on the number of clicks, or select
Sw.Op.+ or Sw.Op.- to determine N on the number of switching
operations, going up and down the list of the available options in terms of
switched current: 10mA; 20 mA; 50 mA; 100mA; 200mA; 500mA; 1A; 2A
and 5A. The current value must be chosen in relation to the DUT declared
consumption.
Refer to § 9.7 for the connections to the external Switching Box.
10.7.4 Factor f
The applicable standard may require a certain factor f to be used to
calculate the click rate N (see § 9.2.1). For example, table A2 of the
CISPR14 gives the factor f for several products.
This factor depends from the nature of the EUT and shall be entered by the
User in the normal way (see for example §4.1).
10.7.5 Stop on Fail
The Click test my be rather long, as the observation time and EUT cycle
can take as long as 120 minutes.
In order to save time and increase productivity, the PMM 9010 can stop the
test as soon as a fail condition is achieved.
Two options are therefore available: stop immediately as the fail condition
occurs (Right away) or anyway at the End of Step.
Press Change to flip from one to the other option.
10-12
Click Mode Operating Instructions
10.7.6 Terminate on
To define the automatic stop condition, it is possible to select between two
options: 40 Clicks/Time and Time/Manually.
In the first case the stop of the step happens either after 40 clicks or after
the defined time has elapsed; in the second case the step is not terminated
when reaching 40 clicks (allowing thus testing EUTs which are commanded
by a program) but only when the defined time has elapsed. It is always
possible to stop the step, and even the test manually.
Press Change to flip from one to the other option.
10.7.7 Line
When using a PMM LISN, it’s possible to select the Line on which to
perform the test through the Setup Menu, just selecting “LINE” and
accessing the related sub-menu, as per the following:
In case a 3rd party LISN would be used, just leave “NONE” in the menu.
Click Mode Operating Instructions
10-13
Once the PMM LISN sub-menu has been selected, a choice is available to
define if to run the test on a specific Line (L1, L2, L3, N)
or to perform the test automatically on each test frequency, one Line after
the other, in order to find the worst of them in terms of Emission
and finally execute the complete test on that specific Line only, so
dramatically reducing time consumption.
10-14
Click Mode Operating Instructions
10.7.8 Max Time
To define the duration of the test it’s enough to enter the relevant time in
minutes in the usual way.
10.7.9 Idle Frequency
A frequency (0,15 – 0,5 – 1,4 – 30 MHz) can be selected for preliminary
investigation in Idle Mode.
10.7.10 Idle Level
An arbitrary Level for the Emission Limit can be chosen in Idle Mode, just to
apply a certain tolerance in the debugging phase with respect to the limit
which will be mandatory at the final test stage.
10.7.11 Smart Measure
The “Smart Measure” is a PMM 9010 unique feature which allows a
relevant time saving in Click measuring approach.
It’s usually very difficult to measure QuasiPeak values for pulsed signals, in
a way that linearity of the receiver could normally not fulfill such a special
measurement’s requirement.
PMM 9010 can trace and memorize eventual saturation, instead, just got
during automatic measurement test procedure, in a way that, in case no
saturation conditions at all have been detected, the so got test result can be
used directly to soon calculate the new limit Lq, without the need of
repeating the test for it.
At the end of a Smart Measurement the operator can clearly define if the
test has to be repeated with the new Lq Limit or if not repeating it at all in
case of failure at this first step, so saving time and soon starting with further
debugging of EUT.
The operator can face then 3 different situations:
- “No Smart”, where such a function is not used at all;
- “Ask”, where a saturation is detected and the operator is asked to
decide if continuing anyway or not;
- normal “Smart Measure”, where the measurement is normally
performed until the end, i.e. the new Limit Lq is evaluated and the test
is then performed taking such a new Limit into account.
Click Mode Operating Instructions
10-15
10.8 Click option
The click option includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Switching Operation Box;
Power supply cable for the switching Box;
EUT Power connector;
Rewireable free socket;
User Port cable, 2m;
20 dB external coaxial attenuator;
Activation Code
For quick reference look at the following picture.
10-16
Click Mode Operating Instructions
10.9 Test Set up
As required by the relevant standards, the discontinuous measurement
(Click) test set up shall be the same adopted for continuous disturbances,
therefore usually a LISN is used to sample the RF signal to be measured.
I case the rate N is to be evaluated from the RF signal measurements, it
needs only the connections between the receiver and the LISN (see § 2.11).
When, instead, the click rate N shall be determined counting the number of
“Switching” operations, a proper unit called “Switching Box” shall be
connected to the User Port of the PMM 9010.
In this case the EUT Power Connector will be used to feed the EUT through
the Switching Box and the hardware connection scheme will become then:
User port
User port Input
User port
9010
220V
LISN remote
control
LISN
EUT
10.10 Diagnostic
20dB Attenuator
In case the Switching Box unit is not connected – or anyway non properly
functioning – the following message is displayed:
Three Leds are visible on the Switching Operation Box, with the following
meaning:
TABLE 10-1 LED Status
ERROR
(Red)
DATA
(Yellow)
POWER ON
(Green)
Blinking
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
Blinking
On
On
Condition at Power On, before
attempting any access to the Box
Normal Condition after an access
Normal Usage with data transfer
On
Off
On
Error Condition (general)
Meaning
In case of Error conditions please check both HW connections and SW
settings at first, then call closest NARDA representative for help.
Click Mode Operating Instructions
10-17
This page has been left blank intentionally
10-18
Click Mode Operating Instructions
11 – PMM 9030/9060/9180
EMI CISPR Receiver Extension,
30 MHz - 3/6/18 GHz
(Option)
11.1 Introduction to
PMM 9030/9060/9180
The PMM 9030/9060/9180 is a powerful EMI receiver, fully CISPR 16-1-1,
which extends capabilities of PMM 9010 and 9010/03P/03P/30P/60P to
measure conducted and radiated interferences from 30 MHz up to 3/6/18
GHz. All measurements performed by the PMM 9030/9060/9180 are
according to the most accepted standards like: IEC, CISPR, EN
(EuroNorm), FCC, VDE, ….
The PMM 9030/9060/9180 has been designed adopting an innovative
philosophy made possible only in the recent years by the availability of
superior technology components. This equipment is a combination of digital
and analogue circuitries to realize a true EMI receiver and signal analyzer
with the precision and accuracy of a numeric approach added to the
flexibility and easiness of use of a modern instrument.
The PMM 9030/9060/9180 has been conceived as a “smart extension unit”
of the PMM 9010 and PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P, to which the PMM
9030/9060/9180 shall be connected via high speed optic link.
Document 9010EN-31229-2.46 - © NARDA 2013
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11-1
11.2 Instrument Items
PMM 9030/9060/9180 include the following items:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
11.3 Optional PMM
accessories
EMI receiver from 30 MHz up to 3/6/18 GHz;
BP-01 Li-Ion battery pack;
SPA-01 Plug-in AC Supply Adapter;
External power supply/battery charger;
20m Fiber Optic Cable;
Antenna Holding/Support with adapters for various antennas;
N-N adapter
Operating Manual (included in PMM 9010 Manual);
Certificate of Compliance.
PMM 9030/9060/9180 can be used with several optional accessories, the
most common being the following:
• AS-02 : Antenna Set (biconic, log-periodic, tripod, 5 m coaxial cable,
carrying case)
• RF-300 : Van Veen Loop
• SB-600 : Automatic Slide Bar for radiated power tests
11.4 Other accessories
Of course, the PMM 9030/9060/9180 can be used with any other
accessories available on the market, like:
• Antennas and loops, any type;
• Near Field Probes;
• Various TEM and GTEM Cells.
11-2
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11.5 PMM 9030
Main Specifications
Table 11-1 lists the PMM 9030 performance specifications.
The following conditions apply to all specifications:
• thanks to its analogue+digital architecture, the PMM 9030 needs only
15 minutes of warm-up period before to operate in full-compliance with
specifications;.
• the ambient temperature shall be 0°C to 40°C
TABLE 11-1 Main Specifications
Frequency range
Resolution
Frequency Accuracy
30 MHz to 3 GHz (CISPR-16-1-1 Full-Compliance)
100 Hz
< 2 ppm
RF input
Z in 50 Ω, N fem.
VSWR
≥ 10 dB RF att.
0 dB RF att.
< 1,2; <2 over 1 GHz
< 2,0
Attenuator
0 dB to 55 dB (5dB steps)
Preamplifier gain
10 dB (selectable)
Max input level
(without equipment damage)
Sinewave AC voltage Pulse
spectral density
137 dBµV (1 W)
97 dBµV/MHz
Preselector
Three tracking filters;
30,0 MHz
96,6 MHz
311,0 MHz
One highpass filter
> 1 GHz
to
to
to
96,6 MHz
311,0 MHz
1,0 GHz
IF bandwidth
6 dB bandwidth
3, 10, 30, 100, 300 kHz, 1 MHz (Bimp)
CISPR 16-1-1 bandwidth (6 dB)
120 kHz
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11-3
Noise level (preamplifier ON)
30 to 300 MHz (120 kHz BW)
< -1 dBµV (QP); < -5 dBµV (AV)
300 MHz to 3 GHz (120 kHz BW)
< 2 dBµV (QP); < -2 dBµV (AV)
Measuring Detectors
Peak, Quasi-peak, Average, RMS, Smart Detector
Level meas. time
Peak, Quasi-peak, RMS and Average
(simultaneous detectors)
1 ms to 30 sec. (CISPR 16-1-1 default)
Display units
dBm, dBµV (as stand-alone);
dBm, dBµV, dBµV/m, dBmA, dBmA/m, dBpW (through 9010
SW Utility on PC)
Spectrum
Up to 300 MHz
Span/division
Measurement accuracy
S/N > 20 dB
30 to 1000 MHz ± 1,0 dB
1 to 3 GHz ± 1,5 dB
Demodulation
AM demodulator (through PMM 9010 and PMM 9010/03P/
30P/60P)
I/O Interface Out
High Speed Optical Link;
RS232 (service only)
Operating temperature
0° to 40°C
Power supply
10 - 15 Volt DC, 2,5A; Li-Ion interchangeable battery
(4 h operations, average);
Dimensions
235 x 105 x 105 mm
Weight
2,0 kg
11-4
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11.6 PMM 9030 Front and Rear Panel
Fig. 11-1 Front and Rear Panels
Only the input N connector is available on the front panel.
All other interfaces and connections are on the rear panel.
Legend top-down, from left to right on the rear panel:
- Replaceable Li-Ion Battery with Battery Charger connector
- OPTIC LINK
Optical link connector for PMM 9010 or PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P
- RS232
9 pin, DB9 connector
- ON
Power ON-OFF switch button
- PW
Power ON/Communication led (Blinking Red at power-on until communication
with PMM 9010 or PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P is
established, then Fixed Green during
normal communication)
- Product Label and Serial Number
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11-5
11.7 PMM 9060
Main Specifications
Table 11-2 lists the PMM 9060 performance specifications.
The following conditions apply to all specifications:
• thanks to its analogue+digital architecture, the PMM 9060 needs only
15 minutes of warm-up period before to operate in full-compliance with
specifications;.
• the ambient temperature shall be 0°C to 40°C
TABLE 11-2 Main Specifications
Frequency range
Resolution
Frequency Accuracy
30 MHz to 6 GHz (CISPR-16-1-1 Full-Compliance)
100 Hz
< 2 ppm
RF input
Z in 50 Ω, N fem.
VSWR
10 dB RF att.
0 dB RF att.
< 1,2; <2 over 1 GHz;
<2; <3 over 3 GHz
Attenuator
0 dB to 55 dB (5 dB steps)
Preamplifier gain
20 dB; 15dB above 1 GHz
Max input level
(without equipment damage)
Sinewave AC voltage
Pulse spectral density
137 dBµV (1 W)
97 dBµV/MHz
Preselector
Four tracking filters;
30,0 MHz to 72.0 MHz
72.0 MHz to 173,0 MHz
173,0 MHz to 416.0 MHz
416.0 MHz to
1 GHz
Two bandpass filter
1 GHz to 3 GHz
3 GHZ to 6 GHz
IF bandwidth
6 dB bandwidth
3, 10, 30, 100, 300 kHz, 1 MHz (Bimp)
CISPR 16-1-1 bandwidth (6 dB)
120 kHz
11-6
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
Noise level
(preamplifier OFF)
30 to 300 MHz
(120 kHz BW)
< 10 dBuV (QP)
< 7 dBuV (AV)
300 to 3000 MHz < 13 dBuV (QP)
(120 kHz BW)
< 7 dBuV (AV)
3000 to 6000 MHz < 15 dBuV (QP)
(120 kHz BW)
< 10 dBuV (AV)
(preamplifier ON)
30 to 300 MHz
(120 kHz BW)
< - 9 dBuV (AV)
300 to 3000 MHz
(120 kHz BW)
< - 7 dBuV (AV)
3000 to 6000 MHz
(120 kHz BW)
< - 1 dBuV (AV)
Spurious response
< 10 dBuV, < 15 dBuV above 2 GHz,
Measurement accuracy
S/N > 20 dB
30 to 1000 MHz
1 to 3 GHz
3 to 6 GHz
I/O Interface Out
High Speed Optical Link;
RS232 (service only)
Operating temperature
0° to 40°C
Power supply
10 - 15 Volt DC, 2,5A; Li-Ion interchangeable battery
(4 h operations, average)
Dimensions
235 x 105 x 105 mm
Weight
2.2 kg
± 1.0 dB
± 1.5 dB
± 2.0 dB
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11-7
11.8 PMM 9060 Front and Rear Panel
Fig. 11-2 Front and Rear Panels
Only the input N connector is available on the front panel.
All other interfaces and connections are on the rear panel.
Legend top-down, from left to right on the rear panel:
- Replaceable Li-Ion Battery with Battery Charger connector
- OPTIC LINK
Optical link connector for PMM 9010 or PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P
- RS232
9 pin, DB9 connector
- ON
Power ON-OFF switch button
- PW
Power ON/Communication led (Blinking Red at power-on until communication
with PMM 9010 or PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P is
established, then Fixed Green during
normal communication)
- Product Label and Serial Number
11-8
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11.9 PMM 9180
Main Specifications
Table 11-3 lists the PMM 9180 performance specifications.
The following conditions apply to all specifications:
• thanks to its analogue+digital architecture, the PMM 9180 needs only
15 minutes of warm-up period before to operate in full-compliance with
specifications;.
• the ambient temperature shall be 0°C to 40°C
TABLE 11-3 Main Specifications
Frequency range
Resolution
Frequency Accuracy
6 GHz to 18 GHz (CISPR-16-1-1 Full-Compliance)
100 Hz
< 2 ppm
RF input
Z in 50 Ω, N fem.
VSWR
10 dB RF att.
0 dB RF att.
<2
<3
Attenuator
0 dB to 45 dB (5 dB steps)
Preamplifier gain
20 dB
Max input level
(without equipment damage)
Sinewave AC voltage
137 dBµV (1 W)
Preselector
Four bandpass filters
IF bandwidth
6 dB bandwidth
CISPR 16-1-1 bandwidth (6 dB)
6 GHz to 9 GHz
9 GHz to 12 GHz
12 GHz to 15 GHz
15 GHz to 18 GHz
3, 10, 30, 100, 300 kHz
9, 120 kHz – 1 MHz
Noise level
(Preamplifier OFF)
6 to 18 GHz
(1 MHz BW)
< 28 dBuV (P)
< 22 dBuV (AV)
(Preamplifier ON)
6 to 18 GHz
(10 kHz BW)
< -12 dBuV (P)
< -17 dBuV (AV)
Spurious response
< 20 dBuV
Measurement accuracy
S/N > 20 dB
6 to 18 GHz
(typ 26 dBuV)
(typ 20 dBuV)
(typ -14 dBuV)
(typ -19 dBuV)
± 2.0 dB
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11-9
I/O Interface Out
High Speed Optical Link;
RS232 (service only)
Operating temperature
-5° to 45°C
Power supply
10 - 15 Volt DC, 2,5A; Li-Ion interchangeable battery
(4 h operations, average)
Dimensions
235 x 105 x 105 mm
Weight
2.2 kg
11-10
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11.10 PMM 9180 Front and Rear Panel
Fig. 11-3 Front and Rear Panels
Only the input N connector is available on the front panel.
All other interfaces and connections are on the rear panel.
Legend top-down, from left to right on the rear panel:
- Replaceable Li-Ion Battery with Battery Charger connector
- OPTIC LINK
Optical link connector for PMM 9010 or PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P
- RS232
9 pin, DB9 connector
- ON
Power ON-OFF switch button
- PW
Power ON/Communication led (Blinking Red at power-on until communication
with PMM 9010 or PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P is
established, then Fixed Green during
normal communication)
- Product Label and Serial Number
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11-11
The PMM 9030/9060/9180 feature a completely new receivers architecture
based on the most recent DSP technology, as shown on the diagram
below.
The PMM 9030/9060/9180 block diagram is shown in Fig. 11-3
11.11 Functional
Description
Fig. 11-4 PMM 9030/9060/9180 Functional BLOCK Diagram
11.12 No coaxial cable
between the
antenna and the
receiver: a unique
features of the
PMM 9030/9060/9180
11-12
Thanks to its very limited dimensions and lightweight construction, the
PMM 9030/9060/9180 can be connected directly to the antenna using the
supplied antenna support/adapter; the PMM 9030/9060/9180 is then linked
to the PMM 9010 or PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P via the built-in high speed
optical link. This is a very unique feature that makes the dream of all test
engineers come true: no losses or mismatches between the antenna and
the receiver, no more bulky cables full of ferrites, no more additional
uncertainties due to the cables from the antenna to the receiver!
The Optical link, whose transfer rate is more than 2,5 Gb/s, and the
proprietary transfer protocol help to ensure a communication almost error
free and always reliable in all test measurement conditions.
A result of all these innovating features is that the PMM 9030/9060/9180 is
extremely fast and a scan of the complete band up to 3/6/18 GHz can be
performed in just 8 seconds: a terrific productivity increase in any test lab,
in particular because these performances are obtained with no quality or
performance compromises and with reduced uncertainties, compared to a
traditional solution.
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11.13 Emission
measurements
All electric and electronic devices are potential generators of
ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI).
The term EMI thus refers to the electromagnetic energy emitted by a device
which propagates itself along cables or through the air and couples with
other devices that are present in the surroundings.
These electromagnetic fields (conducted or radiated interferences) may
generate interfering currents and voltages into nearby equipment and
therefore can cause possible malfunctions.
In order to prevent and control such interferences there are nowadays a
number of national and international standards, like IEC and CISPR, which
specifies limits and methods of tests. Moreover, within the European Union
the application of several European Norms on Electromagnetic
Compatibility is enforced by law and therefore the commercialization and
use of all the electric and electronic equipment is subject to the
measurement of the EMC characteristics, which must be within well defined
limits.
The design approach adopted for the PMM 9030/9060/9180 is that the
instrument shall be innovative, full compliant with all the relevant standards
and at the same time simple and reliable to use, to be the base building
block for any possible emission system to measure and evaluate any
electric or electronic device from the very first design stages to the final
certification.
The need to precisely measure the conducted and radiated EMI noises
forces the equipment manufactures to use reliable equipment to verify the
limits imposed by the relevant standards and/or enforced by local rules.
In this view the PMM 9030/9060/9180 receiver is the ideal solution from
prototype debugging to final certification, as it fully meets all the
performance criteria dictated by these standards, although it remains small,
lightweight and very easy to use.
The PMM 9010 Utility control software permits an immediate use of the
instrument without any training or special difficulties: the operator can
concentrate just on analyzing the measurement results.
Moreover, the PMM 9010 software has also been designed for a fast and
easy installation on any PC with the Windows operating system and with
at least one free USB or Serial Port.
The device under test (DUT) must be installed according to the procedures
indicated in the constructor’s manual and normal operating conditions
respected.
Be sure not to overload PMM 9030/9060/9180: the input signal should
not exceed the maximum level indicated in the main specifications in
chapter 11.
Also do not apply any signal to the 9010 or 9010/03P/30P/60P input
and generator output connectors.
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11-13
11.14 - Installation
11.14.1 Introduction
This section provides the information needed to install your PMM
9030/9060/9180. It includes the information pertinent to initial inspection
and power requirements, connections, operating environment, instrument
mounting, cleaning, storage and shipment.
11.14.2 Initial Inspection
When receiving the equipment, first inspect the shipping cardbox for any
damages. If the shipping box is damaged, it should be kept until the
contents of the shipment have been checked for completeness and the
instrument has been checked mechanically and electrically.
11.14.2.1 Packing and
Unpacking
Verify the availability of all the shipped items with reference to the shipping
check list enclosed with the Operating Manual. Notify any damage to the
forwarder personnel as well as to your NARDA Representative.
To avoid further damage, do not turn on the instrument when there
are signs of shipping damage to any portion of it.
11.14.3 Preparation for
Use
11.14.4 Battery charger
-
+
This is a Safety Class III apparatus, but it is also equipped with a
protective/functional earth terminal on the rear panel. A good
safety/functional ground connection should be provided before to
operate the receiver.
The battery charger supplied with the receiver can work at either 50 Hz or
60 Hz with a supply voltage rated between 100 and 240 Volt. It is supplied
with different connectors to fit all the possible outlets in accordance with the
various National standards.
Battery charger: DC, 10 - 15 V, ~ 2500 mA
=> DC Connector
To replace the mains connector, simply remove the one installed on the
11.14.4.1 To replace the
mains connector battery charger sliding it off, and insert the one that fits the outlets in use.
of the battery
charger
11.14.4.2 To charge the
internal battery
In order to guarantee the best autonomy of the internal battery, we
recommend to fully recharge it before using the receiver. To charge the
battery, simply connect the battery charger to the mains power socket and
insert the DC output connector of the battery charger to the input
CHARGER on the rear panel of the receiver.
11.14.4.3 To supply the
PMM 9030/9060/9180
through the mains power
socket by SPA-01
To have an unlimited autonomy it is necessary to connect the PMM
9030/9060/9180 directly to the mains power socket using the supplied SPA01 Plug-in AC Supply Adapter.
To install the SPA-01, simply slide BP-01 off and replace it with the SPA01. Connect the battery charger to the mains power socket and insert the
DC output connector of the battery charger to the input 10÷15 Vdc 2.5 A
max on the SPA-01.
11-14
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11.14.4.4 Indication of
the battery
status on
the screen and
with PW led
The charge status of the battery is displayed at the right and on the middle
of the PMM 9010 or PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P screen when initializing the
PMM 9030/9060/9180.
The symbol of a small battery will be filled up proportionally to the status of
the battery charge.
When the battery is not under charge, the actual voltage value is displayed
under the symbol and the length of the black bar filling the symbol indicates
the available autonomy still remaining.
When the battery charger is connected to the PMM 9030/9060/9180 the
indication “PWR” appears just below to the battery icon and the rear panel
PW led becomes yellow if the receiver is switched on and red if the receiver
is off.
The battery charging is suspended or ends automatically when one of the
following events occurs:
- the full capacity of the battery has been achieved,
- the internal temperature of the battery is higher then a preset safety
threshold,
- the charging time limit has been exceeded.
During recharging PMM 9030/9060/9180 should be left switched off.
It is also possible to charge the battery in a stand-alone mode. It’s
enough to connect the battery charger to the BP-01 rear panel
connector and wait for the led located on the front panel to become
green.
During the charging phase the led is red. If the Led is off, or blinks, it
means something is going wrong; if this happens please check the
battery charger, the mains socket and the connections.
The PW led on the back panel blinks green when the battery voltage
drops below 7,0V to warn the Operator that the instrument is running
out of battery.
To prevent any damage to the battery, the PMM 9030/9060/9180
automatically switches off when the battery voltage falls below 6,5V.
In order to keep the batteries fully functional, it is crucial to have a
complete recharge before storing them for periods longer than 4
months. Therefore, it is suggested to recharge the batteries at least
every 4 months even when the receiver has not been used.
The PMM 9010, PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P, and the PMM 9030/9060/9180
have the same model of battery. It means they are perfectly
exchangeable among the equipment. To make an easy example, the
9010 or 9010/03P/30P/60P could be installed in an instrument/control
room and connected to the mains, to keep the battery at its highest
charge. The PMM 9030/9060/9180 could be in the test chamber –
connected to 9010 or 9010/03P/30P/60P via fiber optic link - and
running on its battery. When the battery of the 9030/9060/9180 is
almost fully discharged, the User can stop the test, replace the battery
of the 9030/9060/9180 with a charged battery (e.g. the one of 9010 or
9010/03P/30P/60P) and then restart the test.
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11-15
11.14.5 Environment
The operating environment of the receiver is specified to be within the
following limits:
• Temperature
• Humidity
• Altitude
+0° to +40° C
< 90% relative
4000 meters
The instrument should be stored and shipped in a clean, dry environment
which is specified to be within the following limitations:
• Temperature
• Humidity
• Altitude
11.14.6 Return for
Service
-40° to + 50° C
< 95% relative
15.000 meters
If the instrument should be returned to NARDA for servicing, please
complete the service questionnaire enclosed with the Operating Manual and
attach it to the instrument.
To minimize the repair time, be as specific as possible when describing the
failure. If the failure only occurs under certain conditions, explain how to
duplicate the failure.
If possible, reusing of the original packaging to ship the equipment is
preferable.
In case other package should be used, ensure to wrap the instrument in
heavy paper or plastic.
Use a strong shipping box and use enough shock absorbing material all
around the equipment to provide a firm cushion and prevent movement in the
shipping box; in particular protect the front panel.
Seal the shipping box securely.
Mark the shipping box FRAGILE to encourage careful handling.
11.14.7 Equipment
Cleaning
Use a clean, dry, non abrasive cloth for external cleaning of the equipment.
To clean the equipment do not use any solvent, thinner, turpentine,
acid, acetone or similar matter to avoid damage to external plastic or
display surfaces.
11.14.8 Equipment
ventilation
To allow correct equipment ventilation ensure that the vent grids on the
side panels and on the bottom of the receiver are free by any
obstructing object.
11-16
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11.14.9 Hardware
Installation
PMM 9030/9060/9180 is delivered from factory ready to use as a companion
of the PMM 9010 or 9010/03P/30P/60P.
To use PMM 9030/9060/9180 with PMM 9010 or PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P,
please check your PMM 9010 or PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P is updated at
the latest firmware version.
Remove the receiver from its cardboard and install it where desired, e.g.
directly on the antenna output connector (see detailed instruction later on in
this manual), or anyway connect the output of your antenna or transducer
device to the N connector on the front panel of PMM 9030/9060/9180 and
immediately start to measure up to 3/6/18 GHz.
Remove the Optic Link protective cover pressing the small tab under the
protective cover and gently pull it; keep it aside for future protection of the
port on the receiver. Repeat the same operations for the Optical Link #1 on
the PMM 9010 or 9010/03P/30P/60P.
Connect the Optic Fiber delivered with PMM 9030/9060/9180 to the PMM
9030/9060/9180 and to the PMM 9010 or 9010/03P/30P/60P pushing the
connector in the Optical port until a “click” can be heard; be sure the key of
the connector is in the right orientation.
Once fiber optic cable has been connected properly on both sides it’s
possible to start in operating PMM 9030/9060/9180 together with PMM 9010
or 9010/03P/30P/60P.
All the following examples are indifferently referred to the PMM 9010 or
the PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P.
Fig. 11-5 PMM 9030/9060/9180 Fiber Optic Link to PMM 9010
Switch ON the PMM 9030/9060/9180 keeping the “ON” small red button
pressed until the PW Led lights up blinking in Red colour (about 1 second),
then release the button. To avoid unwanted starts, if the “ON” button is kept
pressed for a too short time or for more then 2 seconds the instrument is
switched automatically off.
Push and keep pressed the “ON/OFF” button for more then 2 seconds to
switch off the receiver.
After having been switched ON, the PMM 9030/9060/9180 boots with its
internal BIOS and in matter of few tens of second runs the firmware which
manages the receiver.
Now switch ON the 9010 a screen like the following should appear.
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11-17
11.14.10 PMM 9010 +
PMM 9030/9060/9180
initial screen
The PMM 9030/9060/9180 is now ready to work in conjunction with the
PMM 9010.
11.14.11 LED on the
PMM 9010 and on the
PMM 9030/9060/9180
When the PMM 9030/9060/9180 is connected to PMM 9010, the yellow led
next to the RF input of PMM 9010 (“0dB led”) blinks to indicate that an
expansion unit is connected and that this BNC input shall be kept free of
any other connections.
The PW led on the back of the PMM 9030/9060/9180 remains on in fix
green color, to indicate the connection is good and stable.
When for any reason the link between PMM 9010 and PMM
9030/9060/9180 is interrupted, the PW led on the PMM 9030/9060/9180
blinks red (as just after the power ON), to indicate there is a connection
problem. After about 60 seconds in this condition, the PMM
9030/9060/9180 switches automatically OFF to save the battery.
11.14.12 PMM 9010 +
PMM 9030/9060/9180
main screen
11-18
After having selected any key and being returned to the main screen, the
usual appearance of the main screen is as follows:
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11.14.13 PMM 9010 +
PMM 9030/9060/9180
Setup panel
No changes in this panel, but that the Autocalibration function is no longer
available in this condition.
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11-19
11.14.14 PMM 9010 +
PMM 9030/9060/9180
Link failure
When, for any reason, the optical connection between PMM 9010 and
PMM 9030/9060/9180 is lost, a message is shown on the screen like the
following:
In this case, press the button 9030/9060/9180 Search: if there are no
changes, check the PMM 9030/9060/9180 and verify it is ON. Replace the
battery if needed (almost all the occurrences of link failure are due to the
battery too low) and switch ON again the PMM 9030/9060/9180.
A new screen like the following should be displayed:
11-20
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11.14.15 Using an
Antenna
In the frequency range from 30 MHz to 3/6/18 GHz two different antennas, a
Biconic and a Log-Periodic can be used to pick-up and measure RF radiated
emissions; alternatively, some Biconic-Log antennas are also available to
cover the whole range without changing between two antennas, even if such
a solution is mostly more expensive and the antenna size is usually bigger.
The really “unique” feature of PMM 9030/9060/9180 is that of allowing direct
connection between antenna output connector and EMI receiver input, so
dramatically increasing system immunity to environmental noise at detection
side and completely cutting-off any capacitive coupling between antenna,
ground plane and connection cables.
In order to perfectly match antennas to PMM 9030/9060/9180, a dedicated
PVC Antenna Holder is also provided as a standard accessory, so balancing
weight between receiver and antenna when attached to a tripod or antenna
mast.
Such Antenna Holder comes with some spare parts plus nuts and bolts,
which can be easily assembled with provided wrench, as per step-by-step
operations in following pictures.
Fig. 11-6 PMM 9030/9060/9180 Antenna Holder spare parts
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11-21
Assembling Steps (from left to right)
Fig. 11-7 Mounting the Tripod Joint
Fig. 11-8 Fixing the base of Antenna Holder
Fig. 11-9 Closing the Antenna Holder
11-22
Fig. 11-10 Inserting the Adapter for PMM Log-Periodic
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
Fig. 11-11 Complete assembling
Fig 11-12 Complete assembling for other antennas
Fig. 11-13 Mounting the Antenna Holder on PMM 9030/9060/9180
Fig. 11-14 Screwing the N-N Adapter for Antenna Matching
Fig. 11-15 Fixing onto the Tripod
Fig. 11-16 Attaching PMM LogPeriodic
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11-23
11.15 - Analyzer Mode Operating Instructions
11.15.1 Introduction
To enter in the ANALYZER Mode it’s enough to depress the Analyzer soft
key on the main screen.
In this mode the receiver works as a powerful Spectrum Analyzer and the
display shows the "spectrum analysis" (span max 3/6/18 GHz) in the
frequency domain of a signal tuned at a given frequency.
The analysis is done at the selected span frequency.
Using the marker facility the User can accomplish a very accurate
measurement of the signals either in frequency as well as in level.
Entering Analyzer Mode from the main menu, the display will look like the
following:
Fig. 11-17 Spectrum
The SPAN per division is automatically managed by the equipment.
On the screen of the Analyzer Mode all the relevant information are reported.
From the upper left corner, the User can see if the Preselector is ON or OFF;
if the Preamplifier is ON or OFF; which detector is in use and the relevant
hold time; if the input attenuation is Automatic or Manual and the set
attenuation and if the Minimum attenuation is 10 dB or 0dB.
Just above the graph, from left to right, there is the Reference level, the
Resolution bandwidth and the span value.
Below the graph the start, center and stop frequency.
The bottom left corner is dedicated to the marker indication, with actual
frequency and level of the marker.
11-24
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
The Spectrum mode function is divided into five sub windows:
•
•
•
•
•
Frequency
Resolution Bandwidth
Level
Marker
Wide Mode
The fifth button is used to change the spectrum view to wide screen mode,
as shown in the picture 4-1, and with the Esc button the original view can be
restored.
Always use Esc button to return to the previous view/condition.
11.15.2 Frequency
Allows the User to set the tuning frequency and also the Span.
The Center frequency of the Spectrum window can be directly edited into the
window or set by the arrow buttons or by the rotary knob, which frequency
steps are set under the Manual mode.
Depressing the Center button the figures 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4 are selectable;
with the right arrow key it is possible to select the figures from 5 to 9, and
pressing again the right arrow key the units kHz, MHz and GHz becomes
accessible, as well as the decimal dot and the Back Space. The left arrow
key can be used as well to move back and forth from one screen to the
other. Pressing 0 as the first figure the decimal dot appears automatically.
To set a given frequency it is therefore enough to edit the value with the soft
keys and the left an right arrows, confirming the selections entering the units
value (kHz, MHz or GHz).
The figures entered appear in a small window just below the graph and the
default unit is MHz, so 100 kHz = 0,1 MHz; 10 kHz = 0,01 MHz;
1 kHz = 0,001 MHz and 100 Hz = 0,0001 MHz.
Using the Start and Stop buttons it is possible to select any start and stop
value in the frequency range 10 Hz to 3/6/18 GHz band.
Another method for setting the frequency is to enter the Center frequency
and the appropriate Span.
In this mode of operation the frequency step (spectrum resolution) is set
automatically, therefore it cannot be changed manually.
11.15.3 RBW
The Resolution Bandwidth command is used to select the bandwidth of the
measuring filter. Seven bandwidth filters, shaped at -6dB, are available:
• 120 kHz CISPR 16
•
3 kHz
•
10 kHz
•
30 kHz
• 100 kHz
• 300 kHz
•
1 MHz (Bimp)
The four larger filters are selectable from the first RBW screen, and pressing
the More RBW button it is possible to select all the other filters.
These filters are mathematically modeled using FIR (Finite Impulse
Response) technique and they are exactly as required by the standards.
More filters will be available as an option for specific applications, e.g. to
cover Military Standards requirements, etc.
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11-25
The Level function has 5 sub-menus, each one with several options.
11.15.4 Level
Pressing the Display button it is possible to set two parameters: the
visualized Dynamic range (chosen between 80, 100 and 120dB) and the
Reference Level, that can be increased or reduced by steps of 5dB within
the range +55 dBµV to 90 dBµV (-50 to - 15 dBm).
The Input button opens a submenu which is dedicated to the setting of the
input attenuator and to switch on-off the built-in preamplifier.
The PMM 9030/9060/9180 receiver takes automatically into account the
settings of all the Input parameters and always displays the correct value of
the level. The User is not required to make any correction to the readings.
11.15.4.1 Input:
Attenuators
and
preamplifier
Being entered in the Input submenu, to increase or decrease the attenuation
at the input, press Att + or Att -, and for each touch the attenuation is
increased or decreased of 5 dB (preset value) up to the max attenuation
available of 55 dB.
Depressing either one of these keys force the receiver in manual attenuation.
The Min Att button acts as a toggle switch: it selects or deselects the
minimum attenuation of 10 dB. When the minimum attenuation is selected,
the attenuator – doesn’t matter if in automatic or in manual condition cannot be lowered under 10 dB.
Unless specifically required by the test conditions, do not remove the
minimum attenuation of 10 dB.
With the Preamp key it is possible to insert or exclude the built-in low noise
preamplification of 10 dB.
The internal 10 dB preamplifier can be used when very weak signals have to
be investigated. As already mentioned, with the preamplifier ON the receiver
takes automatically care of the 10 dB gain when measuring the signals.
The Att Auto button is used to switch from the two conditions of manual or
automatic attenuation setting.
Please note that the switching of the attenuators is relatively noisy and you
can perceive it distinctly with a “click” for each switch operation.
Using 0 dB attenuation PMM 9030/9060/9180 has no input protection.
This is a potentially dangerous condition for the input stage of the
receiver.
Use 0 dB attenuation only if you are very sure that your input signal is
less than 1 V (or 120 dBµV).
Before to apply an unknown signal to PMM 9030/9060/9180 receiver,
use an oscilloscope or a wide band RF voltmeter to measure it. In any
case set Min. ATT at 10 dB and select the maximum available
attenuation with preamplifier OFF.
If needed, add an external coaxial attenuator on the input signal line.
11-26
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11.15.4.2 Misc
Under the Miscellanea functions menu it is possible to activate or exclude
the Preselector filters and also to set the Tracking Generator.
The Preselector is composed by a group of filters automatically selected
by the PMM 9030/9060/9180 while it is sweeping or anyway measuring.
The aim of the preselector is to reduce the amount of out-of-band energy
entering in the receiver, thus helping a lot in reducing intermodulation
problems and similar undesired behaviors.
In Analyzer mode the preselector is available only if the entire span falls in
one filter band (see the main specification in chapter 1 to verify the
frequency bands). In this situation on the display it will be shown:
Preselector ON. If the span is larger then one filter only, on the display the
symbol *** will appear instead.
It can be set either ON or OFF with the associated button, and normally it
should be always enabled.
On the top left corner of the screen the symbol “Off” or “On” will be
displayed.
Pressing the RF OUT button the receiver enters the Generator menu.
11.15.4.3 Detector
This menu allows the Operator to select the most appropriate detector for
the test.
In Analyzer mode the Peak, Average and RMS (Root Mean Square)
detectors are available and can be selected via the appropriate button.
Hold time
The Hold Time (expressed in milliseconds) represents the time the receiver
uses to “take a snapshot” of the incoming signal and to measure it with the
chosen detector. When selecting a detector, the default hold time value is
automatically loaded, but in some cases this time is not appropriate, e.g.
when the interference signals have a low repetition rate. In this case the
PMM 9030/9060/9180 sees a high input signal and therefore tries to set the
proper attenuation automatically increasing the value or the input
attenuators. However, when the input attenuation is set the signal is gone,
so the receiver lowers the attenuation, but then a new peak arrives, and so
on and so forth..
On the other hand, if the Hold Time is too high the PMM 9030/9060/9180
cannot properly follow the signals.
In this situation the Hold Time value should be manually set to find a
correct compromise.
To set the Hold Time to the lowest possible value (this value dynamically
depends from the measurement conditions), enter the figure 0; if a value
lower than the allowed is entered, the lowest possible value is automatically
selected.
The max. Hold Time that can be set is 30 sec (30.000 ms).
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11-27
11.15.4.4 Conversion
factor
When using a transducer to make a measurement – a Voltage or Current
Probe, an Antenna, etc. – there is always the need to add to the measured
values the conversion factor of the transducer in use.
The Conversion factor may also take proper account of losses as cable
loss, attenuators added externally to the receiver, etc.
The PMM 9030/9060/9180 can handle these factors in an automatic way
and directly correct the readings.
The PMM 9030/9060/9180 can store in its internal non-volatile memory up
to 4 different correction factors, and use them one at a time when recalled.
However, the Conversion Factors shall be created and loaded via the
PMM 9010 Software Utility.
Press the relevant button to load the conversion factor, and NONE to
unload it.
11.15.5 Marker
With this command the Marker function can be enabled.
Switching ON the marker it appears on the screen as a small black pointing
down arrow, and simultaneously a small window shows up in the bottom left
corner of the screen, indicating the actual frequency and level read by the
marker.
Pressing the Peak button the marker will automatically move to the highest
signal found in the span range in that given moment, and with the help of
the Center button the frequency selected by the marker becomes the
center frequency on the screen, making very easy any signal analysis.
11.15.6 ESC
11-28
This button allows to return to the previous view or condition.
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11.16 - Sweep Mode Operating Instructions
11.16.1 Introduction
The Sweep mode is used to operate the PMM 9030/9060/9180 as a
powerful scanning receiver. To enter in this mode it’s enough to depress the
Sweep soft key on the main screen, and immediately the scan setup window
pops up and allows the operator to set the parameters for the scan.
Fig. 11-18 Sweep
As for the Analyzer operating mode, all the relevant information are reported
on the screen.
From the upper left corner, the User can see if the Preselector is ON or OFF;
if the Preamplifier is ON or OFF; which detector is in use and the relevant
hold time; if the function “Smart Detector” is activate and which one; if the
input attenuation is Automatic or Manual and the set attenuation and if the
Minimum attenuation is 10 dB or 0dB.
Just above the graph there is on the left the Reference level. During the
scan, in the center above the graph the actual frequency measured and/or
any other relevant operation.
Below the graph the start and the stop frequency, and loaded limits, if any.
When the sweep has been executed, on the bottom of the screen the most
important sweep parameters are repeated.
If the graph has been loaded from the memory, just below the start frequency
there is the symbol # followed by the memory position loaded (position
number 2 in figure 11-18).
Please note that the information in the upper part above the graph refers to
the next sweep to be done, while the information in the lower part, below the
graph, concerns to the actual displayed data.
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11-29
The Sweep mode function is divided into five sub windows:
•
•
•
•
•
Measure
Limit
Display
Marker
Load Store
Always use Esc button to return to the previous view/condition.
11.16.2 Measure
The Measure button is used to set the scan parameters and to run the
sweep.
After having chosen the frequency band and set all the other parameters it is
possible to run the measurement scan simply touching the Exec Sweep
button.
To make subsequent sweeps with the same setting parameters, simply
press ReDo Sweep. This key is particularly useful after having loaded a
previously stored track (see 11.12.6), as with the Re Do Sweep the original
settings are kept for the new measurement: it is extremely easy to make
comparisons, for example, before and after a modification of the EUT.
Once the scan starts, it can be stopped at any time during the execution by
the Stop function key that appears during the scan.
11.16.2.1 Frequency
The Frequency menu features four function buttons:
With the C+D Band the receiver will be set to work in the 30 – 1000 MHz
range. The definition of bands C (30-300 MHz) and D (300-1000 MHz) is a
given in CISPR 16-1-1.
Pressing E Band the receiver will be set to scan the 1 – 3/6/18 GHz
frequency band. The definition of band E (1-18 GHz) is a given in CISPR 161-1.
Pressing C+D+E Band the receiver will be set to scan the entire band from
30 MHz to 3/6/18 GHz.
Using these automatic band settings, the Frequency Step and Resolution
Bandwidth are set automatically according to CISPR standard requirement.
For the Advanced option please see next paragraph.
Please note that to make effective the changes after having selected a band,
the receiver needs to start its sweep.
11-30
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11.16.2.2 Advanced
The Advanced submenu features five function buttons:
RBW Auto automatically adjust the resolution bandwidth to selected
frequency range as per the CISPR standards.
The User can also decide which resolution bandwidth use simply selecting
either one of the 2 bands available: 120 kHz or 1 MHz.
The Start and Stop frequency buttons can be used to set any frequency
interval for the measurement; to enter the frequency values press the
corresponding function keys.
Pressing either one of these 2 keys the figures 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4 are
selectable at first; with the right arrow key it is possible to select the figures
from 5 to 9, and pressing again the right arrow key the units kHz, MHz and
GHz becomes accessible, as well as the decimal dot and the Back Space.
The left arrow key can be used as well to move back and forth from one
screen to the other. Pressing 0 as the first figure the decimal dot appears
automatically.
To set a given frequency it is therefore enough to edit the value with the soft
keys and the left an right arrows, confirming the selections entering the units
value (kHz, MHz or GHz).
The figures entered appear in a small window just below the graph and the
default unit is MHz.
11.16.2.3 Level
The Level function has 4 sub-menus, each one with several options..
Pressing the Display button it is possible to set two parameters: the
visualized Dynamic range (chosen between 80, 100 and 120dB) and the
Reference Level, that can be increased or reduced by steps of 5dB within
the range +55 dBµV to 90 dBµV (-50 to - 15 dBm).
The Input button opens a submenu which is dedicated to the setting of the
input attenuator and to switch on-off the built-in preamplifier.
The PMM 9030/9060/9180 receiver takes automatically into account the
settings of all the Input parameters and always displays the correct value of
the level. The User is not required to make any correction to the readings.
With the PMM 9030/9060/9180 the function Smart Detector is not available.
Using 0 dB attenuation PMM 9030/9060/9180 has no input protection.
This is a potentially dangerous condition for the input stage of the
receiver.
Use 0 dB attenuation only if you are very sure that your input signal is
less than 1 V (or 120 dBµV).
Before to apply an unknown signal to PMM 9030/9060/9180 receiver,
use an oscilloscope or a wide band RF voltmeter to measure it. In any
case set Min. ATT at 10 dB and select the maximum available
attenuation with preamplifier OFF.
If needed, add an external coaxial attenuator on the input signal line.
In case an OVERLOAD indication occurs it is necessary to add an
external attenuator to carry on the measurement without overpassing
the declared limit for continuous power or spectral density.
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11-31
11.16.2.3.1 Input:
Attenuators
and
preamplifier
Being entered in the Input submenu, to increase or decrease the attenuation at
the input, press Att + or Att -, and for each touch the attenuation is increased
or decreased of 5 dB (preset value) up to the max attenuation available of 55
dB.
Depressing either one of these keys force the receiver in manual attenuation.
The Min Att button acts as a toggle switch: it selects or deselects the
minimum attenuation of 10 dB. When the minimum attenuation is selected, the
attenuator – doesn’t matter if in automatic or in manual condition - cannot be
lowered under 10 dB.
Unless specifically required by the test conditions, do not remove the
minimum attenuation of 10 dB.
With the Preamp key it is possible to insert or exclude the built-in low noise
preamplification of 10 dB.
The internal 10 dB preamplifier can be used when very weak signals have to
be investigated. As already mentioned, with the preamplifier ON the receiver
takes automatically care of the 10 dB gain when measuring the signals.
The Preamplifier must be mandatory switched off (default) while carrying on
CISPR measurements.
The Att Auto button is used to switch from the two conditions of manual or
automatic attenuation setting.
Please note that the switching of the attenuators is relatively noisy and you can
perceive it distinctly with a “click” for each switch operation.
11.16.2.3.2 Misc
Under the Miscellanea functions menu it is possible to activate or exclude the
Preselector filters and also to enter in the Tracking generator menu pressing
the RF OUT button.
The Preselector is composed by a group of filters automatically selected by the
PMM 9030/9060/9180 while it is sweeping or anyway measuring. The aim of
the preselector is to reduce the amount of out-of-band energy entering in the
receiver, thus helping a lot in reducing intermodulation problems and similar
undesired behaviors.
It can be set either ON or OFF with the associated button, and normally it
should be always enabled.
On the top left corner of the screen the symbol “Off” or “On” will be displayed.
Pressing the RF OUT button the receiver enters the Tracking generator menu.
11.16.2.3.3 Tracking
generator
The Tracking generator is an internal, high stability and accuracy, 50 Ohm
RF generator ranging from 10 Hz to 50 MHz.
It is a CW signal source tuned at the frequency set under the RF OUT Freq
window.
As usual, to set a given frequency it is therefore enough to edit the value with
the soft keys and the left an right arrows, confirming the selections entering the
units value (kHz, MHz or GHz).
Pressing 0 as the first figure the decimal dot appears automatically.
The output level can be set between 60,0 and 90,0 dBµV with 0,1dB steps
using the RF OUT Level button.
If a higher or lower level is needed, the User shall adopt either an external
amplifier or an external attenuator.
With the PMM 9030/9060/9180 the Tracking On function is not available.
11-32
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11.16.2.3.4 Detector
This menu allows the operator to select the most appropriate detector for
the test.
In Sweep mode the Peak, Average, RMS (Root Mean Square) and QuasiPeak detectors are available and can be selected via the appropriate button.
Hold time (ms)
The Hold Time (expressed in milliseconds) represents the time the receiver
uses to “take a snapshot” of the incoming signal and to measure it with the
chosen detector. When selecting a detector, the default hold time value is
automatically loaded, but in some cases this time is not appropriate, e.g.
when the interference signals have a low repetition rate. In this case the
PMM 9010 sees a high input signal and therefore tries to set the proper
attenuation automatically increasing the value or the input attenuators.
However, when the input attenuation is set the signal is gone, so the receiver
lowers the attenuation, but then a new peak arrives, and so on and so forth.
On the other hand, if the Hold Time is too high the PMM 9010 cannot
properly follow the signals.
In this situation the Hold Time value should be manually set to find a correct
compromise.
To set the Hold Time to the lowest possible value (this value dynamically
depends from the measurement conditions), enter the figure 0; if a value
lower than the allowed is entered, the lowest possible value is automatically
selected.
The max. Hold Time that can be set is 30 sec (30.000 ms).
11.16.2.4 Conversion
factor
When using a transducer to make a measurement – a Voltage or Current
Probe, an Antenna, etc. – there is always the need to add to the measured
values the conversion factor of the transducer in use.
The Conversion factor may also take proper account of losses as cable loss,
attenuators added externally to the receiver, etc.
The PMM 9030/9060/9180 can handle these factors in an automatic way and
directly correct the readings.
The PMM 9030/9060/9180 can store in its internal non-volatile memory up to
4 different correction factors, and use them one at a time when recalled.
However, the Conversion Factors shall be created and loaded via the PMM
9010 Software Utility.
Load the conversion factor with the relevant button, and NONE to unload it.
11.16.3 Limit
Each emission standard has one or more limits the User shall comply with.
The PMM 9030/9060/9180 receiver has the possibility to load and activate
one limit with the simple click of a button.
The preloaded standard limits refer to the most popular EMC emission
standards: CISPR22, CISPR14 and CISPR11.
Other limits – or any custom designed limit – can be created, managed,
selected and loaded through the PMM 9010 Software Utility running on a PC.
These additional custom limits cannot be stored in the memory of the PMM
9030/9060/9180, but only in the one of the PC where the 9010SW Utility is
running.
The limits are shown on the scan display and they appear like a thin black
line .
By pressing the NONE button all limits are deactivated.
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11-33
11.16.4 Display
Pressing the Display button it is possible to set two parameters: the
visualized Dynamic range (chosen between 80, 100 and 120dB) and the
Reference Level, that can be increased or reduced by steps of 5dB within
the range +55 dBµV to 90 dBµV (-50 to - 15 dBm).
11.16.5 Marker
Selecting this function a Marker is immediately enabled, and it appears on
the screen as a small black pointing down arrow corresponding to the highest
reading; simultaneously a small window shows up in the bottom left corner of
the screen, indicating the actual frequency and level read by the marker.
The Marker function is not a simple search for the highest readings on the
screen – it would be a useless exercise that would display a number of points
all grouped together – but it’s a true peak search that measures the degree
of variation of the signal: a peak is so classified only if it “pops-up” from the
adjacent signals with a certain amount of dBs.
Following this criterion, if the measured signal is a flat line no peaks will be
found.
Selecting Highest X – where X represents the maximum number of markers
found by the receiver during its sweep – few more markers are added, each
one diamond shaped, defined as per the previous explanation.
The maximum number of markers available is 10.
By using arrow keys it is possible to quickly move on markers from higher
(left arrow) to lower (right arrow), i.e. if the highest is selected, pressing the
nd
right arrow key the 2 highest is selected, then pressing again the same key
rd
the 3 highest and so on and so forth.
It is also possible to use the rotary knob to move from a marker to the next
one.
The marker under analysis main marker) is a black arrow pointing down, the
others are diamond shaped.
Pressing the Peak button the marker returns to the highest reading.
In order to make easier and faster the evaluation of the more noisy signals,
the User can now select either the Analyzer or the Tune function, entering
respectively into a spectrum analysis of main marker position or in the
manual mode evaluation of it. To operate this two conditions please refer to
the appropriate section of this Operating Manual.
In manual mode, i.e. having selected Tune on the main marker, it is possible
to navigate from one peak to the other just pressing the arrow keys, without
to come back to the Sweep display and remaining in manual mode.
This is another unique feature of PMM 9030/9060/9180 to improve the
productivity of the test lab and make easier the work of the test engineer.
The Marker Off exits from the marker function.
11-34
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11.16.6 Load Store
Pressing this key allows the User to have access to the memory of the
receiver and enables the storing up to a number of different
configurations/sweeps that depends on the parameters set on the receiver.
For example, using standard CISPR parameters it is possible to store up to 5
sweeps on the C+D+E bands (RBW120 kHz and 1 MHz, respectively).
Each new scan will be stored in the first available memory position thanks to
the button Store #x, where x is the first available position. When all positions
are occupied by a scan, this function is disabled until one of the previous
scan is erased.
To load a stored trace, press the Load #x button until the proper scan is
displayed; to unload a trace select the Unload Trace button.
Please note that the Load function is scanning the memory in a circular way,
therefore all the occupied memory positions are shown in sequence. When
the key shows “Load #4”, it means the trace #3 is displayed and that the #4
will be loaded after the key is pressed, and so on and so forth.
To erase a trace, press the Erase#x button.
Due to the structure of the memory, it is possible to erase only the latest
stored memory, with a sequence “LIFO” (Last In First Out), therefore after
having erased the #x, the #(x-1) will be the trace to be erased. With
reference to the example at the left, the last stored trace is the #4, and it is
the first that will be erased. After that, the key will show “Erase #3”, and so on
and so forth.
A more advanced trace management could be done using the PMM 9010
Software Utility.
Turn Off the tracking generator, if it is not used, while you are in Scan
Mode.
This prevents interferences and the measurements are more clean and
accurate.
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11-35
11.17 - Manual Mode Operating Instructions
11.17.1 Introduction
The MANUAL mode is a very useful feature to manually control the
receiver and to deeply investigate electrical signals modifying the
parameters of receiver exactly as per the needs of the Test Engineer.
It is possible, for example, to observe the signals exceeding the limits
frequency by frequency; evaluating their levels measured simultaneously
with 4 different detectors (Peak, QuasiPeak, Average and RMS); listening
to them after a demodulation, etc.
To enter in .Manual Mode press the key in the main menu, and
immediately the first Manual window opens as follow.
Fig. 11-19 Manual
In manual mode the levels corresponding to the detectors in use are
displayed both in analogue and in digital format, and exactly as for the other
operating modes, all the relevant information are reported on the screen.
From the upper left corner, the User can see if the Preselector is ON or
OFF; if the Preamplifier is ON or OFF; the resolution bandwidth, the longest
hold time associated to the detectors in use; if the input attenuation is
Automatic or Manual and the set attenuation and if the Minimum
attenuation is 10 dB or 0dB; if there a demodulation and the level of the
volume, represented by a small black bar.
Then there are three or four vertical bars representing the detectors and
indicating in analogue and digital (the figures below each bar) the level
measured; on top of the bars the relevant detector, the unit in use and the
tuned frequency. The analogue scale of the analogue bars is set
automatically by the receiver.
11-36
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
The Manual mode function has five sub windows:
•
•
•
•
•
Frequency
Level
Resolution Bandwidth
Hold Time
Demodulation
Always use Esc button to return to the previous view/condition.
11.17.2 Frequency
Under this menu it is possible to set the tuning frequency and also the knob
and the arrow keys steps.
The center Frequency of the reading can be directly edited into the Tune
window or set by the left and right arrow buttons or by rotating the knob.
The figures entered appear in a small window just below the graph and the
default unit is MHz.
Having selected Tune, the figures 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4 are selectable at first;
with the right arrow key it is possible to select the figures from 5 to 9, and
pressing again the right arrow key the units kHz, MHz and GHz becomes
accessible, as well as the decimal dot and the Back Space. The left arrow
key can be used as well to move back and forth from one screen to the
other. Pressing 0 as the first figure the decimal dot appears automatically.
To set a given frequency it is therefore enough to edit the value with the
soft keys and the left an right arrows, confirming the selections entering the
units value (kHz, MHz or GHz).
If Knob is selected, the small window below the bars indicate the step
which is going to be selected. After having fixed the step size, rotate the
know and tune the desired frequency.
If Arrow is selected, the small window below the bars indicate the step
which is going to be selected. After having fixed the step size, press the left
and the right arrow keys to decrease or increase the frequency by the
selected step.
11.17.3 Level
The Level function has 4 sub-menus.
Pressing the Display button it is possible to set two parameters: the
visualized Dynamic range (chosen between 80, 100 and 120dB) and the
Reference Level, that can be increased or reduced by steps of 5dB within
the range +57 dBµV to 92 dBµV (-50 to -15 dBm).
The Input button opens a submenu which is dedicated to the setting of the
input attenuator and to switch on-off the built-in preamplifier.
The PMM 9030/9060/9180 receiver takes automatically into account the
settings of all the Input parameters and always displays the correct value of
the level. The User is not required to make any correction to the readings.
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11-37
11.17.3.1 Input:
Attenuator and
preamplifier
Being entered in the Input submenu, to increase or decrease the
attenuation at the input, press Att + or Att -, and for each touch the
attenuation is increased or decreased of 5 dB (preset value) up to the max
attenuation available of 55 dB.
Depressing either one of these keys force the receiver in manual
attenuation.
The Min Att button acts as a toggle switch: it selects or deselects the
minimum attenuation of 10 dB. When the minimum attenuation is selected,
the attenuator – doesn’t matter if in automatic or in manual condition cannot be lowered under 10 dB.
Unless specifically required by the test conditions, do not remove the
minimum attenuation of 10 dB.
With the Preamp key it is possible to insert or exclude the built-in low noise
preamplification of 10 dB.
The internal 10 dB preamplifier can be used when very weak signals have
to be investigated. As already mentioned, with the preamplifier ON the
receiver takes automatically care of the 10 dB gain when measuring the
signals.
The Preamplifier must be mandatory switched off (default) while carrying on
CISPR measurements.
The Att Auto button is used to switch from the two conditions of manual or
automatic attenuation setting.
Please note that the switching of the attenuators is relatively noisy and you
can perceive it distinctly with a “click” for each switch operation.
Using 0 dB attenuation PMM 9030/9060/9180 has no input protection.
This is a potentially dangerous condition for the input stage of the
receiver.
Use 0 dB attenuation only if you are very sure that your input signal is
less than 1 V (or 120 dBµV).
Before to apply an unknown signal to PMM 9030/9060/9180 receiver,
use an oscilloscope or a wide band RF voltmeter to measure it. In any
case set Min. ATT at 10 dB and select the maximum available
attenuation with preamplifier OFF.
If needed, add an external coaxial attenuator on the input signal line.
In case an OVERLOAD indication occurs it is necessary to add an
external attenuator to carry on the measurement without overpassing
the declared limit for continuous power or spectral density.
11-38
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11.17.3.2 Misc
Under the Miscellaneous functions menu it is possible to activate or
exclude the Preselector filters and also to set the Tracking generator.
The Preselector is composed by a group of filters automatically selected
by the PMM 9030/9060/9180 while it is sweeping or anyway measuring.
The aim of the preselector is to reduce the amount of out-of-band energy
entering in the receiver, thus helping a lot in reducing intermodulation
problems and similar undesired behaviors.
It can be set either ON or OFF with the associated button, and normally it
should be always enabled.
On the top left corner of the screen the symbol “Off” or “On” will be
displayed.
Pressing the RF OUT button the receiver enters the Tracking generator
menu.
The Tracking generator is an internal, high stability and accuracy, 50 Ohm
RF generator ranging from 10 Hz to 50 MHz.
It is a CW signal source tuned at the frequency set under the RF OUT Freq
window.
As usual, to set a given frequency it is therefore enough to edit the value
with the soft keys and the left an right arrows, confirming the selections
entering the units value (kHz, MHz or GHz).
Pressing 0 as the first figure the decimal dot appears automatically.
The output level can be set between 60,0 and 90,0 dBµV with 0,1dB steps
using the RF OUT Level button.
If a higher or lower level is needed, the User shall adopt either an external
amplifier or an external attenuator.
With the PMM 9030/9060/9180 the Tracking On function is not available.
11.17.4 RBW
The Resolution Bandwidth command is used to select the bandwidth of
the measuring filter. Seven bandwidth filters are available:
• 120 kHz CISPR 16
•
3 kHz
•
10 kHz
•
30 kHz
• 100 kHz
• 300 kHz
•
1 MHz (Bimp)
The four larger filters are selectable from the first RBW screen, and
pressing the More RBW button it is possible to select all the other filters.
These filters are mathematically modeled using FIR (Finite Impulse
Response) technique and they are exactly as required by the standards.
More filters will be available as an option for specific applications, e.g. to
cover Military Standards requirements, etc.
With the Auto Cispr function, the filter will be automatically selected,
according to CISPR standard, depending on the tuned frequency.
When a non-CISPR filter is selected, the Quasi Peak detector is disabled.
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11-39
11.17.5 Hold Time
The Hold Time (expressed in milliseconds) represents the time the receiver
uses to “take a snapshot” of the incoming signal and to measure it with the
chosen detector. When selecting a detector, the default hold time value is
automatically loaded, but in some cases this time is not appropriate, e.g.
when the interference signals have a low repetition rate. In this case the
PMM 9030/9060/9180 sees a high input signal and therefore tries to set the
proper attenuation automatically increasing the value or the input
attenuators. However, when the input attenuation is set the signal is gone,
so the receiver lowers the attenuation, but then a new peak arrives, and so
on and so forth.
On the other hand, if the Hold Time is too high the PMM 9030/9060/9180
cannot properly follow the signals.
In this situation the Hold Time value should be manually set to find a
correct compromise.
To set the Hold Time to the lowest possible value (this value dynamically
depends from the measurement conditions), enter the figure 0; if a value
lower than the allowed is entered, the lowest possible value is automatically
selected.
The max. Hold Time that can be set is 30 sec (30.000 ms).
11.17.6 Demodulator
Switching ON the built-in AM demodulator, the volume can be adjusted with
the rotating knob, and the level is shown by the black bar on the screen.
The demodulated signals can be heard with headphones or earphones
connected to the front panel of the PMM 9010, or amplified and/or recorded
by any suitable device.
An FM demodulator – or other demodulators - is not available for the time
being in the frequency band covered by the PMM 9030/9060/9180.
Insert the headphones jack connector only before switching on the
Demodulator or when the PMM 9010 power is off.
11-40
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11.18 – Updating firmware
11.18.1 Introduction
The PMM 9030/9060/9180 features a simple and user-friendly method for
updating its internal firmware through a Personal Computer (PC).
This section provides all the information required for easy updating.
This procedure concerns the firmware updating of RF modules
9030/9060/9180 only.
11.18.2 System
Requirements
The minimum requirements to allow the software to operate properly are
the following:
• 486 Processor or Pentium
• 16 Mb of RAM
• at least 10 Mb of free space on hard disk
• 1 free Serial Port (RS-232), or, alternatively, a USB/RS-232 Adapter
with related driver
• Windows Operating System 95/98/2000/XP/Vista/Win7
The User must have administrator privileges to install the software in
Windows 7; right click on the program .exe file and click on “Run as
administrator” to temporarily run the program or application as an
administrator until close it (Windows 7 also allows to mark an
application so that it always runs with administrator rights).
11.18.3 Preparing the
Hardware
Turn off the PMM 9030/9060/9180 and connect the RS-232 cable directly
or through a USB/RS-232 Adapter separately purchased (once related
driver has been properly installed), to the 9 pin socket situated on the back
panel of PMM 9030/9060/9180 on one side and to a free RS232 port (or
USB in case of Adapter’s use) on the PC side.
The first free RS-232 port will be automatically detected by the Firmware
Update Program during installation. In case of troubles please check port
assignments on the PC through the Control Panel utility.
The firmware storing procedure does not require the optical link
between 9010 series and 9030/9060/9180.
11.18.4 Software
Installation
The 9030SeriesUp executable program is provided together with the PMM
9010 Receiver package, burned on a CD-ROM; anyway it’s always possible
to check for newer releases and download them from official NARDA Italy
Web Site Support page.
Once the 9030SeriesUp Setup has been installed in the PC, another item
is created in the Programs list at Start Menu, which is “PMM Emission
Suite”, from where the “9030-9060-9180 SeriesUp” program can be easily
run.
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11-41
Click on “9030-9060-9180 SeriesUp” (9030SeriesUp.exe) once for running
the update program, so getting the following window:
Two firmware components can be updated by this application: Firmware,
which is the receiver internal program, and FPGA, to update the internal
programmable logic.
The .ldr file required for Firmware updating and the .bin file for FPGA are
automatically stored in the same directory of the 9030SeriesUp.exe,
otherwise just copy them there before performing the upgrade:
- PMM 9030: “9030FW.ldr” for FW; “run9030.bin” for the FPGA.
- PMM 9060: “9060FW.ldr” for FW; “run9060.bin” for the FPGA.
- PMM 9180: “9180FW.ldr” for FW; “run9180.bin” for the FPGA.
To obtain up-to-date Firmware for PMM 9030/9060/9180, the user can
contact his NARDA distributor or download it directly from Support
area of EMC Product Range on the following Web Site: www.nardasts.it.
Be sure batteries of PMM 9030/9060/9180 and connected Laptop (PC)
are fully charged before performing the FW Upgrade, otherwise the
upgrade progress could not terminate properly.
Alternatively, be sure to have both PMM 9030/9060/9180 and Laptop
(PC) powered through their respective AC/DC power adapters.
Anyway, even in case of failure, the internal BIOS will never be
corrupted and you’ll just need to repeat the procedure once more (this
is a unique feature!).
Should FW Upgrade procedure stop before reaching the 100%
completion that will have not to be considered a trouble but simply an
intermediate step: in this case please switch OFF and ON the receiver
and repeat the FW Upgrade procedure once more until the end.
Always cycle power OFF and ON again after every FW Upgrade.
11-42
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11.18.5 To transfer data Choose the serial port used for the communication with the RF module and
click on “RS232”.
The message “Please turn on the unit, then click OK” is displayed:
The RF module turned on automatically, otherwise do it manually. Click on
“OK”.
The SW identifies the RF module model, displays FW release and installed
FPGA, switch off the RF module and displays the message “Please turn on
9030/9060/9180 again, then click OK”.
Turn the RF model on manually and click on “OK”.
The key “Update Firmware & FPGA” is now enabled; click on it to start the
firmware updating.
FW and FPGA are both always updated: FW first, then the FPGA;
updating FW or FPGA separately, or other procedures are not
allowed.
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
11-43
During the firmware storing procedure the operation, the SW shows the file
in progress of uploading (below it is shown the PMM 9180 Firmware
updating process as example):
The message “N° Bytes have been stored” appears at the process end,
showing the number of Bytes written into the instrument.
To use the PMM 9030/9060/9180 with the PMM 9010F, the following
Firmware and FPGA release are needed:
- PMM 9010F: 9010F_FW.ldr rel. 1.17 or higher
Check.bin file (No Release)
Radied.bin file (No Release)
- PMM 9030: 9030FW.ldr rel. 1.19 or higher.
run9030.bin rel. 0x19 or higher.
- PMM 9060: 9060FW.ldr rel. 1.20 or higher.
run9060.bin rel. 0x16 or higher
- PMM 9180: 9180FW.ldr rel. 1.19 or higher.
run9180.bin rel. 0x13 or higher
For updating the firmware of the 9010F, please refer to the Chapter 8
and in addition pay attention to update the FPGA for radiated too.
In case the release should not comply with what expected, just check
about the FW file used during installation or get in contact with the
nearest NARDA Local Distributor.
11-44
PMM 9030/9060/9180 Frequency Extension
12 – PMM 9010-RMA
Rack Mount Adapter for Rack 19”
(Option)
12.1 Introduction
A 19-inch rack is a standardized frame or enclosure for mounting multiple
equipment modules. Equipment designed to be placed in a rack is typically
described as rack-mount or simply chassis; the height of the electronic
modules is standardized as multiples of 1.75 inches (44.5 mm) or one rack
unit or "U". Each module has a front panel that is 19 inches (482.6 mm)
wide, including edges that protrude on each side which allow the module to
be fastened to the rack frame with screws.
12.2 Instrument Items
PMM 9010-RMA Rack Mount Adapter includes the following items:
• Rack Mount kit (screws, plastic round washers and cage nuts).
• Return for Repair Form.
12.3 Optional
accessories
PMM 9010-RMA Rack Mount Adapter can be used with several optional
accessories, the most common being the following:
•
•
•
•
PMM 9010 EMI Receiver 10 Hz÷ 30 MHz;
PMM 9010/03P EMI Receiver 30 MHz ÷ 300 MHz
PMM 9010/30P EMI Receiver 30 MHz ÷ 3 GHz;
PMM 9010/60P EMI Receiver 30 MHz ÷ 6 GHz
Document 9010EN-31229-2.46 - © NARDA 2013
PMM 9010-RMA Rack Mount Adapter
12-1
12.4 PMM 9010-RMA
Main Specifications
Table 12-1 lists the PMM 9010-RMA specifications.
TABLE 12-1 Technical Specifications
Environment temperature
0° to 40°C
Rack unit
3U
Dimensions
483 x 410 x 132.5 mm (WxDxH)
Weight
5,5 Kg (without instruments)
12.5 PMM 9010-RMA Front view
Fig. 12-1 Front view
Legend::
- 1 – Holes Flanges used to fix the Rack Mount to the Rack
- 2 – Handles used to carry the Rack Mount
- 3 – PMM 9010 or 9010/03P/30P/60P window
- 4 – Milled knob used to fix the frontal panel to the Rack
- 5 – Cover for future implementation
12-2
PMM 9010-RMA Rack Mount Adapter
12.6 PMM 9010-RMA Inside view
Fig. 12-2 Inside view
Legend::
- 1 – Round holes of service
- 2 – Rectangular holes used to put 9010 or 9010/03P/30P/60P Instrument;
- 3 - 9010 or 9010/03P/30P/60P straps;
- 4 – Rectangular holes for future implementation;
- 5 – Straps for future implementation.
PMM 9010-RMA Rack Mount Adapter
12-3
12.7 Rack Requirements
The rack must be of the following type:
- Standard 19 inch (483 mm) with mounting rails that conform to English
universal hole spacing per section 1 of ANSI/EIA-310-D-1992.
- The minimum vertical rack space per chassis must be 3U (rack units),
equal to 3 inches (132.5 cm).
12.8 Required Equipment Before you begin the installation, ensure that you have the following items:
- Crosshead screwdriver (not provided)
- Flat-blade screwdriver or rack-insertion tool (not provided)
- Tape measure and level (not provided)
- Rack Mount kit (provided)
12.9 Moving chassis
When lifting the chassis, be aware of its weight, and follow these
guidelines:
- Disconnect all power and external cables before lifting the chassis.
- Remove all instruments from the chassis before lifting.
- Make sure that the milled knob well locking.
- Using the two handles, lift the PMM 9010-RMA slowly keeping your back
straight. Lift with your legs, not with your back. Bend at the knees, not at the
waist.
12-4
PMM 9010-RMA Rack Mount Adapter
12.10 Installation
guidelines
When installing the chassis, follow these guidelines:
- Plan your site configuration and prepare the site before installing the
chassis.
- Ensure that there is adequate space around the rack to allow for servicing
the chassis and for airflow.
- If the rack has wheels, ensure that the brakes are engaged or that the rack is
otherwise stabilized
- For a round hole (tapped) rack, use clip nuts with M6 x 16 screw
(not provided).
- For a square hole (untapped) rack (shown below), use M6 x 16
screws, plastic round washers head screws and M6 cage nut
(provided).
PMM 9010-RMA Rack Mount Adapter
12-5
12.11 Installing the
PMM 9010-RMA
This section describes how to install the PMM 9010-RMA Rack Mount Adapter:
- Insert the cage nuts behind the vertical rails with respect to the Rack Unit
Boundary and the distance show below:
- You can use a rack-insertion tool or a flat-blade screwdriver to install the
cage nuts.
- Insert the chassis into the rack.
- Slide the chassis into the rack until the front flange is flat against the cage
nuts.
- Using the four screws and black plastic washers, fix the chassis by its
flanges to the rack.
12-6
PMM 9010-RMA Rack Mount Adapter
12.12 Use of the
PMM 9010-RMA
with
PMM 9010
The following procedure is indifferently referred to the 9010 or
9010/03P/30P/60P.
This section provides the information needed to install your 9010
Instrument on the PMM 9010-RMA Rack Mount Adapter.
- Remove the frontal panel from the Rack unscrewing the milled knob
without loosing it completely.
- Using the handles, open the PMM 9010-RMA slowly.
- Place the instrument by the rectangular holes and drag the instrument in
contact with the frontal panel.
- To ensure the necessary stability, the instrument must be fastened to the
unit using the straps.
- Connect the cables on the rear panel (see “Installation” chapter for further
information)
- To fix the rear cables to the Rack Mount insert plastic straps by of the
round holes.
- Using the handles, close the PMM 9010-RMA slowly.
Fig. 12-3 PMM 9010-RMA with 9010 Instrument
PMM 9010-RMA Rack Mount Adapter
12-7
This page has been left blank intentionally
12-8
PMM 9010-RMA Rack Mount Adapter
13 – APD Mode Operating Instructions
(Amplitude Probability Distribution)
13.1 Introduction
EM disturbances have become much more complicated since introduction of
digital radio communication system over 1 GHz, in a way that radiated
emission noise from EUTs has become broadband.
An APD-measuring function has been introduced in the CISPR 16-1-1
Standard requirements for EMC Measuring Equipments, in order to detect
both “broadband emissions” generated by repetitive pulses and “pulsemodulated narrowband emissions” at frequencies over 1 GHz.
The signal amplitude statistics are described in radio engineering as follows:
Amplitude Probability Distribution definition: APD (E k ) = [∑ D i (E k )] / T t
Where E k is the envelope of the noise, D i is the duration of each relevant
peak and T t is the total measurement time.
APD statistics are needed to accurately predict non-gaussian noise effects
coming from sources like lightning systems, electrical or electronic devices
where average noise power detection cannot predict the performance of the
EUT.
In the example above, taken from CISPR 16-1-1 Amend. 1, a typical APD
representation is provided.
In such example, in particular, two different measurements conditions are
shown, with and without an EUT operating at a specific distance from the
measuring antenna, where the probability of the signal amplitude to be in the
noise level of 20 dBµv/m is almost equal to “1” (i.e. always true) and is
identical with or without contribution from EUT; such amplitude appears
-8
never exceeding the max value of 80 dBµv/m instead (probability < 10 )
when the EUT is ON, while there is almost the same, even if low, probability
-3
(10 ) that such a value remains between 50 and 70 dBµv/m.
All the following is indifferently referred to the PMM 9010 or the PMM
9010/03P/30P/60P.
Document 9010EN-31229-2.46 - © NARDA 2013
APD Mode Operating Instructions
13-1
Typical APD Noise
Curve with PMM
receiver
Due to the good
performances of PMM
receiver the noise
curve is very steep
13.2 Pre-conditions and The APD function has been added to previous 9010 detection functions
starting from 9010 FW Rel. 1.70 and 9030 FW Rel. 1.14, so please check
Settings
about having these or newer FW releases on your equipments from Start-Up
Screen at power-on, as shown in following picture.
On the contrary please access NARDA web site to download latest available
FW release and update your unit.
13-2
APD Mode Operating Instructions
13.2.1 Entering the
function
The Amplitude Probability Distribution mode can be used when
measuring signals in the frequency range from 30 MHz on with
9030/9060/9180.
As soon as 9030/9060/9180 is connected and switched on, turning on the
th
9010 provides the APD button appearing at the function keys 4 position
from the top (see picture).
Obviously the PMM 9030/9060/9180 unit must be connected to the 9010 to
allow operating in the higher frequency bands.
This is a very powerful and innovative function for an EMI receiver. To enter
this mode simply depress the APD soft key on the main screen and the APD
setup window will pop up immediately, allowing operator to set parameters
for the measure. All these settings (Limits, Frequencies, Hold Time etc.) refer
to the each specific product standard and can be preset by pressing the
Default key.
13.2.2 Methods
The Amplitude Probability Distribution is a statistical characterization of
signals. Measurements are based on 1 MHz RBW and have to be performed
over a number of frequencies typically above 1 GHz, but can also be carried
out below.
Two methods are defined: the first “E based” and the second “P based”.
For Method 1 (E) it is necessary to measure disturbance level E meas related
to specified P limit
In this case EUT complies with the standard if E meas is less or equal to E lim
For Method 2 (P) it is necessary to measure the probability of time P meas
during which the disturbance envelope exceeds the limit E lim
In this case EUT complies with the standard if P meas is less or equal to P lim
APD Mode Operating Instructions
13-3
13.3 Setup
As for the Sweep and Click operating modes, all the relevant information are
reported on the screen.
Fig. 4-1 APD Setup
Thanks to its digital architecture and to the clever design, the PMM
9010/9030/9060/9180 receiver can make very fast and precise
measurements in compliance to both methods (E & P) of the CISPR 161-1 standard.
13.3.1 Limit 1 E
Moving the highlighter cursor on the first line of the Setup page the threshold
level for the first limit can be entered using the function keys on the right.
The range for this limit is between 10 and 120 dBµV (default: 52dBµV).
Enter a 0 (zero) to disable the limit.
If the limit is disabled a series of dashes ( ---- ) is displayed.
13.3.2 Limit 1 P
Moving the highlighter cursor on the second line of the Setup page the
threshold percentage of probability, expressed in power of ten, for the first
limit can be entered using the function keys on the right.
0
-8
The range for this limit is between 10 and 10 dBµV (default: 10E-2).
Only the positive number of the exponent needs to be entered.
0
To set 10 a value of 0.1 must be input.
Enter a 0 (zero) to disable the limit.
If the limit is disabled a series of dashes ( ---- ) is displayed.
13.3.3 Limit 2 E
Moving the highlighter cursor on the third line of the Setup page the threshold
level for the second limit can be entered using the function keys on the right.
The range for this limit is between 10 and 120 dBµV (default: 58dBµV).
Enter a 0 (zero) to disable the limit.
If the limit is disabled a series of dashes ( ---- ) is displayed.
13-4
APD Mode Operating Instructions
13.3.4 Limit 2 P
Moving the highlighter cursor on the fourth line of the Setup page the
threshold percentage of probability, expressed in power of ten, for the
second limit can be entered using the function keys on the right.
0
-8
The range for this limit is between 10 and 10 dBµV (default: 10E-4).
Only the positive number of the exponent needs to be entered.
0
To set 10 a value of 0.1 must be digited.
Enter a 0 (zero) to disable the limit.
If the limit is disabled a series of dashes ( ---- ) is displayed.
13.3.5 YY Offset
When the YY Offset function is activated, only the frequencies with a level
over the higher between the two limits (+ offset) will be investigated during
the test.
Moving the highlighter cursor on the fifth line of the Setup page the offset,
expressed in dB, related to the first Limit 1 E can be entered using the
function keys on the right.
The range for this value is between 0 dB and 150 dB.
To set 0 dB a value of 0.01 must be digited.
Enter a 0 (zero) to disable this function.
If the limit is disabled a series of dashes ( ---- ) is displayed (default).
13.3.6 Start Frequency
Moving the highlighter cursor on the eighth line of the Setup page the starting
frequency for the searching sweep, expressed in MHz, can be entered using
the function keys on the right.
The range for this value is between 30 and 3000 MHz.
When a value outside the range is entered the default 1000 MHz is
automatically set.
13.3.7 Stop Frequency
Moving the highlighter cursor on the ninth line of the Setup page the end
frequency for the searching sweep, expressed in MHz, can be entered using
the function keys on the right.
The range for this value is between 30 and 3000 MHz.
When a value outside the range is entered the default 3000 MHz is
automatically set.
13.3.8 Num. of freqs
Moving the highlighter cursor on the tenth line of the Setup page the number
of frequencies for the searching sweep, the ones that will be further
investigated, can be entered using the function keys on the right.
The range for this value is between 2 and 50.
When a value outside the range is entered the default number of 5 is
automatically set.
APD Mode Operating Instructions
13-5
Moving the highlighter cursor on the eleventh line of the Setup page the time
period for each frequency measurement after the sweep can be entered
using the function keys on the right.
13.3.9 Time
The range for this value is between 2 and 120s.
When a value outside the range is entered the default 20s is automatically
set.
If a value higher of the one set for the Search Hold Time is entered, the
Search Hold Time is automatically adapted to the same duration.
Moving the highlighter cursor on the twelfth line of the Setup page the
method for the measurement can be entered between Method 1 (E based default) and Method 2 (P based).
13.3.10 Method
The choice is possible by pressing the Change Key.
13.3.11 Search Hold
Time
Moving the highlighter cursor on the thirteenth line of the Setup page the time
duration for the sweep search can be entered using the function keys on the
right.
The range for this value is between 2 and 1000s.
When a value outside the range, or lower then the Time parameter, is
entered the default 20s is automatically set or it is adapted to the Time
duration.
13.3.12 Conversion
Factor
Moving the highlighter cursor on the fourteenth line of the Setup page one of
the stored Conversion Factors can be chosen from the list on the right.
This functionality is useful when using a transducer to make a measurement
– a Voltage or Current Probe, an Antenna, etc. – as there is always the need
to add to the measured values the conversion factor of the transducer in use.
The Conversion factor may also take proper account of losses as cable loss,
attenuators added externally to the receiver, etc.
The PMM 9010 can handle these factors in an automatic way and directly
correct the readings.
The PMM 9010 can store in its internal non-volatile memory up to 4 different
correction factors, and use them one at a time when recalled.
However, the Conversion Factors shall be created and loaded via the PMM
9010 Software Utility.
Press the relevant button to load the conversion factor, and NONE to unload
it (default).
13.3.13 Preselector
Moving the highlighter cursor on the fifteenth line of the Setup page the
internal Preselector filter can be activated (On, default) or deactivated (Off).
The choice is possible by pressing the Change Key.
13-6
APD Mode Operating Instructions
13.3.14 Min.
Attenuation
Moving the highlighter cursor on the sixteenth line of the Setup page the
Minimum Attenuation can be entered using the function keys on the right.
The range for this value is between 0 and 50dB in 10dB steps (default:
10dB).
It is recommended to set the highest Min. Attenuation when the input signal
level is not predictable, to prevent damages to the input stage.
13.3.15 PreAmplifier
Moving the highlighter cursor on the seventeenth line of the Setup page the
internal Preamplifier can be activated (On) or deactivated (Off, default).
The choice is possible by pressing the Change Key.
It is recommended to switch the Preamplifier off when the input signal level is
not predictable to prevent damages to the input stage.
APD Mode Operating Instructions
13-7
The APD mode function is divided into five sub windows:
13.4 Operation
•
•
•
•
•
Set
Manual
Report
Start
Defaulf
The purpose of the Set key has been already described.
Always use Esc button to return to the previous view/condition.
13.4.1 MANUAL (APD)
Pressing MANUAL key the following screen appears:
Please consider the two gray colored areas (forbidden areas) are not
represented with shadows, like in the picture above, on the equipment.
This mode of operation is useful to check the DUT and try a debugging in
real-time when needed.
From the upper left corner, the User can see if the Preselector is ON or OFF;
if the Preamplifier is ON or OFF; which attenuation is in use and the
minimum attenuation set (0 dB or 10dB or 20dB).
On the vertical axis of the graph Probability values are represented,
expressed in power of ten. The maximum value is mandatory to be 100% of
0
probability (10 ).
The horizontal axis indicates Level of the signal amplitude. CISPR standard
recommends a Ref. Level (max value of the scale) equal to “Max Peak Value
+ 5dB”.
13-8
APD Mode Operating Instructions
During the test a counter is displayed in bold showing the time going on. The
measurement ends when the period set in the Time field of the Setup page is
elapsed.
The Limit is considered as Level & Probability, related to each other.
When set time is elapsed, the indication “PASS” or “FAIL” appears,
depending on test result.
13.4.1.1 Frequency
Under this menu it is possible to set the tuning frequency and also the knob
and the arrow keys’ step.
The center Frequency of the reading can be directly edited into the Tune
window or set by the left and right arrow buttons or by rotating the knob.
The figures entered appear in a small window just below the graph and the
default unit is MHz.
Having selected Tune, the figures 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4 are selectable at first; with
the right arrow key it is possible to select the figures from 5 to 9, and
pressing again the right arrow key the units kHz, MHz and GHz becomes
accessible, as well as the decimal dot and the Back Space. The left arrow
key can be used as well to move back and forth from one screen to the
other. Pressing 0 as the first figure the decimal dot appears automatically.
To set a given frequency it is therefore enough to edit the value with the soft
keys and the left an right arrows, confirming the selections entering the units
value (kHz, MHz or GHz).
If Knob is selected, the small window below the bars indicates the step
which is going to be selected. After having fixed the step size, rotate the knob
and tune the desired frequency.
If Arrow is selected, the small window below the bars indicates the step
which is going to be selected. After having fixed the step size, press the left
and the right arrow keys to decrease or increase the frequency by the
selected step.
APD Mode Operating Instructions
13-9
13.4.1.2 Input
Being entered in the Input submenu, to increase or decrease the attenuation
at the input, press Att + or Att -, and for each touch the attenuation is
increased or decreased by 5 dB (preset value). Depressing one of these
keys force the receiver in manual attenuation selection.
When the input attenuation is 0 dB (condition that can be achieved only if the
Minimum Attenuation is set to 0 dB as well), the yellow led to the left of the
input BNC connector is ON and indicates a warning status, just to advice the
operator about no attenuation at all at RF input.
The Min Att button acts as a toggle switch: it selects the minimum
attenuation between 0, 10 or 20 dB. When the minimum attenuation is
selected, the attenuator – doesn’t matter if in automatic or in manual
condition - cannot be lowered under its value.
Unless specifically required by the test conditions, do not remove the
minimum attenuation of 10 dB.
With the Preamp key it is possible to insert or exclude the built-in low noise
pre-amplification of 10 dB (in the range 30 - 3000 MHz).
The internal 10 dB preamplifier can be used when very weak signals have to
be investigated. As already mentioned in the general features description,
with the preamplifier ON the receiver takes automatically into account the 10
dB compensation in the shown result.
Please note that switching of attenuators provides a low audible noise and
it’s absolutely normal to perceive it distinctly as a “click” at each switch
operation.
The PMM 9010 receiver takes automatically into account the settings of all
the Input parameters and always displays the correct value of the level. The
User is not required to make any correction to the readings.
13-10
APD Mode Operating Instructions
The Preselector is composed by a group of filters automatically selected by
the PMM 9010/9030/9060/9180 while it is sweeping or anyway measuring.
The aim of the preselector is to reduce the amount of out-of-band energy
entering in the receiver, thus helping a lot in reducing intermodulation
problems and similar undesired behaviors.
It can be set either ON or OFF with the associated button, and normally it
should be always enabled.
On the top left corner of the screen the symbol “Off” or “On” will be displayed.
In case an OVERLOAD indication occurs it is necessary to add an external
attenuator to carry on the measurement without overpassing the declared
limit for continuous power or spectral density.
Using 0 dB attenuation PMM 9030/9060/9180 has no input protection.
This is a potentially dangerous condition for the input stage of the
receiver.
Use 0 dB attenuation only if you are very sure that your input signal is
less than 1 V (or 120 dBµV).
Before to apply an unknown signal to PMM 9030/9060/9180 receiver,
use an oscilloscope or a wide band RF voltmeter to measure it. In any
case set Min. ATT at 10 dB and select the maximum available
attenuation with preamplifier OFF.
If needed, add an external coaxial attenuator on the input signal line.
13.4.1.3 CLEAR
Press this button to begin a new measurement.
The time counter restarts from 0 s.
13.4.1.4 SETUP
Press this button to go back to the Setup menu.
APD Mode Operating Instructions
13-11
13.4.2 Report (APD)
Press this button to show the last generated Report of measurements.
Press ESC button to go back to the Setup menu.
The report is represented as a table where the number of rows corresponds
to the number of frequencies entered in the Setup and nine columns detailed
below.
13.4.2.1 MHz
In the first column the frequencies (in MHz) are listed in order of level
strength from the highest to the lowest.
13.4.2.2 Pk dBµV
In the second column the measured Peak level for each frequency is shown.
This is the result of the Peak detector with the Max Hold time set in the Time
field of the Setup.
13.4.2.3 ΔL Peak
The third column shows the difference (in dB) between the level measured
during the search and the limit for the level plus YY Offset entered in the
Setup, for each frequency.
13.4.2.4 ΔL1
The fourth column shows the difference (in dB) between the level measured
during the search and the APD limit L1 entered in the Setup, for each
frequency.
13.4.2.5 E
The fifth column shows a * if the limit L1 has been exceeded.
13.4.2.6 ΔL2
The sixth column shows the difference (in dB) between the level measured
during the search and the APD limit L2 entered in the Setup, for each
frequency.
13.4.2.7
The seventh column shows a * if the limit L2 has been exceeded as for the
fifth column.
13.4.2.8 Time
In the eighth column the time duration of the measurement is indicated for
each frequency.
Normally it is the duration set for the Time parameter of the Setup page,
unless the test is manually interrupted before its programmed end.
13.4.2.9 P/F
The ninth column shows the test result (PASS/FAIL) for each frequency.
13-12
APD Mode Operating Instructions
13.4.3 START (APD)
When the Start button is pressed the sweep between initial and stop
frequency is performed for the period of time related to the value set in the
Search Hold Time field.
When a limit, and the YY Offset are activated, the highest of them, plus
offset, is shown on the graph.
The frequencies overcoming the limit will be investigated in the next steps.
If the YY Offset is set to 0 (disabled) the highest signals will be further
investigated even if they are under the limits.
13.4.3.1 Sweep running
From the upper left corner, the User can see if the Preselector is ON or OFF;
if the Preamplifier is ON or OFF; which attenuation is in use and the
minimum attenuation set (from 0 up to 50 dB).
The RBW for APD measurements must be mandatory set at 1 MHz and the
detector is Peak.
The third line shows the Ref level and the sweeping frequency.
13.4.3.2 Signal by
signal measurements
When the time for sweeping is elapsed the instrument automatically goes on
to the steps in which each of the n frequencies (n is set in the Num. of freqs
parameter) is measured for the period indicated in the Time field of the Setup
page.
For each frequency the display shows a screen similar to the one in the
following picture.
APD Mode Operating Instructions
13-13
From the upper left corner, the User can see if the Preselector is ON or OFF,
if the Preamplifier is ON or OFF, which attenuation is in use and the
minimum attenuation set (from 0 up to 50 dB).
The RBW for APD measurements must be mandatory set at 1 MHz and the
detector is Peak.
The second line shows whether the preceding step was Failed or Passed,
and in bold the time counter. Each step ends automatically when a period
equal to the value set in the Time field of the setup page is elapsed.
The third line shows in bold the tuned frequency, expressed in MHz.
On the right the battery icon indicates the charge status of the internal battery
of the PMM 9010.
On the ordinate of the graph there is the scale of probability values,
expressed in power of ten. The maximum value is mandatory to be 100% of
0
probability (10 ).
Below the graph the scale of the signal level is reported on the abscissa.
Also the limits are indicated on the grid with related labels.
13.4.3.3 Finish and Next During the test it is possible to partially or totally skip each one of the n steps,
using the Next Step key.
Step
There is also the possibility to finish the test at any time by pressing the
Finish Test key.
At the end of each step an indication “PASS” or “FAIL” appears for a while,
depending on the test result.
13.4.3.4 Report
When all the n steps are completed the final APD report appears on the
screen. Refer to paragraph 13.4.2 of this manual for more information about
APD Report table.
13.4.4 Default
Press this button to restore the common (default) values for the whole Setup
page. The values are indicated in the explanations of each parameter in
chapter 13.3 of the present manual.
13-14
APD Mode Operating Instructions
13.5 Internal generator
Also in APD mode the PMM 9010 internal RF signal generator is available.
To activate the generator it is necessary to go back to the initial 9010 screen
(pressing ESC), then press Setup (fifth function key from the top).
Pressing the RF OUT button the receiver enters the RF Generator menu.
Such generator is an internal, highly stable and accurate, 50 Ohm RF
generator ranging from 10 Hz to 50 MHz.
It is a CW signal source tuned at the frequency set under the RF OUT Freq
window.
As usual, to set a given frequency it is therefore enough to edit the value with
the soft keys and the left and right arrows, confirming the selections entering
the units value (kHz, MHz or GHz).
Pressing 0 as first figure the decimal dot appears automatically.
The output level can be set between 60,0 and 90,0 dBµV with 0,1dB steps
using the RF OUT Level button.
If a higher or lower level is needed, the User shall adopt either an external
amplifier or an external attenuator.
With the PMM 9030/9060/9180 the Tracking On function is not available.
Using APD function, and in general when connecting PMM 9030/9060/9180,
the Tracking generator function is not available.
13.6 Panel Save and If the user needs to save a certain configuration for the APD mode, it is
possible to use the PANEL facility.
Recall
To enter the Panel function it is necessary to go back to the initial 9010
screen (pressing ESC), then press Setup (fifth function key from the top).
Then pressing the PANEL function key the User has access to the memory
of the receiver and is allowed to store up to 2 different setups that can be
recalled any time.
Pressing Save #1 or Save #2 the actual setup is stored in the internal
memory; with the two Recall buttons the corresponding setup is loaded to
the receiver.
Please remember each time one of the Save buttons is pressed, the stored
set-up is overwritten by the new one: the saved setups are therefore kept
memorized in the receiver until a new set-up is stored in the same memory.
The Default button can be used to load a default standard setup saved into
the memory at the factory.
Turn Off the Internal Generator, when it is not used, even in APD mode.
This prevents interferences and reduces the power consumption of the
9010 unit.
APD Mode Operating Instructions
13-15
This page has been intentionally left blank
13-16
APD Mode Operating Instructions
14 – Remote control
14.1 Introduction
PMM 9010 or PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P has been designed to allow remote
control operations through its either RS232 or USB (Rear) ports.
When using RS232 you can use only one instrument connected to PC
serial port. If using USB you can connect other instruments to the free
RS232 port and the PMM 9010 or PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P Receiver to the
USB 2.0.
PMM 9010 or PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P uses the same commands protocol
for both communications.
14.2 Communication
Half duplex communication is implemented. The RS232 port has a DB-9
female connector and the USB 2.0 has a USB-B connector.
A built-in automatic tool identify the type of communication used.
Standard communication is implemented at 115200 (default), 38400, 9600
bit/sec with 8 bit words, one start bit, one stop bit and no parity
(115200 N 8 1).
Rel 1.30 and later when supported by FPGA 0x1E and later supports also
RTS/CTS Handshake.
14.2.1 RS 232 (Speed)
Under Setup menu, as described in chapter 3 of this manual, there is the
RS232 speed selection.
Pressing the Left or the Right Arrow key, inside the Setup menu, the
second page appears. In the second page is the RS 232 Port speed setting
function.
Here it is possible to set the bit rate of the RS 232 serial port which
connector is located on the rear panel.
The actual setting is always shown between the parenthesis and it is
possible to choose between 9600, 38400 and 115200 bps.
The default speed, that is the one to be used for standard communication,
is 115200.
In case an optional device (ex. GPIB interface) is to be connected to the RS
232 port, refer to its operating manual to know the correct speed to be
selected.
14.3 Protocol
Be aware that only the PC can send the commands. PMM 9010 or PMM
9010/03P/30P/60P will answer when is inquired only.
The communication uses strings with variable byte width. The characters
used inside the strings are in ASCII format (00 - 127) at 7 bits. The most
significant bits are ignored in reception and set to 0 during transmission.
Every string starts with the special character “#” and stops with “*”.
14.4 Format
Commands are made of ASCII string delimited character “#” (0x23) and the
character “*”(0x2A)
Replies are terminated with <CR><LF> (\r\n)
All the following examples are indifferently referred to the PMM 9010
or the PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P.
Document 9010EN-31229-2.46 - © NARDA 2013
Remote control
14-1
14.5 PMM 9010
COMMANDs
Following are Commands to control and set various operating modes of PMM 9010,
that can be distinguished in two main groups:
• Query Commands
• Setting Commands
PMM 9010 and PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P can be remotely controlled also when
it is connected to its options such as 9030/9060/9180 and Click meter
Switching operation Box.
14.5.1 QUERY
Commands
Description
?IDN
This query command #?IDN* sends back a string containing information about
model, release and date of firmware.
Note that two <LF> are appended to the string before the terminator
Example of reply: IDN=9010-FW - 1.12 20/10/059<LF><LF>
?S/N
This query command #?S/N* sends back a string
internally stored by manufacturer.
Example of reply: S/N=000WE50327
?UHT
This query command #?UHT* sends back a string expressing the actual hold time
currently or lastly used
Example of reply: UHT=1.9ms
?MAF
This query command #?MAF* sends back a string expressing the tuning frequency,
in exponential notation, for manual mode. Unit is fixed MHz.
Example of reply: MAF= 1.500000e+07 which means that the tuned frequency in
manual mode is 15MHz
?MHT
This query command #?MHT* sends back a string expressing the HOLD TIME for
manual mode. Unit is fixed ms.
Example of reply: MHT= 1000 ms which means that the hold time in manual mode
is 1000ms (or 1s)
?MIL
This query command #?MIL* sends back a string telling whether MIL Filters are
available.
Reply is:
• MIL=N/A if MIL Filters are NOT available
• MIL=OK if MIL Filters are available
14-2
Remote control
containing serial number
?RBW
This query command #?RBW * sends back a string expressing the selected RBW.
The reply is made of 3 fields:
1. RBW=AUTO (9010 automatically selects the suitable RBW according the
tuned frequency) or RBW=MAN ( Operator selects manually the RBW)
2. Id identify the RBW as follows:
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
1 300kHz
2 100kHz
3 30kHz
4 10kHz
5 3kHz
Only for 9010

6 9kHz (Cispr 16-1)

7 200Hz (Cispr 16-1)

11  10kHz (MIL-STD-461) (only when available)

22  1kHz (MIL-STD-461) (only when available)

23  100Hz (MIL-STD-461) (only when available)

24  10Hz (MIL-STD-461) (only when available)
Only for Downconverter

9 1MHz (Cispr 16-1)

10 120kHz (Cispr 16-1)

12 9kHz (Cispr 16-1)
3. RBW NickName (a mnemonic name)
Example of reply: RBW=AUTO 6 (9k_CISPR) which means that selection is
automatically made by 9010, the RBW id is 6 (9kHz (Cispr 16-1). (9k_CISPR) is
the nickname to quickly identify it
?CRA
This query command #?CRA* sends back a string telling whether RMS-AVG
detector is available.
Reply is:
• CRA=N/A if RMS-AVG detector is NOT available
• CRA=OK if RMS-AVG detector is available
?BAT
This query command #?BAT* sends back a string containing the battery
information. The format of replies in case of only 9010 or 9010/30P is:
BAT=V.vv;Flag
While when a 9030 or 9060 is connected the reply is:
BAT=V.vv,U.uu; Flag
Where V.vv is the voltage of 9010 battery and is expressed in Volt. When the 9010
is powered, V.vv becomes the string ***
U.uu is the voltage of 9030 or 9060 battery and is expressed in Volt.
Flag can have both ‘1’ or ‘0’ value and it is intended for knowing whether the value
has been refreshed since it was last read. When Flag is ‘1’ it means that the battery
voltage has been updated while when it is ‘0’ means that the value is the same as it
was read before.
Here are some example:
• BAT=8.12,7.39;1 (9010 battery is 8.12V, 9030 battery is 7.39V and the
values have been updated)
• BAT=8.12,7.39;0 (9010 battery is 8.12V, 9030 battery is 7.39V but the
values have NOT been updated and thus they are the same as last
reading)
• BAT=***;1 (9010 is powered and information is updated)
Remote control
14-3
?DET
This query command #?DET* sends back a string reporting the five detector for
manual mode. Unit is fixed dBµV. Each value is separated by a semicolon. The
order is Peak; Qpeak; RMS;AVG;C-RMS:C-AVG
In case Qpeak is not available (RBW other than 200Hz, 9kHz [only for Band B]
,120kHz) Qpeak field is replaced by the string “----“.
In case C-RMS or C-AVG is not available (RBW other than 200Hz,
9kHz,120kHz,1MHz) respective field is replaced by the string “----“.
An additional string “OVER;” is appended at the end whenever an over range
condition occurred
Example of reply: DET=23.22;17.09;16.23;11.36,16.01,15.50;
(which
means
Peak=23.22;
Qpeak=17.09;
RMS=16.23;AVG=11.36;CRMS=16.01;C-Avg=15.50
Example of reply (No Cispr filter selected, over range shown):
DET=17.20;-----;11.98;9.57;-----;-----;OVER;
?TAT
This query command #?TAT * sends back a string expressing MinAtt value. The
reply is a string representing the minimum reachable value of attenuator in dB
Example of reply: TAT=10 which means that MinAtt is 10dB
?MAT
This query command #?MAT * sends back a string expressing the Attenuator
status for Manual mode. The reply is made of 2 fields:
• MAT=AUTO (9010 automatically selects the most suitable attenuator to get
best dynamic range) or MAT=MAN ( the operator selects manually the
attenuator)
• Value (in dB) of current attenuator
Example of reply: MAT=AUTO; 20 which means that the Attenuator is now
switched to 20dB automatically by 9010
?MPA
This query command #?MPA * sends back a string expressing the Preamplifier
status for Manual mode. The reply is either:
• MPA=Off (Preamplifier in Manual Mode is OFF)
• MPA =On (Preamplifier in Manual Mode is ON)
?MPS
This query command #?MPS * sends back a string expressing the Preselector
status for Manual mode. The reply is either:
• MPS=Off (Preselector in Manual Mode is OFF)
• MPS =On (Preselector in Manual Mode is ON)
?PLM
This query command #?PLM* sends back a string expressing the Pulse Limiter
status. The reply is either:
• PLM =Off (Pulse Limiter is OFF)
• PLM =On (Pulse Limiter is ON)
?FSF n
This query command #?FSF n * sends back the complete record in the format as
described in separate document tagged as n. If n =0 then the record is the one just
measured.
In case no records are available the reply is:
FSA= N/A
Otherwise the 9010 sends a Little Endian 32 bit long representing the size of
the array the will follow
14-4
Remote control
?FSA
This query command #?FSA * sends back a string expressing the number of
Sweep Records available.
The reply: FSA= n: bands(1),Detector(1);
bands(2),Detector(2);………..; bands(n),Detector(n)
Where
•
n is the number of records available.
•
Band (k) expresses the bands (or part of them) present in the sweep. k
varies from 1 to n.
o 0x01 --> Band A
o 0x02 --> Band B
o 0x04 --> Band C
o 0x08 --> Band D
o 0x10 --> Band E
•
Detector (k) expresses the Detector used t in the sweep. k varies from 1 to n
o 0x0001 --> Peak
o 0x0002 --> Avg
o 0x0004 --> RMS
o 0x0008 --> QPeak
o 0x0010 --> C-Rms
o 0x0020 --> C-Avg
o 0x0200 --> Smart Avg
o 0x0400 --> Smart RMS
o 0x0800 --> Smart QPeak
o 0x1000 --> Smart C-Rms
o 0x2000 --> Smart C-Avg
In case no records are available the reply is:
FSA= N/A
Example of reply:
FSA= 4:1,2049;3,2049;2,2049;1,1;
?TGS
This query command #?TGS * sends back a string expressing the 9010 Built-In
Generator status. The reply is either:
• TGS=Off (9010 Built-In Generator is OFF)
• TGS =On (9010 Built-In Generator is OFF)
? TGT
This query command #?TGT * sends back a string expressing the Tracking status
of 9010 Built-In Generator. The reply is either:
• TGT=Off ( 9010 Built-In Generator is no tracking but is tuned on a fixed
frequency, set by STGF)
• TGT =On ((9010 Built-In Generator is tracking the same frequency tuned
on the receiver)
?TGF
This query command #?TGF * sends back a string expressing the tuning
frequency, in exponential notation, for the 9010 Built-In Generator. Unit is fixed
MHz.
Example of reply: TGF = 1.500000e+07 which means that the tuning frequency for
9010 Built-In Generator (when is not tracking) is 15MHz
?TGL
This query command #?TGL * sends back a string expressing the output level of
9010 Built-In Generator. Unit is fixed dBµV.
Example of reply: TGL = 90.0 which means that the output level of 9010 Built-In
Generator is 90.0 dBµV
Remote control
14-5
?BCD
?3PR
This query command #?BCD * sends back a string expressing whether the OpticFibre Downconverter (3 GHz) is linked and ready. The reply is either:
• BCD=Off (The Downconverter is not available)
• BCD=Off;30P (9010/30P connected)
• BCD=On (The PMM9030 is ready)
• BCD=On ;9060 (The PMM9060 is ready)
This query command #?3PR * sends back a string expressing whether the
apparatus is a PMM 9010/30P and in which mode. The reply is either:
• 3PR =CON (The PMM 9010/30P is ready for conducted frequency range )
• 3PR =RAD (The PMM 9010/30P is ready for radiated frequency range )
• 3PR=NUL (The PMM 9010/30P is not ready)
?DMD
This query command #?DMD * sends back a string expressing the status of
demodulator. The reply is either:
• DMD=Off (The Demodulator is OFF)
• DMD =AM (The Demodulator is On and demodulating AM )
?DMV
This query command #?DMV * sends back a string expressing the volume of
demodulator. The reply is made of the string “DMV=” followed by the magnitude of
volume ranging from 0 to 100
• DMV=50 (The Demodulator Volume is 50)
?ART
This query command #?ART* sends back a string expressing the Start frequency,
in exponential notation, for analyzer mode. Unit is fixed MHz.
Example of reply: ART = 1.500000e+07 which means that the start frequency in
Analyzer mode is 15MHz
?AOP
This query command #?AOP* sends back a string expressing the Stop frequency,
in exponential notation, for analyzer mode. Unit is fixed MHz.
Example of reply: AOP = 3.000000e+07 which means that the Stop frequency in
Analyzer mode is 30MHz
?ACE
This query command #?ACE* sends back a string expressing the Center
frequency, in exponential notation, for analyzer mode. Unit is fixed MHz.
Example of reply: ACE = 1.500000e+07 which means that the Center frequency in
Analyzer mode is 15MHz
?ASP
This query command #?ASP* sends back a string expressing the Spanfrequency,
in exponential notation, for analyzer mode. Unit is fixed MHz.
Example of reply: ASP = 3.000000e+07 which means that the Span frequency in
Analyzer mode is 30MHz
?AAT
This query command #?AAT * sends back a string expressing the Attenuator status
for Analyzer mode. The reply is made of 2 fields:
• AAT =AUTO (9010 automatically selects the most suitable attenuator to get
best dynamic range) or AAT =MAN (operator selects manually the
attenuator)
• Value (in dB) of current attenuator
Example of reply: AAT =AUTO; 20 which means that the Attenuator is now
switched to 20dB automatically by 9010
?APA
14-6
This query command #?APA * sends back a string expressing the Preamplifier
status for Analyzer mode. The reply is either:
• APA =Off (Preamplifier in Analyzer Mode is OFF)
• APA =On (Preamplifier in Analyzer Mode is ON)
Remote control
?APS
This query command #?APS * sends back a string expressing the Preselector
status for Analyzer mode. The reply cab be:
• APS =Off (Preselector in Analyzer Mode is OFF)
• APS =On (Preselector in Analyzer Mode is ON)
• APS =*** (Preselector in Analyzer Mode is OFF because the span
overlaps its single range)
?ADT
This query command #?ADT * sends back a string expressing the detector used for
Analyzer mode. The reply cab be:
• ADT =Peak
• ADT =Avg
• ADT =Rms
?AHT
This query command #?AHT* sends back a string expressing the HOLD TIME for
Analyzer mode. Unit is fixed ms.
Example of reply: AHT= 1000 ms which means that the hold time in Analyzer mode
is 1000ms (or 1s)
?SRT
This query command #?SRT* sends back a string expressing the Start frequency,
in exponential notation, for Sweep mode. Unit is fixed MHz.
Example of reply: SRT = 1.500000e+07 which means that the start frequency in
Sweep mode is 15MHz
?SOP
This query command #?SOP* sends back a string expressing the Stop frequency,
in exponential notation, for Sweep mode. Unit is fixed MHz.
Example of reply: SOP = 3.000000e+07 which means that the Stop frequency in
Sweep mode is 30MHz
?SAT
This query command #?SAT * sends back a string expressing the Attenuator status
for Sweep mode. The reply is made of 2 fields:
• SAT =AUTO (9010 automatically selects the most suitable attenuator to get
best dynamic range)
• Value (in dB) of current attenuator
Example of reply: SAT =AUTO; 20 which means that the Attenuator is now
switched to 20dB automatically by 9010
?SPA
This query command #?SPA * sends back a string expressing the Preamplifier
status for Sweep mode. The reply is either:
• SPA =Off (Preamplifier in Analyzer Mode is OFF)
• SPA =On (Preamplifier in Analyzer Mode is ON)
?SPS
This query command #?SPS * sends back a string expressing the Preselector
status for Sweep mode. The reply cab be:
• SPS =Off (Preselector in Analyzer Mode is OFF)
• SPS =On (Preselector in Analyzer Mode is ON)
Remote control
14-7
?SDT
This query command #?SDT * sends back a string expressing the detector used for
Sweep mode. The reply is made of several field representing the mode and, in case
of smart detector function, the limit name and margin on which the smart detector is
based:
• SDT =Peak
• SDT =Peak
• SDT =Avg
• SDT =Rms
• SDT =C-Rms
• SDT =C-Avg
• SDT=Smart QPeak (CISPR 22-A +0dB)
?SHT
This query command #?SHT* sends back a string expressing the HOLD TIME for
Sweep mode. Unit is fixed ms.
Example of reply: SHT= 1000 ms which means that the hold time in Sweep mode
is 1000ms (or 1s)
Note that the Hold Time is automatically changed when detector is set to Smart
mode. In this case when the command SSDT is received the Hold Time = Min(Hold
Time, 1000). If one wants to set it lower than 1000 in smart mode, the user should
send the holdtime command (SSHT) later than SSDT command.
?UPP
This query command #?UPP* sends back a string expressing the status of input
PINs of the User Port. Each Pin has its own contribution according to its index as
follows:
IN0= 2^0
IN1= 2^1
IN2= 2^2
IN3= 2^3
Thus, the number read back is the sum of each weighted contribution
Example of reply: UPP= 5 means that user port pins IN0 and IN2 are high level
while user port pins IN1 and IN3 are low-level
?DPY
This query command #?DPY* sends back a the bitmap of display hardcopy
?CFA
This query command #?CFA* sends back a string in the format CFA=n,(LABEL)
where n is the ID of the conversion factor as shown in 9010 menu and LABEL is its
temporary name as it was last labelled. If No conversion factor is active the reply is:
CFA= NONE
Example of reply: CFA=1,(PROBE) means that conversion factor 1 is active and it
was last named as PROBE
?CKR
14-8
This query command #?CKR * sends back the complete record of a click Report in
the format as described in separate document.
In case no records are available the reply is:
CKR= N/A
Remote control
14.5.2 SETTING
Commands
Behaviour
SDIS
Dyn;
RefLev;
This setting command sets both Display Dynamic and Reference Level.
Dyn represents the Display dynamic range shown And is expressed in dB. Value
must be 80 ,100, 120.
RefLevel represents the Display reference level (top of digram) shown end is
expressed in dBµV. Value must can range from 65dBµV and 145dBµV. Note that
reference level could be rounded by 9010 in order to best fit it.
The reply is DIS=OK which acknowledges the command has been granted or
o DIS =ERR 1 when Dyn is else than 80,100 or 120. The command is ignored.
o DIS =ERR 2 when RefLevel is out of range. The command is ignored.
The command reflects the settings for all three modes: Manual, Sweep and Analyzer.
Example:
#SDIS 100;110;*
Sets the display dynamic to 100 dB and reference level to 110dBµV.
SMAF f
This setting command sets the tuning frequency for manual mode. The string (f) can
be in exponential form and should be expressed in Hz. The reply is MAF=OK which
acknowledges the command has been granted or MAF=SERR if the command has
been ignored.
When the command is granted the 9010 goes to manual mode automatically
Example: #SMAF150e3* Sets the manual frequency to 150kHz
SMHT h
This setting command sets hold time for manual mode. The string (h) should be
expressed in ms. The reply is MHT=OK which acknowledges the command has
been granted or MHT =SERR if the command has been ignored.
When the command is granted the 9010 goes to manual mode automatically.
Example: #SMHT 1500* Sets the hold time, for manual mode, to 1500 ms (or 1.5s)
SRBW b
This setting command sets RBW. The argument (b) should be a string representing
the RBW as follows:
o 0 RBW is Automatic so that the 9010 automatically selects the
suitable RBW according to the tuned frequency
o 1 300kHz
o 2 100kHz
o 3 30kHz
o 4 10kHz
o 5 3kHz
o Only for 9010
 6 9kHz (Cispr 16-1)
 7 200Hz (Cispr 16-1)
 11  10kHz (MIL-STD-461) (only when available)
 22  1kHz (MIL-STD-461) (only when available)
 23  100Hz (MIL-STD-461) (only when available)
 24  10Hz (MIL-STD-461) (only when available)
o Only for Downconverter
 9 1MHz (Cispr 16-1)
 10 120kHz (Cispr 16-1)
 12 9kHz (Cispr 16-1) ; No QPeak available
The reply is RBW =OK which acknowledges the command has been granted or
RBW =SERR if the command has been ignored.
Example: #S RBW 3* sets the RBW to 30kHz and disables Auto RBW mode
Example: #S RBW 0* turn the RBW mode in Automatic
Remote control
14-9
SMAN
This setting command puts the 9010 in manual mode. The reply is always MAN=OK
which acknowledges the command has been granted.
The 9010 goes to manual mode.
Example: #SMAN *
SMANP
This setting command puts the 9010 in manual mode and sets the default value to
the following settings:
• RBW Automatic
• Attenuator Automatic
• MinAtt=10 dB
• Preselector On
• Preamplifier OFF
• Hold Time =1000ms
• Pulse Limiter = OFF
• TG=OFF
The reply is always MANP=OK which acknowledges the command has been
granted.
The 9010 goes to manual mode.
Example: #SMANP*
STAT b
This setting command sets MinAtt to the value indicated by (b) which range from 0dB
to the maximum the 9010/9030/9060/9180 can set and must be in step of 5dB. The
reply is TAT=OK which acknowledges the command has been granted or TAT
=SERR if the command has been ignored.
Example: #STAT 10*
SMAT a
This setting command sets Attenuator, for Manual Mode, to the value indicated by (a)
which can be 0 to 35 (55). Automatic Attenuator feature is disabled. If (a) is a
negative figure then the Automatic Attenuator feature is turned on. The reply is
MAT=OK which acknowledges the command has been granted or MAT =SERR if
the command has been ignored.
When the command is granted the 9010 goes to manual mode automatically.
Example: #SMAT 15* (set attenuator to 15dB and disable Automatic Attenuator
feature)
Example: #SMAT -1* (Enable Automatic Attenuator feature)
SMPA a
This setting command switches Preamplifier, for Manual Mode, according the
parameter (a) which can be either On or OFF.
The reply is MPA=OK which acknowledges the command has been granted or MPA
=SERR if the command has been ignored.
When the command is granted the 9010 goes to manual mode automatically.
Example: #SMPA ON*
Example: #SMPA OFF*
SMPS a
This setting command switches Preselector, for Manual Mode, according the
parameter (a) which can be either On or OFF.
The reply is MPS=OK which acknowledges the command has been granted or MPS
=SERR if the command has been ignored.
When the command is granted the 9010 goes to manual mode automatically.
Example: #SMPS ON*
Example: # SMPS OFF*
14-10
Remote control
SPLM a
This setting command switches the Pulse Limiter; according the parameter (a) which
can be either On or OFF.
The reply is PLM =OK which acknowledges the command has been granted or PLM
=SERR if the command has been ignored.
Example: # PLM ON*
Example: # PLM OFF*
STGS a
This setting command switches the 9010 Built-In Generator; according the parameter
(a) which can be either On or OFF.
The reply is TGS =OK which acknowledges the command has been granted or TGS
=SERR if the command has been ignored.
Example: # TGS ON*
Example: # TGS OFF*
STGT a
This setting command changes 9010 Built-In Generator tracking mode; according the
parameter (a) which can be either On or OFF.
When tracking mode is ON the 9010 Built-In Generator is tuned on the same
receiver frequency. When tracking mode is OFF the 9010 Built-In Generator is tuned
frequency previously set by command STGF
The reply is TGT =OK which acknowledges the command has been granted or TGT
=SERR if the command has been ignored.
Example: # TGT ON*
Example: # TGT OFF*
STGF f
This setting command sets the tuning frequency for 9010 Built-In Generator when is
not tracking (STGT OFF). The string (f) can be in exponential form and should be
expressed in Hz.
Frequency should range between 1 kHz and 50MHz inclusive.
The reply is TGF=OK which acknowledges the command has been granted or TGF
=SERR if the command has been ignored.
Example: #STGF 150e3* Sets the tuning frequency, for 9010 Built-In Generator, to
150kHz
STGL l
This setting command sets the output level of 9010 Built-In Generator. The string (l)
should be expressed in dBµV.
Level should range between 60 and 90 inclusive
The reply is TGL=OK which acknowledges the command has been granted or TGL
=SERR if the command has been ignored.
Example: # STGL 85.5* Sets the output level of 9010 Built-In Generator to
85.5dBµV.
SDMD
This setting command switches the Demodulator; according the parameter (a) which
can be either On or OFF.
The reply is DMD =OK which acknowledges the command has been granted or DMD
=SERR if the command has been ignored.
Example: # DMD ON*
Example: # DMD OFF*
SDMV v
This setting command sets the volume of demodulator. The string (v) should be in
the range of 0 to 100.
The reply is DMV =OK which acknowledges the command has been granted or DMV
=SERR if the command has been ignored.
Example: #SDMV 50* Sets the volume of demodulator to half of the audio power.
Remote control
14-11
SAFF start,stop
This setting command sets both Start and Stop frequency for Analyzer mode. The
strings (Start and Stop) can be in exponential form and should be expressed in Hz.
The reply is AFF=OK which acknowledges the command has been granted or AFF
=SERR if the command has been ignored.
Example: #SAFF 150e3,30e6* Sets the Start frequency to 150kHz and Stop
frequency to 30MHz for Analyzer mode
SART f
This setting command sets the Start frequency for Analyzer mode. The string (f) can
be in exponential form and should be expressed in Hz. The reply is ART=OK which
acknowledges the command has been granted or ART =SERR if the command has
been ignored.
Example: #SART 150e3* Sets the Start frequency, for Analyzer mode, to 150kHz
SAOP f
This setting command sets the Stop frequency for Analyzer mode. The string (f) can
be in exponential form and should be expressed in Hz. The reply is AOP=OK which
acknowledges the command has been granted or AOP =SERR if the command has
been ignored.
Example: #SAOP 10e6* Sets the Stop frequency, for Analyzer mode, to 10MHz
SAAT a
This setting command sets Attenuator, for Analyzer Mode, to the value indicated by
(a) which can be 0 to 35 (55). Automatic Attenuator feature is disabled. If (a) is a
negative figure then the Automatic Attenuator feature is turned on. The reply is
AAT=OK which acknowledges the command has been granted or AAT =SERR if the
command has been ignored.
Example: # AAT 15* (set attenuator to 15dB and disable Automatic Attenuator
feature)
Example: # AAT -1* (Enable Automatic Attenuator feature)
SAPA a
This setting command switches Preamplifier, for Analyzer Mode, according the
parameter (a) which can be either On or OFF.
The reply is APA=OK which acknowledges the command has been granted or APA
=SERR if the command has been ignored.
Example: #S APA ON*
Example: #S APA OFF*
SAPS a
This setting command switches Preselector, for Analyzer Mode, according the
parameter (a) which can be either On or OFF.
The reply is APS=OK which acknowledges the command has been granted or APS
=SERR if the command has been ignored.
Example: # APS ON*
Example: # APS OFF*
SADT b
This setting command sets the detector for Analyzer Mode. The argument (b) should
be a index representing the detetector as follows:
o
o
o
1 Peak
2 Avg
3 Rms
The reply is SADT =OK which acknowledges the command has been granted or
SADT =SERR if the command has been ignored.
Example: # SADT 1* sets the detector to Peak for Analyzer Mode
14-12
Remote control
SAHT h
This setting command sets hold time for Analyzer mode. The string (h) should be
expressed in ms. The reply is AHT=OK which acknowledges the command has been
granted or AHT =SERR if the command has been ignored.
Example: #S AHT 1500* Sets the hold time, for Analyzer mode, to 1500 ms (or 1.5s)
SAGO
This setting command puts the 9010 in Analyzer mode. The reply is always
SAGO=OK, which acknowledges the command has been granted, followed by an
array, variable in size, representing the reply. Please refer to “Analyzer Reply”
section for details of the response.
The 9010 goes to Analyzer mode.
The 9010 goes to Analyzer mode.
Example: #SAGO*
SSTP
This setting command stops abruptly a running sweep in Analyzer mode. The reply is
always STP=OK, which acknowledges the command has been granted
SSRT f
This setting command sets the Start frequency for Sweep mode. The string (f) can
be in exponential form and should be expressed in Hz. The reply is SRT=OK which
acknowledges the command has been granted or SRT =SERR if the command has
been ignored.
Example: #SSRT 150e3* Sets the Start frequency, for Sweep mode, to 150kHz
SSOP f
This setting command sets the Stop frequency for Sweep mode. The string (f) can be
in exponential form and should be expressed in Hz. The reply is SOP=OK which
acknowledges the command has been granted or SOP =SERR if the command has
been ignored.
Example: #SSOP 10e6* Sets the Stop frequency, for Sweep mode, to 10MHz
SSPA a
This setting command switches Preamplifier, for Sweep Mode, according the
parameter (a) which can be either On or OFF.
The reply is SPA=OK which acknowledges the command has been granted or SPA
=SERR if the command has been ignored.
Example: #SSPA ON*
Example: #SSPA OFF*
SSPS a
This setting command switches Preselector, for Sweep Mode, according the
parameter (a) which can be either On or OFF.
The reply is SPS=OK which acknowledges the command has been granted or SPS
=SERR if the command has been ignored.
Example: #SPS ON*
Example: #SPS OFF*
SSDT b
This setting command sets the detector for Sweep Mode. The argument (b) should
be a character representing the detetector as follows:
o P Peak
o Q QuasiPeak
o A Avg
o R Rms
o N C-Rms
o C C-Avg
Optionally, the character ‘S’ may precede to activate the Smart Mode detector. Thus,
if Smart Qpeak is desired the command should be #SSDT SQ*
The reply is SSDT =OK which acknowledges the command has been granted or
SSDT =SERR if the command has been ignored.
Example 1: # SSDT P* sets the detector to Peak for Sweep Mode
Example 2: # SSDT SA* sets the detector to Smart Average for Sweep Mode
Remote control
14-13
SSHT h
This setting command sets hold time for Sweep mode. The string (h) should be
expressed in ms. The reply is SHT=OK which acknowledges the command has been
granted or SHT =SERR if the command has been ignored.
Note that the Hold Time is automatically changed when detector is set to Smart
mode. In this case when the command SSDT is received the Hold Time = Min (Hold
Time, 1000). If one wants to set it lower than 1000 in smart mode, the user should
send the hold time command (SSHT) later than SSDT command.
Example: #SSHT 1500* Sets the hold time, for Sweep mode, to 1500 ms (or 1.5s)
SLII n
This setting command recall and load into PMM9010 the built-in limit indexed by n.
The argument (n) should be a index representing the limit as follows:
• 0 "CISPR 22-A"
• 1 "CISPR 22-B"
• 2 "CISPR 14-1"
• 3 "CISPR 14-2"
• 4 "CISPR 14-3"
• 5 "CISPR 14-4"
• 6 "CISPR 11"
Special index is as follows :
• -1  Unloaded
The reply is SLII =OK which acknowledges the command has been granted or SLII
=SERR if the command has been ignored.
Example: # SLII 1* loads the limit "CISPR 22-B"
SLIM n
14-14
This setting command sets the Margin to be used with Smart Detector function. The
argument (n) in the range of -20 to 20.
The reply is LIM =OK which acknowledges the command has been granted or LIM
=SERR if the command has been ignored.
Example: #SLIM 2* Sets the threshold of smart detector to 2 dB below the limit.
Remote control
SLIW n, freq;
lev
This setting command is used for setting the custom limit frequency by frequency. It
consists of three fields as follows:
• n Is the index of frequency being written and it should range from 0 to 31
• freq Is the frequency, expressed in Hz (exponential notation allowed), being
written
• lev Is the level of the limit and is expressed in dBµV
The procedure to set a custom limit on PMM9010 is the following:
•
Send as many commands as the frequency points of limit are in upwards
order.
•
Terminate (and make it active) by sending the command SLIE
Here is an example how to make a custom limit on PMM9010:
•
#SLIW 0, 150e3; 66 * Send the first line 150kHz 66 dBµV
•
#SLIW 1, 500e3; 56 * Send the second line 500kHz 56 dBµV
•
#SLIW 2, 5e6; 56 * Send the third line 5MHz 56 dBµV
•
#SLIW 3, 5e6; 60 * Send the fourth line 5MHz 60 dBµV
•
#SLIW 4, 30e6; 60 * Send the fifth line 30MHz 60 dBµV
•
#SLIE Custom CISPR 14-1 * Send the name and make the limit active
Note that all the higher indexes in the limit are cleared. Therefore, a limit must be
made in upwards order otherwise all point, having a higher index previously written,
are cleared.
It is responsibility of the user to make sure the data sent are correct and coherent.
The reply is SLIW =OK which acknowledges the command has been granted or LIW
=SERR if the command has been ignored.
This setting command is used for setting the custom double value limit frequency by
SLDW n, freq;
levq, leva frequency. It consists of four fields as follows:
• n Is the index of frequency being written and it should range from 0 to 15
• freq Is the frequency, expressed in Hz (exponential notation allowed), being
written
• levq Is the level of the limit which refers to QPeak and is expressed in dBµV
• leva Is the level of the limit which refers to the alternate detector and is
expressed in dBµV
The purpose of this command is to have a double value limit that can be used along
with smart detector function when sweeping by the command SSFD:
The procedure to set a custom double value limit on PMM9010 is the following:
• Send as many commands as the frequency points of limit are in
upwards order.
• Terminate (and make it active) by sending the command SLIE
Here is an example how to make a custom limit on PMM9010:
• #SLDW 0, 150e3; 66,56 * Send the first line 150kHz 66 dBµV
• #SLDW 1, 500e3; 56,46 * Send the second line 500kHz 56 dBµV
• #SLDW 2, 5e6; 56,46 * Send the third line 5MHz 56 dBµV
• #SLDW 3, 5e6; 60,50 * Send the fourth line 5MHz 60 dBµV
• #SLDW 4, 30e6; 60,50 * Send the fifth line 30MHz 60 dBµV
• #SLIE Custom Double * Send the name and make the limit active
Note that all the higher indexes in the limit are cleared. Therefore, a limit must be
made in upwards order otherwise all points, having a higher index previously written,
are cleared.
It is responsibility of the user to make sure the data sent are correct and coherent.
The reply is SLDW =OK which acknowledges the command has been granted or
LDW =SERR if the command has been ignored.
Remote control
14-15
This setting command is used for naming the custom limit and making it active or
deactivating it. The command is made of the string LIE (the command itself) and a
string which represents the name of the limit it will be shown. Sending a LIE with no
argument (Limit name) deactivates all limit active, if any. This command is intended
for making a custom limit into PMM9010. For further information see command
SLIW.
When the command is received the limit is checked and, if data (frequency and level)
are coherent, the command is granted by replying SLIW =OK otherwise the replay is
SLIW =SERR
SLIE name
Example: # SLIE Custom Limit* checks the data previously loaded by SLIW
commands, names the limit as “Custom Limit” and activates it
Example: # SLIE * deactivates any limits
SLIC n, name
This setting command is used for naming the custom limit and storing it onto the
SoftKey.
The command is made of
• n which is the index from 1 to 4 which saves into permanent memory
• name which is a string representing the name of it
This command is intended for making a custom limit into PMM9010. For further
information see command SLIW.
When the command is received the limit is checked and, if data (frequency and level)
are coherent, the command is granted by replying SLIC =OK otherwise the replay is
SLIC =SERR
Example: # SLIC 1, MyLimit* checks the data previously loaded by SLIW
commands, names the limit as “MyLimit” and stores it on SofKey 1
SSDO
SSDOC
SSDOD
SSDOE
This command triggers a sweep based on set parameters. After this command has
been received all parameters concerning the sweep are checked out and, if
coherent, a sweep starts otherwise the related error is notified and the sweep is not
triggered.
The RBW is set to AutoCISPR. When in Downconverter Mode if the special case
are issued the RBW is as follows:
● SSDOC --> Force to have 120kHz RBW Cispr throughout the sweep
● SSDOD --> Force to have 120kHz RBW Cispr throughout the sweep
● SSDOE --> Force to have 1 MHz RBW throughout the sweep
During the sweep, for each step tuned, the PMM9010 sends a character 0x2E (“.”).
At the end, if not aborted by as the command ASBK, the string “SWP_END” is sent
to notify that the sweep has been done and available for uploading by the command
“?FSF 0”.
NOTE that all setting commands are ignored while the sweep is on while query
commands are granted as well as the command ASBK which allows aborting the
current sweep.
The reply is
• SDO=OK if the sweep is started or
• SDO=ERR 1 if there is en error in start or stop frequencies
• SDO=ERR 2 if Smart detector is set but not active limit
14-16
Remote control
SSFW n, freq
This setting command is used for creating a Frequency-Scan-Tab frequency by
frequency. It is made of two fields as follows:
• n Is the index of frequency being written and it should range from 0 to 99
• freq Is the frequency, expressed in Hz (exponential notation allowed),
being written
The procedure to make and use a Frequency-Scan-Tab on PMM9010 is the
following:
• Send as many commands SSFW as frequency points of table are in
upwards order.
• Send the command SSFD with step size set to zero
Here is an example how to make a Frequency-Scan-Tab on PMM9010:
•
#SSFW 0, 150e3 * Set the first freq to 150kHz
•
# SSFW 1, 500e3 * Set the second freq to 500kHz
•
# SSFW 2, 5e6* Set the third freq to 5MHz
•
# SSFW 3, 6e6* Set the fourth freq to 6MHz
•
# SSFW 4, 30e6 * Set the fifth freq to 30MHz
Note that all the higher indexes in the Frequency-Scan-Tab are cleared.
Therefore, a Frequency-Scan-Table must be made in upwards order. All points,
having a higher index previously written, are cleared.
Note that only the present frequencies will be tuned and measured as all
remaining will be completely neglected. Hence, it is responsibility of the user to
make sure the data sent are correct and coherent.
The reply is SSFW =OK which acknowledges the command has been granted or
SSFW =SERR if the command has been ignored.
Remote control
14-17
SSFD
FreqStart;
FreqStop;
FreqStep;
Detector;
HoldTime;
Rbw;
MinAtt;
Preamp;
Preselector;
ScanHoldT
14-18
Arguments are as follows:
• FreqStart = Sweep Start Frequency expressed in Hz
• FreqStop = Sweep Stop Frequency expressed in Hz
• FreqStep = Sweep Step Frequency expressed in Hz
o If FreqStep > 0 then a standard sweep, tuned step by step, is
made
o If FreqStep = 0 then the sweep will be made by tuning all the
frequencies which are listed in Frequency-Scan-Tab (which it
must have been written previously by command SSFW.
• Detector. In non –smart mode, any combination of the following
detectors can be used and combined. All the detectors set will be
measured and sent out. However, in Smart Mode only one detector at
time, in addition to PEAK which is always present, can be set.
o
Non Smart Mode (All detectors can be indicated at once). Order is
not important.

P Peak

Q Peak

N C-Rms

A Avg

R Rms

C C-Avg
o
Smart Mode (No more than 2 detectors can be indicated at once)

S  Smart Mode (this must be the first in the string)

Q Peak

N C-Rms

A Avg

R Rms

C C-Avg
• HoldTime = Hold Time for each step and it is expressed in ms. Note that
in case of Smart Mode HoldTime is used only when the disturbance is
measured again by the alternative detector as minimum time, depending
on the Rbw set, is used for the fast scan.
• Rbw. This is the index of Rbw to be used for the scan. Neither automatic
selection, nor automatic switch is performed. The user must issue a
suitable Rbw index. Index are as follows:
o 1 300kHz
o 2 100kHz
o 3 30kHz
o 4 10kHz
o 5 3kHz
o Only for 9010
 6 9kHz (Cispr 16-1)
 7 200Hz (Cispr 16-1)
 11  10kHz (MIL-STD-461) (only when available)
 22  1kHz (MIL-STD-461) (only when available)
 23  100Hz (MIL-STD-461) (only when available)
 24  10Hz (MIL-STD-461) (only when available)
o Only for Downconverter
 9 1MHz (Cispr 16-1)
 10 120kHz (Cispr 16-1)
 12 9kHz (Cispr 16-1); No QPeak available
Remote control
(Continued)
SSFD
FreqStart;
FreqStop;
FreqStep;
Detector;
HoldTime;
Rbw;
MinAtt;
Preamp;
Preselector;
ScanHoldT
•
MinAtt = Minimum attenuation allowed during sweeping. This parameter
ranges from 0 (no limitation) to the maximum the 9010/9030/9060/9180
can set. This parameter is normally used to avoid switching up the
sensitivity in order to either protect the input from high spikes or to
prevent switching down the attenuation when, for instance, the limit is so
high that it would be only waste of time.
•
Preamp. This Parameter switches the Preamplifier On or Off according
to its content as follows.
o On. It turns ON the preamplifier.
o Off. It turns Off the preamplifier.
•
Preselector. This Parameter switches the
according to its content as follows.
o On. It turns ON the Preselector.
o Off. It turns Off the Preselector.
•
ScanHoldT = Hold Time used in Smart Mode when tuning for Peak for
each step and it is expressed in ms. Note that this is used only in case of
Smart Mode and not in standard sweep. This parameters is not
compulsory and can be omitted if not required. I case it is not present,
minimum time is taken.
Preselector On or Off
This command triggers a free sweep (no automatic items are selected) based on
the provided parameters. After this command has been received, all parameters
issued in the command itself are checked out and, if coherent, a sweep starts
otherwise the related error is notified and the sweep is not triggered.
Moreover, using the Frequency-Scan-Tab, the user has the capability of tuning
only those frequencies which are suspected skipping thus the remainder. Hence,
saving a lot of time.
After the command has been received, the 9010 replies by sending a string which
reflects the status of parameter check as follows:
• SFD=OK<RC><LF> No error in parameters and sweep started.
• SFD=ERR 1<RC><LF> An Error was found in start or stop frequencies.
Errors can be one of the following:
o Start Frequency lower than minimum allowed frequency
o Stop Frequency higher than maximun allowed frequency
o Start Frequency higher than Stop Frequency
• SFD=ERR 2<RC><LF> An Error was found in step frequency. Step is
either
o Too small.
o Is equal to zero (use of Frequency-Scan-Tab) but there are less
than two frequencies in the table
• SFD=ERR 3<RC><LF> An Error was found in detector. Errors can be
one of the following:
o Invalid Detector or no detector found. Detectors must be
indicated by ‘P’,’Q’,’R’,’A’,’N’ and ‘S’ only
o Smart Mode selected but no active limit
o Smart Mode selected but no alternative detector
o Smart Mode selected but more than two alternative detector
indicated
Remote control
14-19
(Continued)
SSFD
FreqStart;
FreqStop;
FreqStep;
Detector;
HoldTime;
Rbw;
MinAtt;
Preamp;
Preselector;
ScanHoldT
•
•
•
•
•
SFD=ERR 4<RC><LF> An Error was found in HoldTime value.
HoldTime is either too big (>10s) or negative.
SFD=ERR 5<RC><LF> An Error was found in RBW. Errors can be one of
the following:
o Unsuitable RBW for the active unit (for instance 200HZ Rbw
while Downconverter is active)
o Unsuitable RBW for the detector previously selected (for instance
100kHZ Rbw and QuasiPeak selected).
SFD=ERR 6<RC><LF> An Error was found in MinAtt value. Errors can
be one of the following:
o MinAtt value is negative
o MinAtt value is higher than maximum available attenuation
o MinAtt value is not in step of 5
SFD=ERR 7<RC><LF> An Error was found in Preamp string. Preamp
string can be either ON or OFF only. String is not case sensitive.
SFD=ERR 8<RC><LF> An Error was found in Preselector string.
Preselector string can be either ON or OFF only. String is not case
sensitive.
Once the sweep is started, the 9010 sends the value of each detector chosen in
the command. Each detector is made of a Little Endian 16 bit integer which
represents the value of that particularly tuned frequency. The value is expressed
in hundredth of dBm. Therefore, for each step, there will be a packet of n
detectors (n *2 bytes).
The order of detectors is fixed and is not related to the order issued in the
command. For instance, PAQ is equivalent to QAP as well as RA is same as AR.
The order of detector is as follows (from the first to the last):
1. Peak (which is always present)
2. QPeak (QuasiPeak)
3. RMS
4. AVG (Average)
5. C-RMS
6. C-AVG
Special meaning has the value NOLEVEL, -32700 (Hex 8044), which informs that
the detector has not been measured. This happens, for example, in Smart mode
where the alternative detector is taken only for those frequencies the Peak was
above the limit.
14-20
Remote control
(Continued)
SSFD
FreqStart;
FreqStop;
FreqStep;
Detector;
HoldTime;
Rbw;
MinAtt;
Preamp;
Preselector;
ScanHoldT
FFT will be used, as opposed to standard sweep step by step, when the following
conditions are matched:
o Detector is either
o Peak (only) and HoldTime < 50ms or
o SMART and an alternate detector.
o Stop frequency <= 150kHz
o Span (Stop frequency - Start frequency) >= 5 kHz
o Step frequency = 50Hz
o RBW = 200Hz
After having terminated all steps and sent all data, the string
SFD_END<RC><LF> is then sent informing the user there are no more data left.
Any started sweep can be stopped by sending the command ASBK which
abruptly terminates it.
In case the sweep was prematurely terminated by the command ASBK, the end
of sweep (which will not contain all expected data) is SBK=OK<RC><LF>
Here is an example of the command:
#SSFD 1e6;10e6;10e3;PAR;0;6;10;OFF;ON*
Which triggers a sweep from 1 MHz to 10 MHz using a step of 5 kHz. Detectors
are Peak, AVG and RMS. The hold time will be the minimum suitable
(automatically adjusted by the unit). RBW is 9kHz. MinAtt is 10 dB which means
that the attenuator will not switch below 10 dB attenuation. Preamplifier is OFF
while the Preselector is turned on.
Here, for each step there will be a packet of 3 detectors per step (Peak, AVG and
RMS in this order) counting thus 6 bytes (3 * 2) per step.
Here is another example:
#SSFD 9e3;150e3;50;SPQ;1000;7;10;OFF;ON;100*
Which triggers a sweep from 9kHz to 150kHz using a step of 50 Hz. Detector is
Smart QuasiPeak using a hold time of 1s in re-measuring those frequencies
which value was over the limit scanned using 100ms holdtime . RBW is 200Hz.
MinAtt is 10 dB which means that the attenuator will not switch below 10 dB
attenuation. Preamplifier is OFF while the Preselector is turned on.
In this case, as all the needed conditions are matched , FFT is used to perform
the Peak scan.
Here, for each step there will be a packet of 2 detectors per step (Peak and
QuasiPeak in this order) counting thus 4 bytes (2 * 2) per step. Of course, most of
QuasiPeak value will be populated by NOLEVEL as QuasiPeak will be measured
only for few frequencies (the ones which value is above the limit).
Remote control
14-21
SCFW n, freq; lev This setting command is used for creating a conversion factor frequency by
frequency. It consists of three fields as follows:
• n Is the index of frequency being written and it should range from 0 to 499
• freq Is the frequency, expressed in Hz (exponential notation allowed),
being written
• lev Is the level of the limit and is expressed in dB
The procedure to creating a conversion factor on PMM9010 is the following:
•
Send as many commands as the frequency points of limit are in upwards
order.
•
Terminate (and make it active) by sending the command SFCE
Here is an example how to make a custom limit on PMM9010:
•
#SFCW 0, 150e3; -1 * Send the first line 150kHz -1 dB
•
# SFCW 1, 500e3; 0 * Send the second line 500kHz 0 dB
•
# SFCW 2, 5e6; 1.2 * Send the third line 5MHz +2 dB
•
# SFCW 3, 50e6; 1.1 * Send the fourth line 50MHz +1.1 dB
•
# SFCW 4, 300e6; 1 * Send the fifth line 300MHz +1 dB
•
#SCFE 2,Probe*
“PROBE”
Save it permanently as #2 into 9010 and name it as
Note that all the higher indexes in the conversion factor are cleared. Therefore, a
conversion factor must be made upwards otherwise all points, having a higher
index previously written, are cleared.
It is responsibility of the user to make sure the data sent are correct and
coherent.
The reply is SCFW =OK which acknowledges the command has been granted or
LCFW =SERR if the command has been ignored.
SCFE n, name
This setting command is used for saving the conversion factor (made by SCFW).
The command is made of the string:
• FCE (the command itself),
• n which is the index:
o From 1 to 4 saves into permanent memory
o 0 uses the factor temporarily
• name which is a string representing the name of it
This command is intended for creating a conversion factor into PMM9010. For
further information see command SCFW.
When the command is received the conversion factor is checked and, if data
(frequency and level) are coherent, the command is granted by replying SCFW
=OK otherwise the replay is SCFW =SERR
Example: #SCFE 2,Probe* checks the data previously loaded by SCFW
commands, names it as “Probe” and saves it as #2.
SCFA n
14-22
This setting command activates the conversion factor stored in the 9010 (if any)
where n is the ID of the conversion factor as shown in 9010 menu.
If n is not in the range 1 to 4 no conversion factor is active
The reply is:
CFA=OK (OFF) in case there is not active conversion factor
CFA=OK in case the conversion factor is active
Remote control
ASBK
This command aborts a sweep currently in progress previously started by command
SSDO or SSFD. The reply is either:
• SBK=OK which means the sweep has been stopped and all setting
commands are available again. In case the sweep was triggered by SSDO,
with partial data, data are available for uploading by the command “?FSF 0”
• SBK=SERR which informs that the sweep was not in need to be stopped
ASPA
This command suspends a sweep currently in progress previously started by
command SSDO or SSFD. There is no reply unless a sweep is not in progress in
which case the reply is:
• SPA=SERR which informs that the sweep was not in need to be paused
ASRE
This command resumes a sweep previously paused by command ASPA. There is no
reply unless a sweep is not in progress in which case the reply is:
• SRE=SERR which informs that the sweep was not in need to be resumed
SUPP n
This setting command #SUPP n* outputs on the User Port bit by bit the argument n .
Each Pin has its own contribution according to its index as follows:
OUT0= 2^0
OUT1= 2^1
OUT2= 2^2
OUT3= 2^3
SupplyOFF=2^4
Thus, the argument sent is the sum of each weighted contribution
The reply is UPP=OK which acknowledges the command has been granted or
UPP=SERR if the command has been ignored (IE argument >31).
Example: SUPP 5 will set:
• user port pins OUT0 and OUT2 to high level
• user port pins OUT1 and OUT3 are low level
• User Port Power Supply (+12V) ON
S3PRC
This setting command #S3PRC * sets the PMM 9010/30P to conducted mode
(BANDs A & B). The reply is:
• 3PR=OK (The PMM 9010/30P has been set for conducted mode )
• 3PR =BERR (The command has been ignored for one of the following:
• The connected apparatus is not a PMM9010/30P
• The instrument is not idling and therefore cannot switch to a different
mode. In such an event, stop the current process (Manual, Analyzer or
Sweep) and put it back to Idle.
• 3PR =SERR (The command contains a syntax error )
S3PRR
This setting command #S3PRR * sets the PMM 9010/30P to radiated mode (BANDS
C for 9010/03P and BANDS C, D & E for 9010/30P). The reply is:
• 3PR=OK (The PMM 9010/30P has been set for radiated mode )
• 3PR =BERR (The command has been ignored for one of the following:
• The connected apparatus is not a PMM9010/30P
• The instrument is not idling and therefore cannot switch to a different
mode. In such an event, stop the current process (Manual, Analyzer or
Sweep) and put it back to Idle.
• 3PR =SERR (The command contains a syntax error )
Remote control
14-23
14.5.3 Analyzer
Reply
The PMM 9010 replies to the command “SAGO” sending back an array of bytes
which contains all the information needed to draw a sweep.
Typically, the user should first send the PMM 9010 all the setting commands to
insure the receiver is correctly set on the wanted parameters and then read the reply.
Just as an example, the user could send the following commands:
14.5.3.1 Reply
example
#SAAT -1*
#SAPA Off*
#SPLM a*
#SAFF
150e3,30e6*
#SAHT 2*
#SADT 2*
.............
.............
#SAGO *
Set Attenuator Automatic mode
Switch Preamplifier OFF
Switch Pulse Limiter OFF
Sets the Start frequency to 150kHz
and Stop frequency to 30MHz
Sets the hold time to 2 ms
Sets the detector to AVG
More Command
More Command
Start Sweep in Analyzer Mode
The PMM9010 replies by sending a 48 bytes header followed by a variable size
array of integer (the size depends on frequency settings) as follows:
HEADER
Meaning
The first 8 Bytes are just a fixed header and acknowledge the command
ID Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
…
26
Value
A
G
O
=
O
K
0x13 (CR)
0x10 (LF)
Start
Frequency
Reserved
…
…
27
28
29
…
48
Attenuator
Little Endian 16 bit integer representing the attenuator used
Reserved
….
…
14-24
Little Endian 32 bit Float figure representing the start frequency of sweep
Stop
Frequency
Little Endian 32 bit Float figure representing the Stop frequency of sweep
Sep
Frequency
Little Endian 32 bit Float figure representing the step frequency of sweep
Remote control
********** End of Header ********** (continued)
From here all figures represent the level referred to the tuned frequency
And are expressed in hundredth of dBm
49
50
51
52
51
52
....
....
nn
nn+1
Level Fstart
Little Endian 16 bit integer representing the level referred to start frequency.
Level Fstart
+Fstep
Level Fstart
+2*Fstep
.......
.......
Level Fstop
Little Endian 16 bit integer representing the level referred to start frequency
plus step frequency
Little Endian 16 bit integer representing the level referred to start frequency
plus 2 * step frequency
..........
..........
Little Endian 16 bit integer representing the level referred to Stop frequency
The number of levels replied is calculated by the formula 1+(FstopFstart)/Fstep. However, because of the different approximation in managing
floating point figures, please note that the number of received levels may
slightly differ specially with big difference in (Fstop-Fstart).
It is always possible to terminate a sweep before its natural end by sending the
command SSTP.
Remote control
14-25
14.5.4 Sweep
Structure
The PMM 9010, in order to optimize memory, stores measures (sweeps) in dynamic
mode. This means that a single sweep does not have a fixed size but it varies
depending on the sweep itself. Moreover, in order to have a sweep made of different
steps (as for example band A and band B), often sweeps are split into two single
sweeps. Basically, the higher the span, the wider the size of sweeps. Here below
there is a comprehensive description of the structure in which a sweep is stored by
the PMM 9010.
The full structure is obtained by the reply to the command “?FSF n”.
The PMM9010 replies by first sending a Little Endian 32 bit long representing the
size of the array, then a 512 bytes main header plus an additional 512 bytes sweeps
header followed by a variable size array of integer (the size depends on frequency
settings) as follows:
ID Byte
1
2
3
4
Mnemonic
Size of data
Meaning
Little Endian 32 bit long representing the size in byte of full sweep
ID Byte
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
…
498
Mnemonic
Start
Frequency
Main Header
Meaning
Little Endian 32 bit Float figure representing the start frequency of full
sweep
Stop
Frequency
Little Endian 32 bit Float figure representing the Stop frequency of full
sweep
NumSweep
Detector
Little Endian 16 bit integer representing the number of single sub-sweeps
forming the full sweep
Little Endian 16 bit integer representing the detector used
Reserved
….
…
499
…
512
Conversion
Fatctor
Null terminated string containing the name of the conversion factor used
********** End of Main Header **********
14-26
Remote control
Sweeps header
ID Byte
513+(n-1)*32
514+(n-1)*32
515+(n-1)*32
516+(n-1)*32
517+(n-1)*32
518+(n-1)*32
519+(n-1)*32
520+(n-1)*32
521+(n-1)*32
522+(n-1)*32
523+(n-1)*32
524+(n-1)*32
525+(n-1)*32
526+(n-1)*32
527+(n-1)*32
528+(n-1)*32
529+(n-1)*32
530+(n-1)*32
531+(n-1)*32
532+(n-1)*32
533+(n-1)*32
534+(n-1)*32
Mnemonic
Start
Frequency
Sub1
Sweep #n
Meaning
Little Endian 32 bit Float figure representing the start frequency of subsweep #1
Stop
Frequency
Sub1
Little Endian 32 bit Float figure representing the Stop frequency of subsweep #1
Step
Frequency
Sub1
Little Endian 32 bit Float figure representing the Step frequency of subsweep #1
OffRec1
Little Endian 32 bit long representing the address of the array level of subsweep #1
This figure must be multiplied by 2
LenRec1
Little Endian 32 bit long representing the size (in 16 bit words) of current
sub-sweep #1
This figure must be multiplied by 2
Detector
Sub1
Little Endian 16 bit integer representing the detector used #1
The meaning of each individual bit is :
o 0x0001 --> Peak
o 0x0002 --> Avg
o 0x0004 --> RMS
o 0x0008 --> QPeak
o 0x0010 --> C-Rms
o 0x0020 --> C-Avg
o 0x0200 --> Smart Avg
o 0x0400 --> Smart RMS
o 0x0800 --> Smart QPeak
o 0x1000 --> Smart C-Rms
o 0x2000 --> Smart C-Avg
535+(n-1)*32 Reserved
…
….
544+(n-1)*32
…
Remote control
14-27
Then, the arrays containing the level related to the tuned frequencies can be
interpreted using the data OffRec and LenRec (respectively OffRec1, LenRec1
for sweep 1 and OffRec2, LenRec2 for sweep 2) as follows:
Level Array
From here all figures represent the level referred to the tuned frequency
And are expressed in hundredth of dBm
OffRecn+1
Level Fstart
Peak
Little Endian 16 bit integer representing the level referred to start frequency
of sub sweep n.
Level Fstart
Alternate
Detector
Little Endian 16 bit integer representing the level of the alternate detector
referred to start frequency of sub sweep n.
Level Fstart
+Fstep
Little Endian 16 bit integer representing the level referred to start frequency
of sub sweep n plus step frequency of sub sweep n.
Level Fstart
+Fstep
Alternate
Detector
Level Fstart
+2*Fstep
Little Endian 16 bit integer representing the level of the alternate detector
referred to start frequency of sub sweep n plus step frequency of sub
sweep n.
Level Fstart
+2*Fstep
Alternate
Detector
.......
.......
Level Fstop
Little Endian 16 bit integer representing the level of the alternate detector
referred to start frequency of sub sweep n plus 2* step frequency of sub
sweep n.
Level Fstop
Alternate
Detector
Little Endian 16 bit integer representing the level of the alternate detector
referred to Stop frequency of sub sweep n.
OffRecn +2
OffRecn +3
OffRecn +4
OffRecn +5
OffRecn +6
OffRecn +7
OffRecn +8
OffRecn +9
Little Endian 16 bit integer representing the level referred to start frequency
of sub sweep n plus 2* step frequency of sub sweep n.
OffRecn +10
OffRecn +11
OffRecn +12
....
....
OffRecn +
(2*LenRecn) +1
..........
..........
Little Endian 16 bit integer representing the level referred to Stop frequency
of sub sweep n.
OffRecn +
(2*LenRecn) +2
OffRecn +
(2*LenRecn) +3
OffRecn +
(2*LenRecn) +4
14-28
Remote control
14.5.5
Procedure to
read a measure
stored by the
PMM 9010
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
14.6 Special
notes for 9010F
Send the command #?FSF n * .
Wait for the size of array
Wait for the first 1024 bytes in order to get both main and sweeps header
Read the relevant data concerning Start, Stop of full sweep as well as single
sub-sweeps if they are more than one.
Go to the offset OffRec1 (OffRec1 *2) in the received buffer and read all the
LenRec1 levels.
If the number of Sub-Sweeps is 2, go to the offset OffRec2 in the received
buffer and read all the LenRec2 levels.
Next Address is (OffRec2+ LenRec1)*2
Programming differences between 9010 and 9010 Fast.
General
The query command #?IDN* sends back a string containing “9010F…..” and
information about release as usual.
Manual Mode
• The Demodulator is not activated. The reply is always DMD=OFF and the
command should not be never sent even if OFF.
Analyzer Mode
• The internal generator (TG) can only be activated at a fixed frequency and
no tracking.
• Be aware! To achieve the best performance, transfer data and process
time must be fast enough to be congruent with 9010F.
As the sweep data are contained in the header, the fact that the step used is different
from the 9010 does not affect the interpretation of the data that remains the same.
Sweep Mode
• The internal generator (TG) can only be activated at a fixed frequency and
no tracking.
• The step is not settable and must always be "Auto".
• Once the sweep is started, the 9010 sends back an array of 32 bytes
where the first 4 bytes are a Little Endian 32 bit floating point figure
representing the step of sweep. Then the value of each detector chosen
in the command step by step will follow. Each detector is made of a Little
Endian 16 bit integer which represents the value of that particularly tuned
frequency. The value is expressed in hundredth of dBm. Therefore, for each
step, there will be a packet of n detectors (n *2 bytes).
• The Frequency table can not be used..
• The Smart Detector can not be used.
Remote control
14-29
This page has been left blank intentionally
14-30
Remote control
15 – 9010F Fast
15.1 Introduction
to PMM 9010F
The PMM 9010F(Fast) is a powerful EMI receiver, fully compliant to CISPR
16-1-1, intended for measuring conducted and radiated interferences from
10 Hz up to 30 MHz, or even up to 3/6/18 GHz when matched with PMM
9030/9060/9180 extension unit (optional, future implementation). All
measurements performed by the PMM 9010F are according to the most
accepted standards like: IEC, CISPR, EN (EuroNorm), FCC, VDE,..
The PMM 9010Fdesign adopts an innovative philosophy made possible
only in the recent years by the availability of superior technology
components. This equipment is fully digital but the input preselector and
attenuator – and, of course, the output stage of the internal reference
generator - thus combining accuracy and reliability in an unique modern,
user-friendly EMI receiver and signal analyzer.
Document 9010EN-31229-2.46 - © NARDA 2013
9010F Fast
15-1
Please refer to the other sections of this manual for the information
not covered by this chapter and identical for the PMM 9010 model.
15.1.1 Principle of
operation
Differently from PMM 9010, which is a digital sweeping receiver based on a
zero-lock-time, step-by-step NCO (numeric controlled oscillator), fast
settling time FIR RBW filters followed by digital detectors - something
faster than conventional receivers anyway - the 9010Fis a real-time
gapless receiver based on FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) which evaluates
N frequencies in a single shot.
Real time means that the FFT calculation must be as fast as the incoming
data are sampled to achieve the result that no data are missed.
FFT itself would be not adequate for full compliant measurements without
preventing:
• Aliasing effect, by adopting an appropriate input filter which
suppresses the frequencies beyond the Nyquist limit.
•
Spectrum leakage, due to the fact that observation of the input
signal must be limited to a finite interval(an infinite series of
subsequent finite intervals in our method). An appropriate timewindowing function is applied so that the spreading or leakage of
the spectral components away from the correct frequencies is
negligible.
•
Picket fence effect, related to the resolution bias error that may
cause in an FFT spectrum the peaks to be measured too low and
the valleys too high in level. This phenomenon is avoided by
adding a certain number of overlapped FFTs, calculated in parallel
over almost the same input samples.
Thanks to these techniques the PMM 9010F has no gaps and detects any
CISPR pulse even at the lowest repetition rates.
The 9010F processes 6 detectors x 1024 frequencies x 16 FFTs at once.
In this way it is possible, for example, to carry out a complete fully CISPR
16.1.1 compliant measurement with 2-second hold time over the A band (9
-150 kHz with a 200Hz RBW filter) in less than 8sec.
15-2
9010F Fast
15.1.2 Instrument Items
PMM 9010F includes the following items:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
15.1.3 Optional
accessories
PMM 9010F can be used with several optional PMM accessories:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
15.1.4 Other accessories
EMI Receiver from 10 Hz up to 30 MHz
BP-01 Li-ion battery pack;
External power supply/battery charger;
Flexible black cover/accessories holding;
BNC-BNC coaxial cable 2m length;
RS232 cable, 2m;
USB cable, 2m;
Operating manual;
PMM 9010 Utility Software on CD;
Certificate of Compliance;
Return for Repair Form.
9010-BTA Serial Bluetooth Adapter;
PMM 9010-RMA Rack Mount Adapter for Rack 19”
L1-150M: Single line LISN, 150A (50Ω//1 Ω+5µH);
L2-16B: Two lines, Single phase, 16A LISN, (50Ω//5 Ω+50µH);
L3-32: Four lines, 3-phase, 32A LISN, (50Ω//5 Ω+50µH);
L3-64: Four lines, 3-phase, 64A LISN, (50Ω//5 Ω+50µH);
L3-100: Four lines, 3-phase, 100A LISN, (50Ω//5 Ω+50µH);
L1-500: Single line LISN, 300A LISN, (50Ω//5 Ω+50µH);
L3-500: Four lines, 3-phase, 300A LISN, (50Ω//5 Ω+50µH);
SBRF4 RF Switching Box (Switching Box for LISNs and Loop
Antennas)
SHC-1: 35 dB CISPR Voltage probe, 1500Ω;
SHC-2: 30 dB CISPR Voltage probe, 1500Ω;
RA-01: Rod Antenna (10 kHz – 30 MHz);
VDH-01: Van der Hoofden Antenna (20 kHz – 10 MHz);
GPIB to RS232 Adapter;
Triple Loop Antenna
Of course, the PMM 9010F can be used with other accessories available
on the market, like:
•
•
•
•
LISNs, any type;
Antennas and Loops;
Near Field Probes;
Various TEM/GTEM Cells
Be sure not to overload PMM 9010F: the input signal should not
exceed the maximum level indicated in the main specifications in
chapter 1.
Also do not apply any signal to RF generator output connector.
9010F Fast
15-3
15.1.5 Main
Specifications
Table 15-1 lists the PMM 9010F performance specifications.
The following conditions apply to all specifications:
• The ambient temperature shall be 0°C to 40°C
TABLE 15-1 Main Specifications
Frequency range
Resolution
Frequency accuracy
10 Hz to 30 MHz (CISPR-16-1-1 Full-Compliance
from 9 kHz to 30 MHz)
0,1 Hz
< 1 ppm
RF input
Z in 50 Ω, BNC fem.
VSWR
≥ 10 dB RF att.
0 dB RF att.
< 1.2
< 1.6
Attenuator
0 dB to 35 dB(5dB steps)
Pulse limiter
Built in (selectable)
Preamplifier gain
20 dB (after preselector, selectable)
Max input level
(without equipment damage)
Sinewave AC voltage
Pulse spectral density
137 dBµV (1 W)
97 dBµV/MHz
Preselector
One lowpass filter
< 9 kHz
Six bandpass filters
9 kHz to 150 kHz
150 kHz to 5670 kHz
5.67 MHz to 11.19 MHz
11.19 MHz to 16.71 MHz
16.71 MHz to 22.23 MHz
22.23 MHz to 30 MHz
IF bandwidth
6 dB bandwidth
CISPR 16-1-1 bandwidth (6 dB)
1, 3, 10, 30, 100, 300 kHz
0.2 and 9 kHz
(1)
10, 100 Hz and 1, 10 kHz (MIL-STD-461)
6 dB bandwidth (with 9030, 9060 and 9180)
120 kHz and 1 MHz (CISPR 16-1-1)
(1)
100 kHz and 1 MHz (MIL-STD-461)
15-4
9010F Fast
(1)
Noise level (preamplifier ON)
Preselector OFF, preamplifier OFF
9 to 150 kHz < -13 dBuV (QP 1s)
(200 Hz RBW)< -16 dBuV (AV 1s)
0.15 to 30 MHz< 5 dBuV (QP 1s)
(9 kHz RBW) < 0 dBuV (AV 1s)
Preselector OFF, preamplifier ON
9 to 150 kHz < -27 dBuV (QP 1s)
(200 Hz RBW) < -30 dBuV (AV 1s)
0.15 to 30 MHz < -9 dBuV (QP 1s)
(9 kHz RBW) < -14 dBuV (AV 1s)
Preselector ON, preamplifier OFF
9 to 150 kHz < -7 dBuV (QP 1s)
(200 Hz RBW) < -10 dBuV (AV 1s)
0.15 to 30 MHz< 5 dBuV (QP 1s)
(9 kHz RBW) < 0 dBuV (AV 1s)
Preselector ON, preamplifier ON
9 to 150 kHz < -24 dBuV (QP 1s)
(200 Hz RBW) < -27 dBuV (AV 1s)
0.15 to 30 MHz< -7 dBuV (QP 1s)
(9 kHz RBW) < -12 dBuV (AV 1s)
Spurious response
(PK 100ms)
< -7 dBuV, < 3 dBuV above 150 kHz
Measuring Detectors
(Four simultaneous in stand-alone,
all with PMM Emission Suite SW)
Peak, Quasi-peak, Average, RMS, RMS-Average, C(1)
Average, APD .
(1)
Smart Detector function (with 9030, 9060 and 9180)
Level measuring time
(Hold Time)
0.1 ms to 120 sec. (CISPR 16-1-1 as default)
Display units
Stand alone
(80 to 120 dB selectable dynamic)
With PMM Emission Suite SW on PC
(80 to 200 dB selectable dynamic)
dBm, dBµV
dBm, dBµV, dBµA, dBpW, dBµV/m, dBµA/m, dBpT
Spectrum
Span/division
From 100 Hz to 3 MHz
9010F Fast
15-5
Measurement accuracy
S/N > 20 dB
10 Hz to 9 kHz± 1.0 dB Typ
9 kHz to 30 MHz± 0.8 dB
Scan time
Sweep mode
(Full CISPR: preselector ON,
QP detector)
A band
(9 to 150 kHz)
(200 Hz RBW)
< 5 s (Hold time 1s)
< 8 s (Hold time 2s)
B band
(150 kHz to 30 MHz)
(9 kHz RBW)
< 20 s (Hold time 1s)
< 38 s (Hold time 2s)
Analyzer mode
(preselector OFF, Peak detector)
A band ( 9 to 150 kHz)
200 Hz RBW
< 0.45s (Hold time 100 ms)
B band (150 kHz to 30 MHz)
300 kHz RBW
9, 10 kHz RBW (gapless)
< 1 s (Hold time 1 s)
RF output
Frequency range
Level range
Level accuracy (10 Hz to 30 MHz)
Tracking (manual mode) & CW generator
Z out 50 Ω,BNC fem.
10 Hz to 50 MHz
60 to 90 dBµV (0.1 dB step)
0.5 dB
Auto Calibration
Internal reference source
< 1 s (Hold time 50ms)
Stand-alone display and measure Marker, marker peak, marker to center, highest peaks, move
functions
peak to Analyzer & Manual modes.
Store load:
- up to 11 traces (sweep mode)
- two panels
- 4 conversion factors
Built-in limits: CISPR 11, 14, 22.
Battery charge and voltage.
Display style, contrast, backlight.
Click functions (optional) (1)
I/O Interface Out
15-6
RS-232
High speed Optical (2 channels)
USB rear (front for future extension)
User port (Drives PMM LISNs and accessories)
Bluetooth (optional)
IEEE-488 (optional)
9010F Fast
Operating temperature
-5° to 45°C
Power supply
10 - 15 Volt DC, 2,5A;
Li-Ion rechargeable and interchangeable battery
(8h avg. duration)
AC universal adapter/charger
Dimensions
235 x 105 x 335 mm
Weight
4.3 kg
Note (1): Soon available
9010F Fast
15-7
15.1.6 Functional
description
The PMM 9010F features a completely new receiver architecture based on
the most recent DSP and FPGA technology:
Fig. 15-1 PMM 9010F Functional BLOCK Diagram
15.1.7 Ultra fast
measurement: an
unique feature of
the PMM 9010F
Scanning the CISPR band A (9 ÷ 150 kHz) and band B (150 kHz ÷ 30
MHz)may require very long time, even several hours.
Thanks to its architecture, to the large internal memory and the built-in FFT
capability, the PMM 9010F can take a “snapshot” of the whole band in a
very short time and in full compliance with the CISPR requirements.
This feature greatly increases the productivity of the test laboratory, and
allows more comprehensive analysis of intermittent disturbances with an
irregular repetition rate.
According to the selected RBW, the whole spectrum or a portion of it is
analyzed by FFT in sequence.
The following table shows spans related to RBWs
15-8
9010F Fast
RBW
Real time Span [MHz]
Over FFT [times]
300 kHz
33.5
1
100 kHz
3.76
2
30 kHz
1.6
6
10 kHz
2
16
3 kHz
0.65
16
9 kHz Cispr
1.84
16
200 Hz Cispr
0.041
16
15.2 Sweep Mode
The Sweep mode is used to operate the PMM 9010F as a scanning EMI
receiver. To enter this mode press the Sweep soft key on the main screen to
set the parameters for the scan. All the automatic settings (RBW, frequency
step, etc.) refer to the CISPR standard.
Fig. 15-2 Sweep
15.2.1 Ultra Fast FFT
scan
The Ultra Fast FFT (Fast Fourier Transform), as described at §15.1.8, allows
for assessing the EUT emissions across the whole spectrum in very short
time and in full compliance mode, thus avoiding the preliminary debugging
phases. The Ultra Fast FFT scan is also particularly suitable for those EUT
that cannot stay ON for a long time without getting damaged (e.g. small
electric motors, etc.) while maintaining the capability of performing a fullcompliant Quasi-Peak evaluation of all the frequencies.
As for the Analyzer operating mode, all the relevant information are reported
on the screen.
From the upper left corner, the User can see if the Preselector is ON or OFF;
if the Preamplifier is ON or OFF; which detector is in use and the relevant
hold time; if the input attenuation is Automatic or Manual and the set
attenuation and if the Minimum attenuation is 0, 10 or 20 dB.
Just above the graph there is on the left the Reference level. During the
scan, in the center above the graph the actual frequency measured and/or
any other relevant operation.
Below the graph the start and the stop frequency, and loaded limits, if any.
When the sweep has been executed, on the bottom of the screen the most
important sweep parameters are repeated.
If the graph has been loaded from the memory, just below the start
frequency there is the symbol # followed by the memory position loaded
(position number 2 in figure 4-1).
Please note that the information in the upper part above the graph refers to
the next sweep to be done, while the information in the lower part, below the
graph, concerns to the actual displayed data.
9010F Fast
15-9
The Sweep mode function is divided into five sub windows:
•
•
•
•
•
Measure
Limit
Display
Marker
Load Store
Always use Esc button to return to the previous view/condition.
15.2.2 Measure
The Measure button is used to set the scan parameters and to run the
sweep.
After having set the frequency band and the other parameters press the
Exec Sweep button to run the sweep.
To make subsequent sweeps with the same setting parameters, simply
press ReDo Sweep. This key is particularly useful to make comparisons e.g.
before and after EUT modification after having loaded a previously stored
track (see 4.6), as with the Re Do Sweep the original settings are kept for
the new measurement.
Once the sweep starts, it can be stopped at any time during the execution by
the Stop function key.
15.2.2.1 Frequency
The Frequency menu features five function buttons:
Pressing A Band the receiver will be set to scan the 9 - 150 kHz frequency
band. The definition of band A is a given in CISPR.
Pressing B Band the receiver will be set to scan the 0,15 - 30 MHz
frequency band. The definition of band B is a given in CISPR.
Pressing A + B Band the receiver will be set to scan the entire band from 9
kHz to 30 MHz.
In this way the Frequency Step and Resolution Bandwidth are set automatically
according to CISPR standard requirement.
The Start and Stop frequency buttons can be used to set any frequency interval
for the measurement; to enter the frequency values press the corresponding
function keys.
Pressing either one of these 2 keys the figures 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4 are selectable at
first; with the right arrow key it is possible to select the figures from 5 to 9, and
pressing again the right arrow key the units kHz, MHz and GHz becomes
accessible, as well as the decimal dot and the Back Space. The left arrow key
can be used as well to move back and forth from one screen to the other.
Pressing 0 as the first figure the decimal dot appears automatically.
To set a given frequency it is therefore enough to edit the value with the soft
keys and the left a right arrows, confirming the selections entering the units value
(kHz, MHz or GHz).
The figures entered appear in a small window just below the graph and the
default unit is MHz.
15-10
9010F Fast
15.2.2.2 Level
The Level function has 5 sub-menus, each one with several options..
Pressing the Display button it is possible to set two parameters: the
visualized Dynamic range(chosen between 80, 100 and 120dB) and the
Reference Level, that can be increased or reduced by steps of 5dB within
the range +80 dBµV to 135 dBµV (-25 to +30 dBm).
The Input button opens a submenu which is dedicated to the setting of the
input attenuator and to switch on-off the built-in preamplifier.
The PMM 9010F receiver takes automatically into account the settings of all
the Input parameters and always displays the correct value of the level. The
User is not required to make any correction to the readings.
15.2.2.3 Input:
Attenuators
and
preamplifier
Being entered in the Input submenu, to increase or decrease the attenuation
at the input, press Att + or Att -, and for each touch the attenuation is
increased or decreased of 5 dB (preset value). Depressing either one of
these keys force the receiver in manual attenuation.
When the input attenuation is 0dB (condition that can be achieved only if the
Minimum Attenuation is set to 0 dB as well), the yellow led to the left of the
input BNC connector is ON and indicates a warning status.
The Min Att button acts as a toggle switch: it selects or deselects the
minimum attenuation of 10 dB. When the minimum attenuation is selected,
the attenuator – doesn’t matter if in automatic or in manual condition cannot be lowered under 10 dB.
Unless specifically required by the test conditions, do not remove the
minimum attenuation of 10 dB.
With the Preamp key it is possible to insert or exclude the built-in low noise
preamplification of 20 dB.
The internal 20 dB preamplifier can be used when very weak signals have to
be investigated. As already mentioned, with the preamplifier ON the receiver
automatically takes into account the 20 dB gain when measuring the signals.
The Att Auto button is used to switch from the two conditions of manual or
automatic attenuation setting.
The “click” you may perceive is the auto-attenuator switching.
In case an OVERLOAD indication occurs it is necessary to add an external
attenuator to carry on the measurement without overpassing the declared
limit for continuous power or spectral density.
Using 0 dB attenuation PMM 9010F has no input protection.
This is a potentially dangerous condition for the input stage of the
receiver.
Use 0 dB attenuation only if you are very sure that your input signal is
less than 0.5 Vpp (or 106 dBµV).
Before to apply an unknown signal to PMM 9010F receiver, use an
oscilloscope or a wide band RF voltmeter to measure it. In any case set
Min. ATT at 10 dB and select the maximum available attenuation with
preamplifier OFF.
If needed, add an external coaxial attenuator on the input signal line.
9010F Fast
15-11
15.2.2.4 Misc
Under the Miscellanea functions menu it is possible to activate or exclude
the Preselector filters, the Pulse Limiter, and also to enter in the Tracking
generator menu pressing the RF OUT button.
The Preselector is composed by a group of filters automatically selected by
the PMM 9010F while it is sweeping or anyway measuring. The aim of the
preselector is to reduce the amount of out-of-band energy entering in the
receiver, thus helping a lot in reducing intermodulation problems and similar
undesired behaviors.
It can be set either ON or OFF with the associated button, and normally it
should be always enabled.
On the top left corner of the screen the symbol “Off” or “On” will be
displayed.
The Pulse Limiter is a very useful device to protect the input of the receiver
from transient overvoltages. Doing conducted emission tests, quite often
there are conducted disturbances (usually associated to switching
operations in the EUT or along the line under test) which are too high and
that propagates through the LISN up to the receiver. Sometime these
disturbances cannot be seen on the receiver because they are out of
measurement bandwidth, nevertheless the associate energy is high enough
to damage the input attenuator and/or the Analog-to-Digital Converter of the
PMM 9010F (the first mixer in a traditional receiver).
This pulse limiter has an integrated 10dB attenuator and a 30 MHz low-pass
filter.
When the Pulse Limiter is selected, on the upper part of the screen the
letters P.L. appear next the value of the Minimum Attenuation and the
reading on the receiver is automatically corrected for the attenuation factor of
the Pulse Limiter.
Pressing the RF OUT button the receiver enters the Tracking generator
menu.
15.2.2.5 RF Output
Generator
The RF Output generator is an internal, high stability and accuracy, 50
Ohm RF generator ranging from 10 Hz to 50 MHz.
NOTE: Due to the Ultra Fast FFT technology of the PMM 9010Fthe Tracking
function is disabled; thus the generator consists of a CW signal source tuned
at the frequency set under the RF OUT Freq window.
As usual, to set a given frequency it is enough to edit the value with the soft
keys and the left and right arrows, confirming the selections entering the
units value (kHz, MHz or GHz).
Pressing 0 as the first figure the decimal dot appears automatically.
The output level can be set between 60,0 and 90,0 dBµV with 0,1dB steps
using the RF OUT Level button.
The internal generator is also used for self-calibration of the PMM 9010F.
Turn Off the RF Output generator, if it is not used, while you are in
Scan Mode.
This prevents interferences and the measurements are more clean and
accurate.
15-12
9010F Fast
15.2.2.6 Detector
This menu allows the operator to select the most appropriate detector for
the test.
In Sweep mode the Peak, Average, RMS (Root Mean Square) and QuasiPeak detectors are available and can be selected via the appropriate button.
Hold time (ms)
The Hold Time (expressed in milliseconds) represents the time the receiver
uses to “take a snapshot” of the incoming signal and to measure it with the
chosen detector. When selecting a detector, the default hold time value is
automatically loaded. In some cases e.g. when the interference signals have
a low repetition rate setting a longer Hold Time may be necessary for
preventing the auto-attenuator to continuously switching up and down
To set the Hold Time to the lowest possible value (this value dynamically
depends from the measurement conditions), enter the figure 0; if a value
lower than the allowed is entered, the lowest possible value is automatically
selected.
The max. Hold Time that can be set is 120 sec.
15.2.2.7 Conversion
factor
When using a transducer– a Voltage or Current Probe, an Antenna, etc. – its
conversion factor must be added to the measured values.
The Conversion factor may also take proper account of losses as cable loss,
attenuators added externally to the receiver, etc.
The PMM 9010F can handle these factors in an automatic way and directly
correct the readings.
The PMM 9010F can store in its internal non-volatile memory up to 4
different correction factors, and use them one at a time when recalled.
However, the Conversion Factors shall be created and loaded via the PMM
9010F Software Utility.
Press the relevant button to load the conversion factor, and NONE to unload
it.
9010F Fast
15-13
15.2.3 Limit
Each emission standard has one or more limits the User shall comply with.
The PMM 9010F receiver has the possibility to load and activate one limit
with the simple click of a button.
The preloaded standard limits refer to the most popular EMC emission
standards: CISPR22, CISPR14 and CISPR11.
Other limits – or any custom designed limit – can be created, managed,
selected and loaded through the PMM 9010F Software Utility running on a
PC (and the test, of course, shall be handled via the PC software).
These additional custom limits cannot be stored in the memory of the PMM
9010F, but only in the one of the PC where the 9010FSW Utility is running.
The limits are shown on the scan display and they appear like a thin black
line when the Smart Detector function is not enabled, while one of them
appears in bold black when the Smart Detector function is active.
By pressing the NONE button all limits are deactivated.
15.2.4 Display
15-14
Pressing the Display button it is possible to set two parameters: the
visualized Dynamic range(chosen between 80, 100 and 120dB) and the
Reference Level, that can be increased or reduced by steps of 5dB within
the range +80 dBµV to 135 dBµV (-25 to +30 dBm); see also 4.2.
9010F Fast
15.2.5 Marker
Selecting this function a Marker is immediately enabled, and it appears on
the screen as a small black pointing down arrow corresponding to the
highest reading; simultaneously a small window shows up in the bottom left
corner of the screen, indicating the actual frequency and level read by the
marker.
The Marker function is not a simple search for the highest readings on the
screen – it would be a useless exercise that would display a number of
points all grouped together – but it’s a true peak search that measures the
degree of variation of the signal: a peak is so classified only if it “pops-up”
from the adjacent signals with at least 5 dB difference in amplitude.
Following this criterion, if the measured signal is a flat line no peaks will be
found.
Selecting Highest X – where X represents the maximum number of markers
found by the receiver during its sweep – few more markers are added, each
one “diamond” shaped, defined as per the previous explanation.
The maximum number of markers available is 10.
By using arrow keys it is possible to quickly move on markers from higher
amplitude (left arrow) to lower amplitude (right arrow), i.e. if the highest is
nd
selected, pressing the right arrow key the 2 highest is selected, then
rd
pressing again the same key the 3 highest and so on and so forth.
It is also possible to use the rotary knob to move from a marker to the next
one.
The marker under analysis (main marker) is a black arrow pointing down, the
others are diamond shaped.
Pressing the Peak button the marker returns to the highest reading.
In order to make easier and faster the evaluation of the more noisy signals,
the User can now select either the Analyzer or the Tune function, entering
respectively into a spectrum analysis of main marker position or in the
manual mode evaluation of it. To operate this two conditions please refer to
the appropriate section of this Operating Manual.
In manual mode, i.e. having selected Tune on the main marker, it is possible
to navigate from one peak to the other just pressing the arrow keys, without
to come back to the Sweep display and remaining in manual mode.
This is another unique feature of PMM 9010F to improve the productivity of
the test lab and make easier the work of the test engineer.
The Marker Off exits from the marker function.
9010F Fast
15-15
15.2.6 Load Store
Pressing this key allows the User to have access to the memory of the
receiver and enables the storing up to a number of different
configurations/sweeps that depends on the parameters set on the receiver
(i.e. the number of measured points). For example, using standard CISPR
parameters it is possible to store up to 15 sweeps on the A+B band.
Each new scan will be stored in the first available memory position thanks to
the button Store #x, where x is the first available position. When all positions
are occupied by a scan, this function is disabled until one of the previous
scan is erased.
To load a stored trace, press the Load #x button until the proper scan is
displayed; to unload a trace select the Unload Trace button.
Please note that the Load function is scanning the memory in a circular way,
therefore all the occupied memory positions are shown in sequence. When
the key shows “Load #4”, it means the trace #3 is displayed and that the #4
will be loaded after the key is pressed, and so on and so forth.
To erase a trace, press the Erase#x button.
Due to the structure of the memory, it is possible to erase only the latest
stored memory, with a sequence “LIFO” (Last In First Out), therefore after
having erased the #x, the #(x-1) will be the trace to be erased. With
reference to the example at the left, the last stored trace is the #4, and it is
the first that will be erased. After that, the key will show “Erase #3”, and so
on and so forth.
A more advanced trace management could be done using the PMM 9010F
Software Utility.
Turn Off the RF Output generator, if it is not used, while you are in
Scan Mode.
This prevents interferences and the measurements are more clean and
accurate.
15-16
9010F Fast
15.3 Analyzer Mode
To enter in the ANALYZER Mode press the Analyzer soft key on the main
screen.
In this mode the receiver works as a Spectrum Analyzer maximizing the
sweep speed.
The analysis is done at the selected span frequency.
The marker provides accurate measurement of the signals frequency and
level.
Analyzer Mode display:
Fig. 15-3 Spectrum
The SPAN per division is automatically calculated over 10 divisions.
The minimum SPAN is 100Hz per division.
On the screen of the Analyzer Mode all the relevant information are reported.
From the upper left corner, the User can see if the Preselector is ON or OFF;
if the Preamplifier is ON or OFF; which detector is in use and the relevant
hold time; if the input attenuation is Automatic or Manual and the set
attenuation and if the Minimum attenuation is 10 dB or 0dB.
Just above the graph, from left to right, there is the Reference level, the
Resolution bandwidth and the span value.
Below the graph the start, center and stop frequency.
The bottom left corner is dedicated to the marker indication, with actual
frequency and level of the marker.
9010F Fast
15-17
The Spectrum mode function is divided into five sub windows:
•
•
•
•
•
Frequency
Resolution Bandwidth
Level
Marker
Wide Mode
The fifth button is used to change the spectrum view to wide screen mode,
as shown in the picture 5-1, and with the Esc button the original view can be
restored.
Always use Esc button to return to the previous view/condition.
15.3.1 Frequency
Allows the User to set the tuning frequency and also the Span.
The Center frequency of the Spectrum window can be directly edited into
the window or set by the arrow buttons or by the rotary knob, which
frequency steps are set under the Manual mode.
Depressing the Center button the figures 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4 are selectable;
with the right arrow key it is possible to select the figures from 5 to 9, and
pressing again the right arrow key the units kHz, MHz and GHz becomes
accessible, as well as the decimal dot and the Back Space. The left arrow
key can be used as well to move back and forth from one screen to the
other. Pressing 0 as the first figure the decimal dot appears automatically.
To set a given frequency it is therefore enough to edit the value with the soft
keys and the left and right arrows, confirming the selections entering the
units value (kHz, MHz or GHz).
The figures entered appear in a small window just below the graph and the
default unit is MHz, so 100 kHz = 0,1 MHz; 10 kHz = 0,01 MHz;
1 kHz = 0,001 MHz and 100 Hz = 0,0001 MHz.
Using the Start and Stop buttons it is possible to select any start and stop
value in the frequency range 10 Hz to 30 MHz band.
Another method for setting the frequency is to enter the Center frequency
and the appropriate Span.
In this mode of operation the frequency step (spectrum resolution) is set
automatically, therefore it cannot be changed manually.
In order to better analyze the signals close to the ends of the band and
see them properly with any of the applicable filters, the receiver is able
to go lower than 10 Hz and higher than 30 MHz.
The actual minimum frequency that can be displayed on the screen is 0
Hz, the maximum is 32 MHz.
15-18
9010F Fast
15.3.2 RBW
The Resolution Bandwidth command is used to select the bandwidth of the
measuring filter. Seven bandwidth filters are available:
• 200 Hz CISPR 16 shaped at -6dB
•
9 kHz CISPR 16 shaped at -6dB
•
1 kHz at -6dB
•
3 kHz at -6dB
•
10 kHz at -6dB
•
30 kHz at -6dB
• 100 kHz at -6dB
• 300 kHz at -6dB
The three larger filters are selectable from the first RBW screen, and
pressing the More RBW button it is possible to select all the other filters.
These filters are mathematically modeled using FIR (Finite Impulse
Response) technique and they are exactly as required by the standards.
More filters will be available as an option for specific applications, e.g. to
cover Military Standards requirements, etc.
15.3.3 Level
The Level function has 5 sub-menus, each one with several options.
Pressing the Display button it is possible to set two parameters: the
visualized Dynamic range (chosen between 80, 100 and 120dB) and the
Reference Level, that can be increased or reduced by steps of 5dB within
the range +70 dBµV to 105 dBµV (-35 to 0 dBm).
The Input button opens a submenu which is dedicated to the setting of the
input attenuator and to switch on-off the built-in preamplifier.
The PMM 9010F receiver takes automatically into account the settings of all
the Input parameters and always displays the correct value of the level. The
User is not required to make any correction to the readings.
15.3.3.1 Input:
Attenuators
and
preamplifier
Being entered in the Input submenu, to increase or decrease the attenuation
at the input, press Att + or Att -, and for each touch the attenuation is
increased or decreased of 5 dB (preset value). Depressing either one of
these keys force the receiver in manual attenuation.
When the input attenuation is 0dB (condition that can be achieved only if the
Minimum Attenuation is set to 0 dB as well), the yellow led to the left of the
input BNC connector is ON and indicates a warning status.
The Min Att button acts as a toggle switch: it selects or deselects the
minimum attenuation of 10 dB. When the minimum attenuation is selected,
the attenuator – doesn’t matter if in automatic or in manual condition cannot be lowered under 10 dB.
Unless specifically required by the test conditions, do not remove the
minimum attenuation of 10 dB.
With the Preamp key it is possible to insert or exclude the built-in low noise
preamplification of 20 dB.
The internal 20 dB preamplifier can be used when very weak signals have to
be investigated. As already mentioned, with the preamplifier ON the receiver
takes automatically care of the 20 dB gain when measuring the signals.
The Att Auto button is used to switch from the two conditions of manual or
automatic attenuation setting.
Please note that the switching of the attenuators is relatively noisy and you
can perceive it distinctly with a “click” for each switch operation.
9010F Fast
15-19
Using 0 dB attenuation PMM 9010F has no input protection.
This is a potentially dangerous condition for the input stage of the
receiver.
Use 0 dB attenuation only if you are very sure that your input signal is
less than 1 V (or 120 dBµV).
Before to apply an unknown signal to PMM 9010F receiver, use an
oscilloscope or a wide band RF voltmeter to measure it. In any case set
Min. ATT at 10 dB and select the maximum available attenuation with
preamplifier OFF.
If needed, add an external coaxial attenuator on the input signal line.
15.3.3.2 OVER RANGE
Message
An Over Range indication will automatically appear on the screen to inform
the User that the levels of the measured signals in the spectrum window is
too high: to avoid measuring errors and even damages to the receiver a
higher attenuation shall be set.
15.3.3.3 Misc
Under the Miscellanea functions menu it is possible to activate or exclude
the Preselector filters, the Pulse Limiter, and also to set the Tracking
Generator.
The Preselector is composed by a group of filters automatically selected by
the PMM 9010F while it is sweeping or anyway measuring. The aim of the
preselector is to reduce the amount of out-of-band energy entering in the
receiver, thus helping a lot in reducing intermodulation problems and similar
undesired behaviors.
In Analyzer mode the preselector is available only if the entire span falls in
one filter band (see the main specification in chapter 1 to verify the
frequency bands). In this situation on the display it will be shown: Preselector
ON. If the span is larger than one filter only, on the display the symbol *** will
appear instead.
It can be set either ON or OFF with the associated button, and normally it
should be always enabled.
On the top left corner of the screen the symbol “Off” or “On” will be
displayed.
The Pulse Limiter is a very useful device to protect the input of the receiver
from transient overvoltages. Doing conducted emission tests, quite often
there are conducted disturbances (usually associated to switching
operations in the EUT or along the line under test) which are too high and
that propagates through the LISN up to the receiver. Sometime these
disturbances cannot be seen on the receiver because they are out of
measurement bandwidth, nevertheless the associate energy is high enough
to damage the input attenuator and/or the Analog-to-Digital Converter of the
PMM 9010F (the first mixer in a traditional receiver).
This pulse limiter has an integrated 10dB attenuator and a 30 MHz low-pass
filter.
When the Pulse Limiter is selected, on the upper part of the screen the
letters P.L. appear next the value of the Minimum Attenuation and the
reading on the receiver is automatically corrected for the attenuation factor of
the Pulse Limiter.
Pressing the RF OUT button the receiver enters the Tracking generator
menu.
15-20
9010F Fast
15.3.3.4 Tracking
generator
The tracking generator is an internal, high stability and accuracy, 50 Ohm
RF generator ranging from 10 Hz to 50 MHz.
Activating the Tracking On function the generator is always tuned at the
same PMM 9010F measurement frequency and scans the range together
with the receiver. This is the standard way a tracking generator works in all
spectrum analyzers.
If the Tracking On function is disabled, the generator becomes a CW signal
source tuned at the frequency set under the RF OUT Freq window.
As usual, to set a given frequency it is therefore enough to edit the value
with the soft keys and the left and right arrows, confirming the selections
entering the units value (kHz, MHz or GHz).
Pressing 0 as the first figure the decimal dot appears automatically.
In both operating modes (tracking or fixed frequency) the output level can
be set between 60,0 and 90,0 dBµV with 0,1dB steps using the RF OUT
Level button.
If a higher or lower level is needed, the User shall adopt either an external
amplifier or an external attenuator.
The tracking generator is extremely useful for several applications: first of
all it is essential to calibrate the receiver itself thanks to the automatic
internal routines specifically developed to this extent, then it can also be
used to transform the PMM 9010F in a scalar network analyzer, helping a
lot in designing and testing RF filters, active stages and a lot of other
circuits.
15.3.3.5 Detector
This menu allows the Operator to select the most appropriate detector for
the test.
In Analyzer mode the Peak, Average and RMS (Root Mean Square)
detectors are available and can be selected via the appropriate button.
Hold time
The Hold Time (expressed in milliseconds) represents the time the receiver
uses to “take a snapshot” of the incoming signal and to measure it with the
chosen detector. When selecting a detector, the default hold time value is
automatically loaded, but in some cases this time is not appropriate, e.g.
when the interference signals have a low repetition rate. In this case the
PMM 9010F sees a high input signal and therefore tries to set the proper
attenuation automatically increasing the value or the input attenuators.
However, when the input attenuation is set the signal is gone, so the
receiver lowers the attenuation, but then a new peak arrives, and so on
and so forth..
On the other hand, if the Hold Time is too high the PMM 9010F cannot
properly follow the signals.
In this situation the Hold Time value should be manually set to find a
correct compromise.
To set the Hold Time to the lowest possible value (this value dynamically
depends from the measurement conditions), enter the figure 0; if a value
lower than the allowed is entered, the lowest possible value is
automatically selected.
The max. Hold Time that can be set is 120 sec.
9010F Fast
15-21
15.3.3.6 Conversion
factor
When using a transducer to make a measurement – a Voltage or Current
Probe, an Antenna, etc. – there is always the need to add to the measured
values the conversion factor of the transducer in use.
The Conversion factor may also take proper account of losses as cable
loss, attenuators added externally to the receiver, etc.
The PMM 9010F can handle these factors in an automatic way and directly
correct the readings.
The PMM 9010F can store in its internal non-volatile memory up to 4
different correction factors, and use them one at a time when recalled.
However, the Conversion Factors shall be created and loaded via the
PMM 9010F Software Utility.
Press the relevant button to load the conversion factor, and NONE to
unload it.
15.3.4 Marker
With this command the Marker function can be enabled.
Switching ON the marker it appears on the screen as a small black pointing
down arrow, and simultaneously a small window shows up in the bottom
left corner of the screen, indicating the actual frequency and level read by
the marker.
Pressing the Peak button the marker will automatically move to the highest
signal found in the span range in that given moment, and with the help of
the Center button the frequency selected by the marker becomes the
center frequency on the screen, making very easy any signal analysis.
ESC : This button allows to return to the previous view or condition.
15-22
9010F Fast
Annex - A
RMS-AVG and C-AVG Detectors
All the following examples are indifferently referred to the PMM 9010 or
the PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P.
A-A.1 Introduction
PMM 9010 has been designed to allow the use of many kinds of detectors.
CISPR Standard has introduced the application of two detectors that are
derived from the Root Mean Squared and from the Average ones.
To have these two additional detector available it is recommended the upgrade
of the Unit to a Firmware revision 1.85 or following.
Please refer to chapter 8 of the User’s Manual to find the instructions
concerning how to upgrade the internal firmware.
The present Annex provides information needed to use the added firmware
functions both for PMM 9010 and for PMM 9030/9060/9180 extension.
A-A.2 RMS-AVG
Definition
The RMS-Average detector is a payment special function implemented in
the PMM 9010 receiver.
RMS-Average detector is manufactured under license of Rohde & Schwarz
GmbH & Co. KG.
The RMS-Average detector, according to the CISPR 16-1-1 standard, supplies
a reading of the input signal that is weighted, for repeated pulses, such that for
a constant indication, the relationship between amplitude and repetition
frequency is in accordance with the following rule:
the Amplitude is proportional to (repetition frequency)-1/2
The value is the maximum level during the measurement time (Hold Time) and
nd
the averaging is carried out with a lowpass filter of the 2 order to simulate a
mechanical instrument.
The calibration is in reference to the RMS value of an unmodulated sinewave
signal.
A.A.3 RMS-AVG
Activation
Procedure
(option)
To enable the RMS-AVG Detector use the 9010 Set code Utility.
For further information on software installation refer to the “Updating
firmware and Activation code Utility” chapter.
Click on “9010 Set code Utility” (WrDongle.EXE) once for running the Set
code program, so getting the following window:
Document 9010EN-31229-2.46 - © NARDA 2013
RMS-AVG and C-AVG Detectors
A-A-1
Copy the 40 Digit Serial Code in the Dongle Code Window and select the
Write RMS-AVG Dongle button.
This message appears when the Dongle code is not valid.
It will be shown the following message; press OK to confirm.
The software will inform that the Dongle Code has been successfully stored.
Press Ok to close the program.
A-A-2
RMS-AVG and C-AVG Detectors
A-A.4 C-AVG
Definition
CISPR 16-1-1 defines the Average detector as designed to indicate the
weighted average value of the maximum value of the envelope of the signal
passed through the pre-detector stages:
up to 1000 MHz, is defined as the response of the measuring receiver to
pulses of repetition rate n Hz and impulse area of 1,4/n mVs emf at
50Ω source impedance that shall be equal to the response to an unmodulated
sine-wave signal at the tuned frequency having an emf with rms value of 66
dBµV.
The value of n shall be 25 for Band A, 500 for Band B, and 5000 for Bands C
and D.
For the frequencies over 1 GHz the value of n shall be 50 000.
The average detector is useful to measure narrowband signals to overcome
problems associated with either modulation content or the presence of
broadband noise.
When the Average is measured according to CISPR 16-1-1, the maximum
value of the linear mean envelope during the measurement interval is showwn.
The detector is used, for example, to measure pulsed sinusoidal signals with a
low pulse repetition rate. It is calibrated with the rms value of an unmodulated
sinewave signal. Averaging is carried out with lowpass filters of the 2nd order
(simulating a mechanical instrument).
Be sure not to overload PMM 9010: the input signal should not exceed
the maximum level indicated in the main specifications in chapter 1.
Also do not apply any signal to RF generator output connector.
RMS-AVG and C-AVG Detectors
A-A-3
A-A.5 Sweep Mode
The Sweep mode is used to operate the PMM 9010 as a powerful scanning
EMI receiver. To enter in this mode it’s enough to depress the Sweep soft key
on the main screen, and immediately the scan setup window pops up and
allows the operator to set the parameters for the scan. All the automatic
settings (RBW, frequency step, etc.) refer to the CISPR standard.
In Sweep mode the Peak, QPeak, C-Rms, RMS, C-Avg, Avg detectors are
available.
A-A.5.1 Detector
selection
To select the desired detector, from the main Sweep menu, enter the
Measure setup, then press the soft-keys labeled Level, Detector and choose
the proper one.
Pressing the Rms/Avg key these four more detectors are available.
A-A-4
RMS-AVG and C-AVG Detectors
A-A.5.2 Smart
Detector
The Smart Detector is an innovative special function implemented in the PMM
9010 receiver with the purpose of reducing the test time and increasing the
productivity of the lab.
This function works only when at least one limit is loaded, therefore
remember to enable a limit to run the Smart detector function.
Selecting one out of the five Smart detectors the receiver will execute the
scan using at first the Peak detector and, if a peak value is found over the
selected limit minus a Margin set with the specific button, the reading is remeasured and displayed with the chosen (C-Avg, AVG, C-Rms, RMS or
QPeak) detector.
Obviously this way of operation results in a much faster scan sweep and
moreover it immediately draws the attention of the test Engineer to the most
critical points. The limit associated to the Margin is displayed as a bold black
line and is automatically selected by the receiver depending which Smart
detector is chosen; for example, if a Smart QP is selected, the associated QP
limit line will be displayed as a bold black line.
It is immediately clear that this function is very useful to dramatically reduce
test time and increase the productivity of the test lab.
To deselect the Smart Detector function simply select a single detector.
The weighting time must be properly set in the Hold Time window to
allow the Smart detectors functions to operate as intended.
The Hold Time is the measurement time the receiver takes to value the input
signal and form result weighted by the selected detector.
When using the C-Avg (CISPR-Average) or the C-RMS (CISPR-RMS)
detector, since for definition they are characterized by a long time constant, the
minimum measurement time should be set long enough to allow a correct
measurement.
For this reason, when unknown signal are to be measured, the Hold Time
should be at least 1000ms to correctly weight signals pulsed at a rate of 5 Hz
or faster.
With the Peak, RMS and AVG detectors the smallest settable
measurement time depends on the RBW.
If several detectors are used contemporarily the Hold Time should be set
to meet the requirement of the slowest one, so that the results of the
measurement are correct for all them.
When a frequency change or an attenuation variation occurs, PMM 9010 waits
automatically the time needed to the internal circuits to overcome the transient
before the measurement time starts again.
PMM 9010 can be remotely controlled also when it is connected to its
options such as 9030/9060/9180 and Click meter Switching operation
Box.
RMS-AVG and C-AVG Detectors
A-A-5
A-A.6 Operating
Manual
Changes
Instruments manufactured after the printing of the User’s manual may
have a serial number prefix not listed on the title page; this indicates that
instruments with different Serial Number prefix may be different from
those documented in the manual itself.
A-A-6
RMS-AVG and C-AVG Detectors
Annex - B
Additional RBW filters
All the following examples are indifferently referred to the PMM 9010 or
the PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P.
A-B.1 Introduction
PMM 9010 has been designed to allow the use of many RBW filters.
MIL-STD-461E requires the application of proper RBW Filters.
To have these additional RBW Filters available it is necessary to enable the
related Option (see “MIL-STD-461E Activation procedure” paragraph).
It is recommended the upgrade of the Unit to a Firmware revision 1.85 or
following. Please refer to chapter 8 of the User’s Manual to find the instructions
concerning how to upgrade the internal firmware.
The present Annex provides information needed to use the added firmware
functions both for PMM 9010 and for PMM 9030/9060/9180 extension.
A-B.2 MIL-STD-461E
Activation
Procedure
(option)
To enable the MIL-STD-461E Filters use the 9010 Set code Utility.
For further information on software installation refer to the “Updating
firmware and Activation code Utility” chapter.
Click on “9010 Set code Utility” (WRDONGLE.EXE) once for running the Set
code program, so getting the following window:
Copy the 40 Digit Serial Code in the Dongle Code Window and select the
Write MIL-STD Dongle button.
This message appears when the Dongle code is not valid
Document 9010EN-31229-2.46 - © NARDA 2013
Additional RBW filters
A-B-1
It will be shown the following message; press OK to confirm.
The software will inform that the Dongle Code has been successfully stored;
Press Ok to close the program.
A-B.3 Analyzer Mode
To enter in the ANALYZER Mode it’s enough to depress the Analyzer soft key
on the main screen.
In this mode the receiver works as a powerful Spectrum Analyzer and the
display shows the "spectrum analysis" in the frequency domain of a signal
tuned at a given frequency.
The analysis is done at the selected span frequency.
Using the marker facility the User can accomplish a very accurate
measurement of the signals either in frequency as well as in level.
A-B.3.1 RBW
Selection
The Spectrum mode function is divided into five sub windows:
•
•
•
•
•
Frequency
Resolution Bandwidth
Level
Marker
Wide Mode
The fifth button is used to change the spectrum view to wide screen mode, as
shown in the picture 5-1, and with the Esc button the original view can be
restored.
Always use Esc button to return to the previous view/condition.
A-B.3.2 MIL Filters
A-B-2
The Resolution Bandwidth command is used to select the bandwidth of the
measuring filter.
The three larger filters are selectable from the first RBW screen, and pressing
the More RBW button it is possible to select all the other filters.
These filters are mathematically modeled using FIR (Finite Impulse Response)
technique and they are exactly as required by the standards.
Four additional bandwidth filters are now available:
•
10 Hz MIL at -6dB
• 100 Hz MIL at -6dB
•
1 kHz MIL at -6dB
• 10 kHz MIL at -6dB
Additional RBW filters
A-B.3.3 MIL Filters
over 30MHz
Using PMM 9030, PMM 9060, PMM 9180, and PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P over
30 MHz, the 10 kHz, 100kHz and 1MHz filter are MIL-STD-461E (they are not
optional but always available). The 1MHz filter is also CISPR 16-1-1 compliant
(B-imp).
A-B.4 Manual Mode
The MANUAL mode is a very useful feature to manually control the receiver
and to deeply investigate electrical signals modifying the parameters of
receiver exactly as per the needs of the Test Engineer.
It is possible, for example, to observe the signals exceeding the limits
frequency by frequency; evaluating their levels measured simultaneously with
3 different detectors (Peak, RMS and Average); listening to them after a
demodulation, etc.
To enter in Manual Mode press the key in the main menu.
A-B.4.1 RBW
Selection
The Manual mode function has five sub windows:
•
•
•
•
•
Frequency
Level
Resolution Bandwidth
Hold Time
Demodulation
Always use Esc button to return to the previous view/condition.
A-B.4.2 MIL Filters
The Resolution Bandwidth command is used to select the bandwidth of the
measuring filter.
The three larger filters are selectable from the first RBW screen, and pressing
the More RBW button it is possible to select all the other filters.
These filters are mathematically modeled using FIR (Finite Impulse Response)
technique and they are exactly as required by the standards.
Four additional bandwidth filters are now available:
•
10 Hz MIL at -6dB
• 100 Hz MIL at -6dB
•
1 kHz MIL at -6dB
• 10 kHz MIL at -6dB
When a non-CISPR filter is selected, the Quasi Peak, C-RMS and C-AVG
detectors are disabled.
Additional RBW filters
A-B-3
A-B.4.3 Hold Time
The Hold Time (expressed in milliseconds) represents the time the receiver
uses to “take a snapshot” of the incoming signal and to measure it with the
chosen detector. When selecting a detector, the default hold time value is
automatically loaded, but in some cases this time is not appropriate, e.g. when
the interference signals have a low repetition rate or when the standard
impose a proper measurement time.
In this case it could happen that the PMM 9010 sees a high input signal and
therefore tries to set the proper attenuation automatically increasing the value
or the input attenuators. However, when the input attenuation is set the signal
is gone, so the receiver lowers the attenuation, but then a new peak arrives,
and so on and so forth…
On the other hand, if the Hold Time is too high the PMM 9010 cannot properly
follow the signals.
In this situation the Hold Time value should be manually set to find a correct
compromise.
To set the Hold Time to the lowest possible value (this value dynamically
depends from the measurement conditions), enter the figure 0; if a value lower
than the allowed is entered, the lowest possible value is automatically
selected.
The max. Hold Time that can be set is 30 sec (30.000 ms).
Be sure not to overload PMM 9010: the input signal should not exceed
the maximum level indicated in the main specifications in chapter 1.
Also do not apply any signal to RF generator output connector.
The weighting time must be properly set in the Hold Time window to
allow the desired detectors to operate as intended.
PMM 9010 can be remotely controlled also when it is working with its
options such as MIL Filters, 9030/9060/9180, Click meter and Four
Channels Click Meter.
A-B.5 Operating
Manual
Changes
Instruments manufactured after the printing of the User’s manual may
have a serial number prefix not listed on the title page; this indicates that
instruments with different Serial Number prefix may be different from
those documented in the manual itself.
A-B-4
Additional RBW filters
Annex - C
Click4E
Four Channels Click Meter Option
All the following examples are indifferently referred to the PMM 9010
or the PMM 9010/03P/30P/60P.
A-C.1 Introduction
The CLICK mode allows the User to make in a fast, easy and fully
automatic way a difficult test like the Discontinuous Disturbances
measurement, as defined by current CISPR standards.
To enable the Click Mode on the PMM 9010 or 9010/03P/30P/60P refer
to the “Click Mode Operating Instructions” chapter.
Document 9010EN-31229-2.46 - © NARDA 2013
Four Channels Click Meter Option
A-C-1
A-C.2 Installation
This section provides the information needed to install your PMM
9010/Click4E.
It includes the information pertinent to initial inspection and power
requirements, connections, operating environment, instrument mounting,
cleaning, storage and shipment.
A-C.2.1 Initial Inspection
When receiving the equipment, first inspect the shipping cardbox for any
damages.
If the shipping box is damaged, it should be kept until the contents of the
shipment have been checked for completeness and the instrument has
been checked mechanically and electrically.
A-C.2.2 Packing and
Unpacking
Verify the availability of all the shipped items with reference to the shipping
check list enclosed with the Operating Manual.
Notify any damage to the forwarder personnel as well as to your NARDA
Representative.
To avoid further damage, do not turn on the instrument when there
are signs of shipping damage to any portion of it.
A-C.2.3 Preparation
for Use
This is a Safety Class I and Installation Category II apparatus, and it is
equipped with a protective/functional earth terminal on the rear panel.
A good safety/functional ground connection should be provided
before to operate the receiver.
A-C.2.4 Click4E Option
mains supply
PMM 9010/Click4E Option can work at either 50 Hz or 60 Hz with a supply
voltage rated between 100 and 240 Volt AC.
It is necessary to use a cable, provided of the protective earth
terminal and terminated with the right mains connector which fits the
outlet in use.
A-C-2
Four Channels Click Meter Option
A-C.2.5 PMM 9010
Battery charging
To supply the PMM 9010 it is either possible to use the standard battery
charger supplied with the receiver, or connect the short cable from the rear
12VDC connector on the Click4E Option to the input CHARGER on the
rear panel of the receiver as visible in the figure.
Four Channels Click Meter Option
A-C-3
The charge status of the battery is displayed on the top right-hand corner of
A-C.2.6 Indication of
the screen in most of the receiver modes. The symbol of a small battery will
the battery
be filled up proportionally to the status of the battery charge.
status on the
screen and with
PW led
When the battery is not under charge, the actual voltage value is displayed
under the symbol and the length of the black bar filling the symbol indicates
the available autonomy still remaining.
When the battery charger is connected to the PMM 9010 the indication
“PWR” appears just below to the battery icon and the front panel PW led
becomes yellow if the receiver is switched on and red if the receiver is off.
The battery charging is suspended or ends automatically when one of the
following events occurs:
- the full capacity of the battery has been achieved,
- the internal temperature of the battery is higher then a preset safety
threshold,
- the charging time limit has been exceeded.
Both during recharging and when charge is completed PMM 9010 is ready
for use.
The PW led on the front panel blinks green when the battery voltage
drops below 7,0V to warn the Operator that the instrument is running
out of battery.
To prevent any damage to the battery, the PMM 9010 automatically
switches off when the battery voltage falls below 6,5V.
In order to keep the batteries fully functional, it is crucial to have a
complete recharge before storing them for periods longer than 4
months. Therefore, it is suggested to recharge the batteries at least
every 4 months even when the receiver has not been used.
A-C.2.7 Environment
The operating environment of the receiver is specified to be within the
following limits:
• Temperature
• Humidity
• Altitude
+0° to +40° C
< 90% relative
4000 meters
The instrument should be stored and shipped in a clean, dry environment
which is specified to be within the following limitations:
• Temperature
• Humidity
• Altitude
A-C-4
Four Channels Click Meter Option
-40° to + 50° C
< 95% relative
15.000 meters
A-C.2.8 Return for
Service
If the instrument should be returned to NARDA for service, please complete
the service questionnaire enclosed with the Operating Manual and attach it to
the instrument. To minimize the repair time, be as specific as possible when
describing the failure. If the failure only occurs under certain conditions,
explain how to duplicate the failure.
If possible, reusing of the original packaging to ship the equipment is
preferable. In case other package should be used, ensure to wrap the
instrument in heavy paper or plastic.
Use a strong shipping box and use enough shock absorbing material
all around the equipment to provide a firm cushion and prevent
movement in the shipping box; in particular protect the front panel.
Seal the shipping box securely.
Mark the shipping box FRAGILE to encourage careful handling.
A-C.2.9 Equipment
Cleaning
Use a clean, dry, non abrasive cloth for external cleaning of the equipment.
To clean the equipment do not use any solvent, thinner, turpentine,
acid, acetone or similar matter to avoid damage to external plastic or
display surfaces.
A-C.2.10 Equipment
ventilation
To allow correct equipment ventilation ensure that the vent grids on the
rear panel and on the bottom of the receiver are free by any obstructing
object.
A-C.2.11 Hardware
Installation
PMM 9010/Click4E Option is delivered from factory ready to use. Remove
the receiver from its cardboard shipping box, connect the power cord to the
mains and turn the rear power switch “ON”.
The PW Led lights up.
After having been switched ON, the PMM 9010/Click4E Option boots with its
internal BIOS and runs the firmware which manages the receiver.
At the beginning the instrument performs a diagnostic test to check if
everything is working properly.
The boot sequence is indicated by a fast blinking of the four front panel leds.
The intercommunication between the two units is done by connecting
the RS-232 Port of the 9010 to the RS-232 Port (to 9010) of the Click4E
Option with a standard serial cable (supplied with the receiver).
When the Optional Unit is ready (the PW led is blinking and L1, L2, L3 leds
are off) it is necessary to switch on the PMM 9010 receiver.
When the sequence is completed the PW Led on the Click4E Option
becomes green and the main screen shows the test results and the main
functional keys on the right of the LCD display: the receiver is now ready to
operate.
Connect the supplied RF Cable from the Output BNC of the Optional
Unit to the Input of the 9010 Receiver.
Connect the output of any LISN (or any other transducer) to the RF input of
the Optional Unit.
When using a PMM LISN, it is possible to control from the receiver the lines
of the LISN and automatically switch between them connecting a special
cable between the User Port of the receiver and the LISN remote control
input.
To switch OFF the unit move the main switch to “OFF” position.
Four Channels Click Meter Option
A-C-5
A-C.3 Click Mode
PMM 9010/Click4E Option gives the possibility to measure simultaneously up
to four frequencies (channels) by the way reducing the time needed to
complete the test.
To enter in Click Mode press the key in the main menu, and immediately the
first window opens as follow:
PMM 9010 initial screen showing the IDLE Mode of the Click Meter function.
When the Click4E Four Channels Option is operating one more softkey is
available to select which of the channels has to be investigated (CHAN #1 in
the example above)
The digits are showed between brackets on the top of the screen stand for:
- 1st Digit is value automatically set by 9010 according to the Standard and to
the Limit selected, as sensitivity of receiver has to be in a specific range
around the level of selected Limit; just for precautions it is possible to add an
external attenuation.
- 2nd Digit is a fixed attenuation value introduced by Click/4E extension unit
(not changeable);
- 3rd Digit is corresponding to the eventual Extern.Att. value specified by
operator in the Click Setup Menu when an external attenuator is being
connected to the Click/4E RF Input for precaution.
In conclusion, the last Digit is the only one you can modify and set to the
value of an externally applied attenuator.
When the PMM 9010 receiver is connected to a LISN to perform conducted
interference measurements of the EUT, the RF output of the LISN shall be
connected to the RF input of the receiver. In order to switch automatically
between the lines of the LISN, it shall be connected to the User Port of the
receiver thanks to the dedicated cable supplied with the LISN.
In order to avoid the unwanted tripping of the protection devices, an
insulation transformer shall always be used between the mains supply
and a LISN.
A-C.3.2 Using the Pulse The built in pulse limiter is a useful device to protect the input of the receiver
from transient over voltages. Sometime the conducted disturbances entering
Limiter
the receiver through the LISN are too high - even if they cannot be seen on
the PMM 9010 because they are out of measurement bandwidth - and the
associate energy is high enough to damage the input circuit.
The pulse limiter is automatically selected when needed and works as a
protection of the input from unexpected pulses.
A-C.3.1 Using an
Artificial Mains
Network
(AMN or LISN)
When using an external Artificial Mains Network, to reduce the
probability of damages caused by transient voltage pulses always
disconnect the PMM 9010 RF input before switching Equipment Under
Test supply ON or OFF.
A-C-6
Four Channels Click Meter Option
A-C.3.3 Click Mode
menu
The Click mode function has four commands:
•
•
•
•
•
Start
Clear: cancel and reset all data to start an idle test;
Chan #n selects the channel to be displayed;
Report
SETUP
Always use Esc button to return to the previous view/condition.
When CHAN #1 is selected the working receiver is the external PMM 9010,
when CHAN #2 is selected the L1 Led is green, the same for CHAN #3 and
L2, CHAN #4 and L3.
During a standard measurement the corresponding Led will be on for each of
the working channels.
Leds: None = Chan #1
L1 = Chan #2
L2 = Chan #3
L3 = Chan #4
A-C.4 Self Calibration
Pressing the Autocal button PMM 9010 and 9010/Click4E start performing
their automatic self-calibration, using the internal precise tracking generator as
a reference.
The connection between the internal tracking generator and the input of the
receiver is done automatically inside the instrument.
The automatic Self Calibration, when the Four Channels Click meter Option is
operating, is performed in two successive steps. During the first step Chan #1
and #2 carry out their autocal, and automatically at the end of this the Chan #3
and #4 carry out their own autocal.
During the autocal each channel led blinks green.
To interrupt the self-calibration press the key Abort.
When the self-calibration is successfully finished a message is displayed:
In order to avoid any possible external influence, it is suggested to
disconnect all cables from the PMM 9010 and 9010/Click4E Option RF
ports during the self-calibration process.
Four Channels Click Meter Option
A-C-7
A-C.5 Operation
As soon as the Setup has been done it is possible to start the test.
First of all the PMM 9010 will determine the click rate N, and – if all the
conditions apply – after that the analyzer will immediately continue measuring
the number of clicks exceeding the upper quartile limit L q .
Simply select Start: the PMM 9010 will automatically take care of all the
necessary steps, reporting at the end of the test all the relevant results.
In this way the PMM 9010 does the determination of the click rate at the two
frequencies of 150 kHz and 500 kHz simultaneously, and then it executes the
test.
A-C.5.1 Smart
Measure
The “Smart Measure” is a PMM 9010 unique feature which allows a relevant
time saving in Click measuring approach.
PMM 9010 can trace and memorize eventual saturation just got during
automatic measurement test procedure, in a way that, in case no saturation
conditions at all have been detected, the so got test result can be used directly
to soon calculate the new limit Lq, without the need of repeating the test for it.
To get the system working properly it is necessary the PMM 9010 runs a
firmware revision 1.85 or following.
Be sure not to overload PMM 9010/Click4E: the input signal should not
exceed the maximum level indicated in the main specifications.
Also do not apply any signal to RF generator output connector.
Click Meter Reports can be remotely downloaded to the PC using the
PMM Emission Suite Software.
A-C.6 Operating
Manual
Changes
Instruments manufactured after the printing of the User’s manual may
have a serial number prefix not listed on the title page; this indicates that
instruments with different Serial Number prefix may be different from
those documented in the manual itself.
A-C-8
Four Channels Click Meter Option
Annex - D
Procedure to measure the insertion
loss of a LISN with a PMM 9010 Receiver
All the tests are done under the responsibility of the Operator who is
carrying them out.
A-D.1 Introduction
This paragraph provides information concerning how to test and measure
the Insertion Loss of any Line Impedance Stabilization Network (LISN).
Taking this as a guide, in a similar way other instruments or circuits can be
checked or calibrated.
A-D.2 Operation
The purpose of this procedure is to show how to operate the PMM 9010
receiver in order to measure the transfer function of a LISN in the CISPR
16-1-2 conducted frequency range from 9 kHz to 30 MHz.
It can be useful, for example, to make periodic tests as well as to check
new instruments or make comparisons.
A-D.3 Test setup
To carry out the test the following parts are required:
• EMI Receiver PMM 9010 with its User’s Manual
• #2 RF Coaxial BNC-BNC Cables
• LISN under test
• Special AC-Plug to BNC adapters (provided for the most diffused AC
single-phase Schuko and Three-Phase sockets, see following A-D-13
section for further references)
A-D.4 Settings
Before starting the test, it is necessary to set the PMM 9010 receiver
according to the following list.
Refer to the User’s Manual to find how to operate the receiver in order to
set it properly.
• RF OUTPUT
=
ON
• TG
=
ON
(default)
• OUTPUT LEVEL
=
90.0 dBμV
(default)
• MODE
=
SWEEP
• PRESELECTOR
=
ON
(default)
• PREAMPLIFIER
=
OFF
(default)
• REF. LEVEL =
110 dBμV
• DYNAMIC RANGE =
80 dB
• ATTENUATOR
=
AUTO
(default)
• DETECTOR
=
AVG
• HOLD TIME
=
MINIMUM
(default)
• FREQUENCY
=
A+B
(default)
Document 9010EN-31229-2.46 - © NARDA 2013
LISN with PMM 9010
A-D-1
A-D.5 Measure the
Insertion Loss
(Voltage Division
Factor)
Be careful no voltage or mains network is connected to the device
(LISNs or others) under test.
It is possible to check the test setup by connecting the RF Output of the
PMM 9010 to its RF Input via one of the two BNC RF Coaxial cables
(eventually, in two steps, one of the cables at first and then the other).
In case the response is not as flat as expected please check the cables
and eventually run the Autocalibration of the receiver, then repeat the test.
Fig. A-D-1 Receiver verification
A-D.6 Connecting the
LISN under test
A-D-2
Before starting the measurement the LISN must be connected to the PMM
9010 EMI Receiver.

Connect one end of the first coaxial cable to the RF Output of the
PMM 9010 and the other end to the proper Mains Supply-BNC
Adapter.

Connect the second coaxial cable between the Receiver port
connector on the LISN and the RF Input connector of the PMM 9010.

Select the proper mains line under test (when possible).
LISN with PMM 9010
A-D.7 Starting the
Sweep
The Sweep mode is used to operate the PMM 9010 as a powerful scanning
EMI receiver. To enter in this mode it’s enough to depress the Sweep soft
key on the main screen, and immediately the scan setup window pops up
and allows the operator to set the parameters for the scan. All the automatic
settings (RBW, frequency step, etc.) refer to the CISPR standard.
Press the Measure softkey to enter the section where setting all the
necessary parameters.
Set the desired line of the LISN (when available).
Always use Esc button to return to the previous view/condition.
After having chosen the frequency band and set all the other parameters it is
possible to run the measurement scan simply touching the Exec Sweep
button.
To make subsequent sweeps with the same setting parameters, simply
press ReDo Sweep. This key is particularly useful after having loaded a
previously stored track (see 4.6), as with the Re Do Sweep the original
settings are kept for the new measurement: it is extremely easy to make
comparisons, for example, before and after a modification of the test setup.
Once the scan starts, it can be stopped at any time during the execution by
the Stop function key that appears during the scan.
The whole scan takes about 3 minutes for A+B frequency bands.
Fig. A-D-2 Sweep
LISN with PMM 9010
A-D-3
A-D.8 Marker
Selecting this function a Marker is immediately enabled, and it appears on the
screen as a small black pointing down arrow corresponding to the highest
reading; simultaneously a small window shows up in the bottom left corner of
the screen, indicating the actual frequency and level read by the marker.
The Marker Off exits from the marker function.
A-D.9 LISNs with
PMM Emission Suite
It is also possible, in a similar way, to run the performance test in the PC, using
the PMM Emission Suite.
Entering the sweep mode and clicking EXECUTE the PC software scans the
selected frequency band.
If a PMM LISN is to be checked it is also possible to automatically select the
lines and show on the same graph all the responses (not forgetting to manually
change BNC cable connection at LISN device’s Line before starting the next
sweep).
To do this please refer to the PEMS user’s manual and select proper Ancillary.
Frequency band
Some LISNs have a frequency band filter which can be introduced when
required.
PMM L2-16B for example is equipped with a switchable 150 kHz High Pass
filter.
The frequency response of such a kind of filter is also verifiable applying the
present procedure.
In this case the effects of the typical insertion loss of the circuit is summed to
the attenuation of the filter itself.
Example of the insertion
loss of a PMM L2-16B
LISN with the 150 kHz
High Pass filter activated.
A-D-4
LISN with PMM 9010
A-D.10 Note
This is not the procedure suggested by the Standard and used to certify the
LISNs.
If the measurement results are different from what expected please check
again and eventually refer to Customer’s Care service.
CISPR standard recommended calibration setup is reported below and
requires an expensive Network Analyzer equipment.
Fig. A-D-3 Network analyzer calibration Setup (L1)
Fig. A-D-4 Measurement Setup (L1)
LISN with PMM 9010
A-D-5
A-D.11 PMM LISNs
and Passive
probes
Fig. A-D-5
L1-150M: Single line LISN, 150A LISN
Fig. A-D-7
L3-32: Four lines, 3-phase, 32A LISN
Fig. A-D-9
L3-64/690: Four lines, 3-phase, 64A – 690Vac LISN
Fig. A-D-11
L1-500: Single line LISN, 500A LISN
A-D-6
LISN with PMM 9010
Fig. A-D-6
L2-16B: Two lines, Single phase, 16A LISN
Fig. A-D-8
L3-64: Four lines, 3-phase, 64A LISN
Fig. A-D-10
L3-100: Four lines, 3-phase, 100A LISN
Fig. A-D-12
L3-500: Four lines, 3-phase, 500A LISN
Fig. A-D-13
Fig. A-D-14
SHC-1/1000: 35 dB CISPR Voltage probe
A-D.12 Conversion
table
dBμV <> μV <> dBm
dBμV
-20
-10
0
6
10
12
20
24
30
32
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
107
SHC-2/1000: 30 dB CISPR Voltage probe;
μVolt
0.1
0.3
1
2
3
4
10
16
32
40
100
178
316
562
1000
1778
3162
5623
10000
17783
31623
56234
100000
223872
dBm (Z=50 Ω)
-127
-117
-107
-101
-97
-95
-87
-83
-77
-75
-67
-62
-57
-52
-47
-42
-37
-32
-27
-22
-17
-12
-7
0
pWatt (Z=50 Ω)
0.0000002
0.000002
0.00002
0.00008
0.00020
0.00032
0.002
0.005
0.020
0.03
0.20
0.6
2.0
6.3
20
63
200
631
1995
6310
19953
63096
199526
1000000
A-D-15 Conversion table
LISN with PMM 9010
A-D-7
A-D.13 LISN Service
kit
The LISN Service kit includes special AC-Plug to BNC adapters.
A-D-16 PMM L2-16 model adapter
(Single-phase 16 A sockets)
A-D-17 PMM L3-32 model adapter
(32 A sockets)
A-D-18 PMM L3-64 model adapter
(64 A sockets)
A-D-19 3-phase socket to BNC adapter.
Model adequated to PMM L3-100 and higher
(100 A sockets)
A-D-20 Rigid case
A-D-21 Rigid case internal view
A-D-8
LISN with PMM 9010
NARDA
Safety
Test
Solutions
S.r.l. Socio Unico
Sales & Support:
Via Leonardo da Vinci, 21/23
20090 Segrate (MI) - ITALY
Tel.: +39 02 2699871
Fax: +39 02 26998700
Manufacturing Plant:
Via Benessea, 29/B
17035 Cisano sul Neva (SV)
Tel.: +39 0182 58641
Fax: +39 0182 586400
http://www.narda-sts.it
Mod. 18-1
Caro cliente
grazie per aver acquistato un prodotto NARDA! Sei in possesso di uno strumento che per molti anni ti garantirà un’alta qualità di servizio. NARDA riconosce
l'importanza del Cliente come ragione di esistenza; ciascun commento e suggerimento, sottoposto all'attenzione della nostra organizzazione, è tenuto in grande
considerazione. La nostra qualità è alla ricerca del miglioramento continuo. Se uno dei Suoi strumenti NARDA necessita di riparazione o calibrazione, può aiutarci
a servirla più efficacemente compilando questa scheda e accludendola all’apparecchio.
Tuttavia, anche questo prodotto diventerà obsoleto. In questo caso, ti ricordiamo che lo smaltimento dell'apparecchiatura deve essere fatto in conformità con i
regolamenti locali. Questo prodotto è conforme alle direttive WEEE dell’Unione Europea (2002/96/EC) ed appartiene alla categoria 9 (strumenti di controllo). Lo
smaltimento, in un ambiente adeguato, può avvenire anche attraverso la restituzione del prodotto alla NARDA senza sostenere alcuna spesa. Può ottenere ulteriori
informazioni contattando i venditori NARDA o visitando il nostro sito Web www.narda-sts.it.
Dear Customer
thank you for purchasing a NARDA product! You now own a high-quality instrument that will give you many years of reliable service. NARDA recognizes the
importance of the Customer as reason of existence; in this view, any comment and suggestion you would like to submit to the attention of our service organization
is kept in great consideration. Moreover, we are continuously improving our quality, but we know this is a never ending process. We would be glad if our present
efforts are pleasing you. Should one of your pieces of NARDA equipment need servicing you can help us serve you more effectively filling out this card and
enclosing it with the product.
Nevertheless, even this product will eventually become obsolete. When that time comes, please remember that electronic equipment must be disposed of in
accordance with local regulations. This product conforms to the WEEE Directive of the European Union
(2002/96/EC) and belongs to Category 9 (Monitoring and Control Instruments). You can return the instrument to us free of charge for proper environment friendly
disposal. You can obtain further information from your local NARDA Sales Partner or by visiting our website at www.narda-sts.it.
5 Servizio richiesto: 5 Service needed:
… Solo taratura
… Calibration only
… Riparazione
… Repair
… Riparazione & Taratura
… Repair & Calibration
… Taratura SIT
… Certified Calibration
… Altro:
… Other:
Ditta:
Company:
Indirizzo:
Address:
Persona da contattare:
Technical contact person:
Telefono:
Phone n.
Modello:
Equipment model:
Numero di serie:
Serial n.
5 Accessori ritornati con l’apparecchiatura: … Nessuno … Cavo(i)
… Cavo di alimentazione
5 Accessories returned with unit:
… None
… Cable(s) … Power cable
Altro:
Other:
5 Sintomi o problemi osservati: 5 Observed symptoms / problems:
5 Guasto: … Fisso
… Intermittente
5 Failure: … Continuous … Intermittent
Sensibile a : … Freddo
Sensitive to:
… Cold
… Caldo
… Heat
Descrizione del guasto/condizioni di funzionamento:
Failure symptoms/special control settings description:
Se l’unità è parte di un sistema descriverne la configurazione:
If unit is part of system please list other interconnected equipment and system set up:
… Vibrazioni … Altro
… Vibration
… Other
Suggerimenti / Commenti / Note:
Suggestions / Comments / Note:
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement